FXpDia (Modify)

DIANA
Finite Element Analysis
Users Manual
FX+ for DIANA

Release 9.5
TNO DIANA
BV
ii
DIANA Finite Element Analysis
Users Manual release 9.5
FX+ for DIANA
Edited by: Jonna Manie
Published by:
TNO DIANA bv
Delftechpark 19a, 2628 XJ Delft, The Netherlands.
Phone: +31 88 34262 00
Fax: +31 88 34262 99
E-mail: info@tnodiana.com
Web page: tnodiana.com
Trademarks.
Diana is a registered trademark of TNO DIANA bv. FemGV, FemGen, FemView are trademarks of Femsys Ltd. CADfix is a registered trademark of TranscenData Europe Limited.
FX+ is a registered trademark of Midas IT Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation. PostScript, Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems, Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc. DXF is a trademark of Autodesk Inc. ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Technology Inc. CADDS
and Pro/ENGINEER are registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation. CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes S.A. IGES is a trademark of IGES Data
Analysis, Inc. Parasolid is software owned by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. 1986-2014. PATRAN is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation. The
X Window System is a trademark of M.I.T. unix is a registered trademark of UNIX Systems
Laboratories, Inc. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. SUN and Solaris are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. HP is a registered trademark
of Hewlett-Packard Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to
their respective holders.
First edition, June 18, 2014.

Copyright 2014 by TNO DIANA bv, all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced in any form by print, photoprint, microfilm or any other means, without the prior
written permission of the publisher.
The information in this document is subjected to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by TNO DIANA bv. TNO DIANA bv assumes no responsibility for
any errors that may appear in this document.
The Diana system is the sole property of TNO DIANA bv. Software materials made available
are solely for use at a single site; they are not to be distributed to others without prior written
permission of TNO DIANA bv.
This document was prepared with the LATEX Document Preparation System.
June 18, 2014 First ed.
Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA
Contents at a Glance
Preface
General Introduction
xv
1 Basics
2 Modeling
3 Analysis with Diana
27
4 Results Assessment
29
II
31
Examples
5 Analysis of a Concrete Floor
33
6 Post-tensioned Concrete Beam
47
7 Dynamic Relaxation
71
8 Pedestrian Excitation on a Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge
85
9 Construction of a Tunnel Section
99
10 Early Age Behavior of a Purification Wall
129
11 Derived Results for Beams
149
12 Cablestayed Bridge Installation
163
13 Shear-force Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam
179
14 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Plate
193
15 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Beam
201
16 Response of Steel Using Two-Surface Material Model
211
17 Eccentrically Loaded Reinforced Concrete Beam
223
18 Design Example GTB-table
237
19 Composed Line Elements
261
20 Composed Surface Elements
287
21 3D Reinforced Concrete Slab with Design Checks and Material Failure297
iv
22 Bond-slip of Reinforcements in 2D Elements
311
23 Shear Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam Subjected to Prescribed

Displacement
329
III
Geotechnical Examples
341
24 Tunnel in a Hoek-Brown Rock Medium
343
25 Pit Excavation in 3D Layered Soil
353
26 Settlement of a Strip Footing - Nonlinear Drained Analysis
367
27 Nonlinear Undrained Drained Settlement Analysis
375
28 Nonlinear Effective Stress Undrained Analysis
383
29 Nonlinear Total Stress Undrained Analysis
391
30 Analysis of Bridge Pier Supported on Piled Footing
399
31 Slope Stability Analysis by Strength Reduction Method
411
32 Free Vibration Analysis of Soil Deposit and Dam
417
33 Compression Wave Propagation and Viscous Damping
423
34 Seismic Analysis of a Nonlinear Tunnel-Soil Model
431
IV
449
Appendix
A Available Element Types
451
Bibliography
455
Index
457
Contents
Preface
xv
1 Basics
1.1 Tools, Files and Work Flow . . . .
1.2 Graphical User Interface . . . . .
1.2.1
Main Window . . . . . .
1.2.2
On-line Reference Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
4
4
5
2 Modeling
2.1 Initiating a New Model . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Grid Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Geometry Definition . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Contours of the L-Clip . . . . .
2.3.2
Two Holes in the L-Clip . . . . .
2.4 Automatic Meshing of a Planar Area . .
2.4.1
Seeding for Mesh Refinement . .
2.4.2
Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
Mesh Assessment . . . . . . . .
2.5 Automatic Meshing of a Face . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Defining a Face . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2
Meshing the Face . . . . . . . .
2.6 Mapped Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
Defining Lines . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
Dividing Lines at Intersections .
2.6.3
Seeding for Optimal Mesh . . .
2.6.4
Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Finalizing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1
Material and Physical Properties
2.7.2
Boundary Constraints . . . . . .
2.7.3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
7
8
10
10
11
12
12
13
13
15
16
17
18
18
19
20
21
22
22
24
25
3 Analysis with Diana

3.1 Launching Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Starting the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
4 Results Assessment
4.1 Importing the Results . .
4.2 Displaying Results . . . .
4.2.1
Displacements .
4.2.2
Von Mises Stress
29
29
29
29
29
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vi
CONTENTS
II
Examples
5 Analysis of a Concrete Floor

5.1 Finite Element Model . . . . .
5.1.1
Geometry . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Properties . . . . . .
5.1.3
Meshing . . . . . . . .
5.1.4
Boundary Constraints
5.1.5
Loading . . . . . . . .
5.1.6
Exporting the Model
5.2 Linear Analysis . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Displacements . . . .
5.2.2
Bending Moments . .
31
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
41
42
43
6 Post-tensioned Concrete Beam

6.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5
Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.6
Adapting the time units . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Linear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Preliminary Linear Analysis Results . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1
Stress in Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2
Bending Moment in Beam . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3
Shear Force in Beam . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Serviceability Limit State Analysis . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Adapting the Element Integration Scheme
6.4.2
Running the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Serviceability Limit State Results . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Prestress relaxation in the tendon . . . . .
6.5.2
Stress Relaxation in the Beam . . . . . . .
6.6 Ultimate Limit State Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Plasticity in Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2
Stress in Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47
48
48
50
53
54
56
57
57
57
58
59
60
60
60
61
62
62
64
64
66
67
7 Dynamic Relaxation
7.1 Model Definition . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Material Properties . . . . .
7.1.3
Integration Scheme . . . . .
7.2 Displacement Control Analysis . . . .
7.2.1
Commands . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Convergence Logging . . . .
7.2.3
Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Force Control Analysis . . . . . . . .
7.3.1
Model Modifications . . . . .
7.3.2
7.3.3
Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Dynamic Relaxation Analysis . . . . .
7.4.1
Model Modifications . . . . .
7.4.2
Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . .
7.4.3
Transient Dynamic Analysis
7.4.4
7.4.5
Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.6
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
71
71
72
72
73
73
73
74
75
75
75
76
76
76
77
79
82
83
83
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CONTENTS
vii
8 Pedestrian Excitation on a Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge

8.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
Sectional Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Preliminary Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Results of Preliminary Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1
Eigenfrequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2
Eigenmodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3
Maximum Vertical Displacement Location . . . . .
8.4 Model Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.2
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Transient Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Results of Transient Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
85
87
87
87
88
89
89
89
90
90
91
91
91
95
96
97
9 Construction of a Tunnel Section

9.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1
Material and Physical Properties . . . . . . .
9.1.2
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3
Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.4
Boundary Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.5
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.6
Finishing the Model with the Mesh Editor
9.2 Nonlinear Phased Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1
Phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2
Phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3
Phase 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4
Phase 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5
Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
99
100
101
102
105
109
112
116
118
119
121
123
124
127
10 Early Age Behavior of a Purification Wall

10.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Loading and Boundary Conditions
10.2 Finishing the Model with the Mesh Editor
10.2.1 Concrete Material Properties . . .
10.2.2 Soil Material Properties . . . . . .
10.2.3 Boundary Convection . . . . . . .
10.2.4 Time Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Staggered FlowStress Analysis . . . . . .
10.4 Analysis Results of First Stage . . . . . . .
10.4.1 Heat Flow Analysis Results . . . .
10.4.2 Structural Analysis Results . . . .
10.5 Analysis Results of Second Stage . . . . . .
10.5.1 Heat Flow Analysis Results . . . .
10.5.2 Structural Analysis Results . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129
130
130
131
134
136
138
139
139
139
140
140
142
143
143
144
145
146
11 Derived Results for Beams

11.1 Finite Element Model . . . . .
11.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Properties . . . . . .
11.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . .
11.1.4 Boundary Conditions
11.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
149
149
150
150
151
152
152
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
viii
CONTENTS
11.1.6 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Unity Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Strength in Ultimate Limit State . . .
11.2.2 Area of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 Cracking in Serviceability Limit State
11.3 Fortran Code for Subroutine . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.1 Strength in Ultimate Limit State . . .
11.5.2 Area of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3 Cracking in Serviceability Limit State
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
152
153
153
154
155
155
159
159
160
160
160
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
163
163
163
164
164
164
165
166
167
167
167
169
169
174
13 Shear-force Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam

13.1 Finite element model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Beam Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Reinforcement Geometry . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Support and Loading Plates Geometry .
13.1.4 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.5 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.6 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179
180
180
180
181
182
184
185
186
186
188
14 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever

14.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.1 Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.4 Boundary Constraints . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . .
14.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1 Deformed shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.2 Load vs. Displacement Curves . . . . . .
Plate
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
193
194
194
194
195
195
196
196
198
198
199
15 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis

15.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . .
15.1.1 Model Geometry . . . .
15.1.2 Properties . . . . . . .
15.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . .
15.1.4 Boundary Constraints .
15.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . .
Beam
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
201
202
202
202
203
203
204
12 Cablestayed Bridge Installation

12.1 Preparing the finite element model . . . .
12.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Material properties . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Physical properties . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Mesh generation . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Prestress and dead weight loads
12.2 Finalizing the finite element model . . . .
12.2.1 Imposed deformations . . . . . .
12.2.2 Boundary conditions . . . . . . .
12.3 Phased Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Reaction Forces . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Cable Force Distribution . . . .
of a
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cantilever
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
CONTENTS
15.2 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis . . .
15.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3.1 Deformed shape . . . . . . . .
15.3.2 Load vs. Displacement curves
ix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
205
206
207
207
16 Response of Steel Using Two-Surface Material Model

16.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.1 Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.4 Boundary Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.6 Additional data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 Nonlinear Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.1 Uniaxial Cyclic Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.2 Non-proportional Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
211
211
212
212
213
214
215
216
218
219
219
220
17 Eccentrically Loaded Reinforced Concrete Beam

17.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1.2 Material and Physical Properties . . . . . . .
17.1.3 Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1.4 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1.6 Finishing the Model with the Mesh Editor
17.2 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.1 Load Displacement Diagram . . . . . . . . .
17.3.2 Reduced Stiffness Patterns . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.3 Crack Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3.4 Reinforcement Bar Axial Stress . . . . . . .
17.3.5 Composed Element Forces and Moments . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
223
223
223
224
226
228
229
230
230
232
232
232
233
234
235
18 Design Example GTB-table

18.1 GTB-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.2 Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.3 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.4 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2.5 Boundary Conditions . . . . . .
18.2.6 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3 Design Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.1 Parameters for Design Analysis .
18.3.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.3.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.4 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis . . . . . . .
18.4.1 Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.4.2 Stiffness Adaptation Parameters
18.4.3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.4.4 Results (10 Iterations) . . . . . .
18.4.5 Results (300 Iterations) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
237
237
239
239
240
241
243
244
245
246
246
248
250
254
254
254
256
256
258
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CONTENTS
19 Composed Line Elements
19.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1.4 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.1 Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.2 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.1 Stiffness Adaptation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.2 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4 Comparison of Nonlinear Analysis with Stiffness Adaptation Analysis
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
261
263
263
264
266
269
269
272
272
273
278
278
279
279
286
20 Composed Surface Elements

20.1 Model Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.1.1 Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.1.2 Geometry and Mesh . . . . . . . . . .
20.1.3 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.1 Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.2 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis . . . . . . . . . .
20.3.1 Stiffness Adaptation Parameters . . .
20.3.2 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis Settings
20.3.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
287
287
287
288
289
290
290
291
294
294
294
295
21 3D Reinforced Concrete Slab with Design

21.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1.2 Material Properties . . . . . . .
21.1.3 Geometrical Properties . . . . .
21.1.4 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1.6 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 Linear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2.1 Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . .
21.2.2 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . .
21.3 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.3.1 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . .
21.3.2 Checking Design Settings . . . .
21.3.3 Design Check Results . . . . . .
21.4 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis . . . . . . .
21.4.1 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . .
21.4.2 Analysis Settings . . . . . . . . .
21.4.3 Analysis Results . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Checks
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
22 Bond-slip of Reinforcements in 2D Elements

22.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.1 Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.2 Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.3 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . .
22.1.4 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.5 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2 Phase Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2.1 Phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
and Material Failure297

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
311
311
311
315
317
319
320
321
321
CONTENTS
xi
22.2.2 Phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3 Phase Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3.1 Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3.2 Stress in the Tendon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3.3 Slip (Relative Displacement) Along the Tendon . . . .
22.3.4 Shear Stress in the TendonConcrete Interface/Bond
23 Shear Failure of Reinforced Concrete
Displacement
23.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . .
23.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1.2 Properties . . . . . . . . . .
23.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1.4 Boundary Conditions . . . .
23.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1.6 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . .
23.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2.1 Analysis Settings . . . . . . .
23.2.2 Analysis Results . . . . . . .
III
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
322
323
323
323
323
323
Beam Subjected to Prescribed

329
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
341
24 Tunnel in a Hoek-Brown Rock Medium

24.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.2 Material and Physical Properties . . . .
24.1.3 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.4 Boundary Constraints . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.5 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.6 Mesh Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3 Analysis results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.1 Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.2 Principal Cauchy Stresses . . . . . . . .
24.3.3 Stress Distribution along a Radial Line
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
343
343
344
344
345
346
346
347
348
349
349
349
351
25 Pit Excavation in 3D Layered Soil

25.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.1.1 Material Properties . . . .
25.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . .
25.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.4 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.1 Deformations . . . . . . . .
25.5.2 Stresses . . . . . . . . . . .
25.5.3 Responses of the Sheet Pile
25.5.4 Responses of the Struts . .
25.5.5 Responses of the Interfaces
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
353
353
354
359
359
360
363
363
363
363
364
364
Drained Analysis
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
367
368
368
369
369
370
370
370
371
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Wall
. . .
. . .
26 Settlement of a Strip Footing - Nonlinear

26.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . .
26.1.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2 Nonlinear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2.1 Phase 1: Initial State of the Soil
26.2.2 Phase 2: Footing . . . . . . . . .
26.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xii
CONTENTS
26.3.1
26.3.2
Stresses and Strains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
27 Nonlinear Undrained Drained Settlement Analysis

27.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.1.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.1.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.2 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.2.1 Phase 1: Initial State of the Soil . . . . . . . .
27.2.2 Phase 2: Footing under Undrained Conditions
27.2.3 Phase 3: Footing under Drained Conditions . .
27.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.3.1 Stress and Strain Responses . . . . . . . . . .
27.3.2 Excess Pore Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.3.3 Displacement Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
375
376
376
377
377
378
378
379
379
380
380
380
381
28 Nonlinear Effective Stress Undrained Analysis

28.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
28.1.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . .
28.1.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.2 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.2.1 Phase 1: Initial State of the Soil . . . .
28.2.2 Phase 2: Footing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.3.1 Stress and Strain Responses . . . . . .
28.3.2 Excess Pore Pressure . . . . . . . . . .
28.3.3 Analytical Solution . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
383
384
384
385
385
385
385
386
387
387
388
388
29 Nonlinear Total Stress Undrained Analysis

29.1 Finite Element Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.4 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.5.1 Stress and Strain Responses . . . . . . .
29.5.2 Analytical Solution . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.5.3 Calculation of Undrained Soil Parameters
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
391
392
392
393
393
393
394
395
396
397
30 Analysis of Bridge Pier Supported on Piled Footing

30.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.4 Finishing the Model with the Mesh Editor . . . . .
30.5 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.6 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.6.1 Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.6.2 Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.6.3 Responses of the Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.6.4 Responses of Interface Elements . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399
400
400
405
405
405
406
408
408
408
408
409
CONTENTS
31 Slope Stability Analysis by Strength Reduction
31.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
31.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.4 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
Method
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
411
411
411
413
413
413
414
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
417
417
418
418
419
419
420
421
33 Compression Wave Propagation and Viscous Damping

33.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.1.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.1.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.1.4 Finishing the Model with Mesh Editor . . . . . . . .
33.2 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.3.1 Displacement Time History With Viscous Damping . .
33.3.2 Displacement Time History Without Visccous Damping
33.4 Annexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
423
423
424
425
425
426
427
427
427
428
429
34 Seismic Analysis of a Nonlinear Tunnel-Soil Model

34.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.1.1 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.3 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.4 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.5.1 Results of the Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . .
34.5.2 Results of the Response Spectrum Analysis
34.5.3 Results of the Time History Analysis . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
431
431
431
431
433
434
437
437
437
440
32 Free Vibration Analysis of Soil Deposit and Dam

32.1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.3 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.4 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.5 Verification of Results - Soil Deposit . . . . . . . .
32.6 Verification of Results - Dam . . . . . . . . . . . .
IV
Appendix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
449
A Available Element Types
451
Bibliography
455
Index
457
xiv
CONTENTS
Preface
This volume of the Diana Users Manual introduces the novice user to the FX+ preand postprocessor for the Diana Finite Element Analysis code. To describe interactive
communication with the FX+ Graphical User Interface we adopt the following notation
convention.
Notation convention
View
View
View Point
-Myy
Body Force
Axis
Hide
Hide
Data Filter
Stress
Location: 12.4,22.6
Open or activate the main widget View, for instance a menu

or a tab.
Open View and choose the View Point entry.
Double-click the -Myy option.
You enter the Body Force dialog.
Proceed in the Gravity section or widget of the active dialog.
Gravity
FX+
Select action
Preview
Light
Light
Merge
Merge
Ctrl
Plane
Shift
Right-click the Axis entry and choose the Hide option in the
pop-up menu.
Right-click on the current position and choose the Hide
option in the pop-up menu.
Choose Stress in the Data Filter list box.
Type 12.4,22.6 in the Location text box.
Choose the Select entry and perform an action which is
familiar or explained in the descriptive text below. Typical
examples are: selection of model items, and changing the
view of the model.
Click the Preview button in the Tool Bar or in the active
dialog. Note that most tool buttons in the Tool Bar show
their name when pointed out with the mouse.
Set the Light radio button on or off.
Check or uncheck the Merge tick box.
Close the active dialog with a click on the Close button in its
Title Bar.
Press the Ctrl key.
Press the Shift key and hold it down while choosing the
Plane entry.
xvi
Preface
Part I
Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA (I)
Chapter 1
Basics
FX+ is a general purpose pre- and postprocessor that provides state-of-the-art finite
element modeling tools. It is equipped with advanced geometric modeling functions,
powerful mesh generation algorithms, various analysis conditions, and exceptional output
displays with the latest graphics technology. A special version of FX+, as described here,
combines these tools with Dianas comprehensive Finite Element Analysis capabilities.
1.1
Tools, Files and Work Flow
Figure 1.1 outlines the tools and files that you will meet in the FX+-for-Diana work flow.
The complete work flow for an analysis involves the following steps:
FX+
FX+ database
file .fdb
Pre-Works
Post-Works
Pre-Neutral
Commands
file .com
file .fxd
Post-Neutral
Input
file .dat
Mesh Editor
Filos file
Diana
file .ff
Post Result
Post Model
file .dpb
file .dmb
Figure 1.1: Work flow FX+ for Diana

1. Build the model. You start with making the finite element model in the FX+ PreWorks environment [Ch. 2]. FX+ applies its own database.
2. Import the model. Once the model is finished in FX+ you can start Dianas Mesh
Editor [ 3.1] from FX+ directly. In this way, the model is automatically imported
in the Mesh Editor. Alternatively, you can save the model as a Pre-Neutral file in
FX+ and import the Pre-Neutral file in the Mesh Editor yourself. In the Mesh
Editor the model is tranferred to Dianas own analysis database, i.e., the Filos
file. You can check the model and, if required, do some final editing. You may also
save the model as an input data file in Diana batch format.
3. Perform the analysis. Still in the Mesh Editor, you specify the analysis options
and perform the analysis with Diana [ 3.2]. You must explicitly ask for output
Basics
to FX+ if the Mesh Editor is not started from FX+ directly. This yields two
Post-Neutral files: a Post Result file with analysis results, and, if applicable, a
Post Model file with additional information like locations of integration points and
reinforcements. If the Mesh Editor is started from FX+ directly, the Post-Neutral
files will be placed in a subdirectory called Output. You may save the analysis
options as a command file in Diana batch format.
4. Assess the analysis results. You import the Post-Neutral files into FX+ and assess
the analysis results in the Results environment. Note that this also requires the
associated FX+ database.
1.2
Graphical User Interface
FX+ is available for the MS Windows operating system. It conforms to the standard
look-and-feel of Windows applications. Readers of this users manual are assumed to be
familiar with the use of Windows widgets like drag-and-drop, trees, text- and list-boxes,
menus etc.
1.2.1
Main Window
You may start an interactive session with FX+ via the Windows Start menu or by clicking
the icon
on the desktop. This launches the FX+ Main Window [Fig. 1.2], with the
Figure 1.2: Main window of FX+ for Diana

following sub-windows and menus:
Work Window deals with modeling and interpretation of analysis results by means
of the Graphical User Interface of FX+. The Work Window initially shows the FX+
Start Page which provides for Internet access to MIDAS or Diana information.
Works Tree stores all the data of the current project such as geometry, mesh, load,
boundary condition, analysis control, and analysis results. These data are organized
in a tree-format similar to the Windows Explorer Favorites tree. Via the tabs below
the Works Tree you can activate the Pre-Works or the Results Tree, respectively
for preprocessing and postprocessing.
1.2 Graphical User Interface
Property Window shows general information about the individual entity that you
select from the Work Window or the Works Tree. You can also do basic modifications through the Property Window. The format and function of the Property
Window depends on the working mode: pre- or postprocessing.
Output Window displays all types of information necessary for modeling, warnings,
and error messages.
Main Menu has commands for all the built-in functions necessary to run FX+. Novice
users are advised to use the Main Menu to become familiar with all the FX+ capabilities. More experienced users may prefer to use the icons in the Tool Bars as
short-cuts.
Tool Bars (Icon menu) helps you to promptly invoke frequently used FX+ functions.
For easy recognition, icons with similar purposes are grouped in tabs.
Initially most windows and menus are empty or disabled. They become active or filled
during the modeling session. Some more menus and windows may appear depending on
your actions during the FX+ session.
1.2.2
On-line Reference Manual
FX+ for Diana comes with a comprehensive reference manual which is available on-line
via the menu option Help On-line Help... or by pressing the F1 key. The manual has
the same look-and-feel as most Windows help applications [Fig. 1.3]. You can browse via
the familiar help facilities on the left: a Contents tree, an Index, and a Search function.
The information appears in the large window on the right. In the next chapters of this
Figure 1.3: On-line reference manual

document you will gradually get to know the various options and possibilities of FX+ for
Diana. However, you are advised to refer to the on-line reference manual regularly for
more in-depth and formal information.
Basics
Chapter 2
Modeling
Name:
Lclip
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/Lclip
Keywords:
analys: linear static.

constr: suppor.
elemen: pstres q8mem.
load: deform.
materi: elasti isotro.
option: direct groups units.
post: binary fxplus tabula.
result: cauchy displa extern force green reacti strain stress total vonmis.
This chapter introduces the basic modeling capabilities of FX+. The process of the
definition of a new model typically involves tasks as initiation, definition of geometry and
boundary conditions and meshing. We will now discuss this definition, also known as
preprocessing, by preparing a model of an L-Clip [Fig. 2.1]. To prepare the model we
30
20
r = 10
10
100
90
r = 10
10
r = 15
20
30
100
Figure 2.1: L-Clip example model [mm]

will use the following features: 2D Drawing, Automatic Unstructured Mesh Generation,
Structured Mesh Generation (Mapped Mesh Generation).
2.1
Initiating a New Model
We open a new model and prepare an appropriate view via the following options.
FX+
File New
View View Point
Top
Modeling
As this is a two-dimensional model we choose a Top view via the View menu to get a
viewing direction perpendicular to the XY -plane [Fig. 2.2]. Alternatively you could click
Figure 2.2: Creating a two-dimensional view

the corresponding icon in the Tool Bar. The Work Window now shows an Untitled tab
with in-plane X- and Y -axes. This is what we call the Work Plane. Note that in the
lower-right corner of the Main Window FX+ shows the units in which the model is going
to be defined. For this example we choose [N, mm].
2.2
Grid Snap
Entering point positions directly in the dialogs is one possibility. However, sometimes it
is more convenient to use the mouse cursor with the Snap function. In this case FX+
will fix the mouse pointer in the Work Window according to the specified Snap function
type. In case of a simple two-dimensional model, as in this example, you can easily assign
positions in the Work Plane by using Grid Snap. By default FX+ sets grid spacing to 20
m. In this example, grid spacing of 10 mm is considered to be more convenient. You may
change the grid spacing accordingly via the following actions [Fig. 2.3]. Right-click in the
Work Window (1) and choose Grid Setting in the pop-up menu (2). A dialog appears.
Make sure that the grid type is set to Rectangular Grid (3). In the Uniform Grid section,
enter 10 in Size and 20 in Number (4). Check 1Q to have the grid drawn only on the first
quadrant. If you now click OK (5) the adapted grid shows up in the first quadrant of the
Work Plane only.
FX+
Work Window
Grid Setting...
Rectangular Grid
Uniform
Grid
Number: 20
Size: 10
1Q
OK
You can switch Grid Snap on at any time when FX+ expects input of a location. Therefore
click the appropriate icon (1) [Fig. 2.4]. You can now drag the mouse pointer along the
2.2 Grid Snap
Figure 2.3: Adapting the grid
Figure 2.4: Using Grid Snap to define points

Work Plane while FX+ indicates the snapped location with a red circle on the nearest
grid point (2). You can check the actual location in the dialog (3). The figure shows the
location of the end point of the first polyline as defined in the next section.
10
Modeling
2.3
Geometry Definition
We will first specify and draw the contours of the L-Clip and then draw the two circular
holes in it.
2.3.1
Contours of the L-Clip
The contours of the L-Clip can easily be defined in the Profile dialog, to be launched via
the Geometry menu.
FX+
Geometry
Profile
Curve
Create on WP
Polyline
Method ABS x,y
Method REL dx,dy
Method REL dx,dy
Tangential Arc
Method Radius,Angle
Polyline
Method REL dx,dy
Tangential Arc
Method Radius,Angle
Polyline
Method REL dx,dy
Tangential Arc
Method Radius,Angle
Polyline
Method REL dx,dy
Profile (Wire)...
Location: 0,0
Location: 0,100
Location: 20,0
Location: 10,-90
Location: 0,-50
Location: 10,90
Location: 60,0
Location: 15,-180
Location: -100,0
Via the Geometry menu we choose to specify a curve on the Work Plane (WP). FX+
launches the Profile dialog where you can input points along the profile [Fig. 2.5]. You
must type a comma between the XY -coordinates and press the Enter key after each
coordinate pair. FX+ will draw lines between the subsequent points. You can choose to
Figure 2.5: Profile dialog

draw a polyline, a tangential arc, or a point arc. We start with a polyline from (0,0) to
(0,100) to (20,100). When drawing a polyline you can choose out of three methods to
specify the location of a point: ABS x,y where you can directly assign (x, y) coordinates,
2.3 Geometry Definition
11
REL dx,dy where you must enter the distance (x, y) relative to the last entered point,
and Length,Angle which requires the input of the distance from the last entered point and
the angle (counterclockwise) relative to the +X-direction. FX+ will set an appropriate
default method in most cases, for instance ABS x,y for the first point and REL dx,dy for
subsequent points. After the first polyline we define the other points of the profile, with
tangential arcs and polylines, as outlined. When the last drawn point coincides with the
starting point, FX+ will complete the drawing of the profile. You may now close the
Profile dialog.
Figure 2.6: Finished profile

To maximize the display of the profile you may click the Zoom All icon (1) [Fig. 2.6].
Note that the Pre-Works Tree contains the geometric items of the current model (2).
When you open Geometry Curve then the item Profile [G:8] appears. A click on the item
name shows its properties in the Property Window. You may change the properties, for
instance the color, to your liking.
2.3.2
Two Holes in the L-Clip
The definition of the two circular holes can be done in the Circle dialog.
FX+
Circles
Geometry
Circle
Curve
Center & radius

Location: 20,90
Location: 100,20
Create on WP
Circle...
Radius: 5
Radius: 5
Instead of via the Geometry menu you can click the Circle 2D icon in the Curve tab to
launch the Circle dialog (1) [Fig. 2.7]. In this dialog you can define circles in the model.
There are four methods to define a circle. Here we choose Center & radius (2) and specify
two circles by the location of the center point and the radius (3). The defined circles show
up in the geometry display (4).
12
Modeling
Figure 2.7: Defining the holes in the L-Shape profile

What we have done thus far will be repeatedly used for other parts of this
tutorial. Therefore we save the current status of the model.
FX+
Saving the model

File Save
Save As File Name: L Clip 0.fdb
Save
File Save As...

Save
First we save the model as L Clip 0.fdb. Prior to the meshing procedure we also save the
model as L Clip 1.fdb.
2.4
Automatic Meshing of a Planar Area
Now that the geometry has been defined completely we may continue with the meshing
procedure. We will first execute a Seeding procedure for a finer mesh around the holes.
After that we will automatically generate and check the mesh.
2.4.1
Seeding for Mesh Refinement
To define the seeding around the holes we invoke the Edge Mesh Size dialog.
FX+
Mesh Size Control
Edge Mesh Size
Along Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the two circles

Seeding Number of Divisions: 16 OK
The Mesh menu options launch the Edge Mesh Size dialog (1) [Fig. 2.8]. First you must
select the two circles. You can do this by opening Geometry Curve in the Pre-Works
Tree and select the two circles with a left-click and a ctrl+left-click (2). Instead of
selection via the Pre-Works Tree you could drag the mouse cursor over the circles in the
model display and click when the circle is highlighted in blue. In either method, the
dialog indicates the number of currently selected edges. The current selection appears
highlighted in red in the model display (3). Now FX+ requires the actual seeding information, depending in the seeding method that you choose. Interval Length requires the
2.4 Automatic Meshing of a Planar Area
13
Figure 2.8: Defining seeding around the two holes

interval length (distance) of nodes on the edge. Number of Divisions requires the number
of divisions for nodes along the edge. Linear Grading (Length) requires the biased-seeding
so that lengths will vary linearly. Linear Grading (Ratio) requires the biased-seeding so
that length ratios will vary linearly. Here we set the number of divisions to 16 (4). Finally
click OK to confirm the seeding specification (5).
2.4.2
Mesh Generation
We launch the Auto-Mesh Planar Area dialog.

FX+
Auto meshing
Mesh Auto Mesh Planar Area...
Auto-Mesh Planar Area
Select Edge(s)
Advanced
Select all (10) edges
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
OK
Mesh Size
Element
Size: 3
Property: 1
Preview OK
The dialog requires that you indicate the geometric parts of the model that must be
meshed. In this case you must select the complete model, for instance by dragging a
selection box around it in the Work Plane (1) [Fig. 2.9]. Note that a total of ten edges are
selected which comprise the complete contour and the two holes. Now choose the Loop
Mesher (2) on the Advanced Option window and set the element size to 3 (3). Also fill in
a number to be used as property identification (4). Click Preview (5) to check whether
the nodes to be created are properly distributed along the edges. If you agree, then click
OK to get the mesh generated (6). If you have registered the edges in the Size Control
dialog, then FX+ will apply the assigned mesh size internally. For unregistered edges,
FX+ will use the mesh size as assigned in the Auto-Mesh Planar Area dialog.
2.4.3
Mesh Assessment
The generated mesh is placed in the Pre-Works Tree. FX+ has numerous options to
display the mesh and to assess its properties. We will now show a few of these options:
checking the property assignment and the normal directions.
FX+
Checking mesh properties
Pre-Works
Properties
Mesh
Mesh
Display
Shading Color
Property
14
Modeling
Figure 2.9: Meshing the model
Activate the Pre-Works Tree if necessary (1) [Fig. 2.10] and open the Mesh entry (2). FX+
will display detailed information in the Property Window. Here you can check the number
of nodes and elements of the mesh (3). You can also change the color of the displayed
mesh via the Display entry (4). For instance, when you choose Shading Color Property
(5) then FX+ will display each element in a color according to the assigned property
identification (in this case all white). Other options for Shading Color are: Default, Set
Color, Element Topology, Material, and Front-Back.
FX+
Checking normal directions

Properties
Mesh
Display
Shading Color
Front-Back
The Front-Back option for Shading Color (1) [Fig. 2.11] will color all two-dimensional
elements in the mesh according to their normal direction: blue for the positive direction
(+) and pink for negative (). Note that in this model you can only see the two colors
in different viewing orientation: blue for a Top view (2), pink for a Bottom view (3).
FX+
Reverting normal directions

Mesh Element Change Parameter...
Change Element Parameters
Reverse
Normal
Select Element(s)
Select the entire mesh
OK
If the normal directions of two-dimensional elements are opposite to your expectation

then you can reverse the normal directions via the Change Element Parameters dialog.
Launch this dialog via the Mesh menu or by clicking the Change Element Parameter icon
in the Mesh tool bar (1) [Fig. 2.12]. Check the Reverse Normal option (2) and select all
elements by dragging the mouse cursor. The complete mesh now turns into red and the
number of selected elements appears in the Selection Filter (3). Now click OK (4) and the
pink color of the Bottom view turns into blue. This confirms that the normal directions
of all elements have been reverted.
2.5 Automatic Meshing of a Face
15
Figure 2.10: Displaying mesh properties
Figure 2.11: Checking the element normal directions

Save the model
File
FX+
Save
This will save the model that we have been working with until now under its current
name L Clip 1.fdb.
2.5
Automatic Meshing of a Face
In 2.4 we have created a mesh from defined edges. We will now demonstrate how to
create a mesh in a face. To define the face we will use the edges of the L-clip model
[ 2.3].
16
Modeling
Figure 2.12: Reverting the element normal directions

FX+
File Open...
Open File Name:
L Clip 0.fdb
File Save As...

Open
Save
First open the saved geometry [ 2.3.2] and save it as a new model L Clip 2.fdb.
2.5.1
Defining a Face
We will define the face via the Plane Face dialog, to be invoked via the Geometry menu
(1) [Fig. 2.13].
FX+
Geometry Surface
Plane Face
Create
Plane Face...
Select Curve(s) Select edges with mouse pointer

Name: L-Clip OK
Select the edges of the profile in the Work Window (2). To select an entity, place the
mouse pointer over it and see it turn into sky blue. Then click, and it will turn into red
indicating that it has been selected. The total number of selected entities appears in the
selection pane of the dialog. A click on a selected entity will cancel the selection. Instead
of selection in the Work Window you can also do so from the Pre-Works Tree. When you
have selected all edges, including the two circles, you may specify a name for the new face
(3), here we choose for L-Clip. Finally click OK and FX+ will create the face. Edges
forming the outline of a face should be simply connected. Edges formed into a shape do
not need to be on the Work Plane, as long as they form a single plane. The Plane Face
cannot contain edges or vertices internally.
2.5 Automatic Meshing of a Face
17
Figure 2.13: Defining a face

FX+
Hiding edges
Pre-Works
Geometry Curve
Hide All
To hide the edges right-click on the Curve entry in the Works Tree (1) [Fig. 2.14]. In the
Figure 2.14: Manipulating Show/Hide in the Works Tree

pop-up menu choose Hide All (2). This will hide all curves, i.e., the edges around the
face. In the Works Tree FX+ marks the hidden entities with a gray square on their icons.
The menu entry ShowHide toggles the visibility from hidden to visible and vice versa.
2.5.2
Meshing the Face
We will create a mesh on the face via the Auto-Mesh Face dialog.
FX+
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Face
Face...
Select the face

Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
OK
Mesh Size
Element
Size: 3
g Adaptive Seeding
Property: 1
Preview OK
You can invoke the Auto-Mesh Face dialog via the Mesh menu as shown (1) [Fig. 2.15].
Alternatively you could simply press the F7 function key. Select the face by dragging a
selection window in the Work Plane, or simply click the L-Clip entity in the Works Tree
(2). Choose the Loop Mesher (3). Set the element size to 3 and check Adaptive Seeding
(4). Also fill in a number to be used as property identification (5). Click Preview (6) to
check whether the nodes to be created are properly distributed along the edges. If you
agree, then click OK to get the mesh generated (7).
18
Modeling
Figure 2.15: Meshing a planar face

Adaptive seeding. With this option FX+ can automatically adjust the seeding size
(node interval to be generated) according to the geometric properties of an edge, for
instance the curvature. This can be very effective when small holes exist inside the
section, as in this example. Also when meshing a shape with variable curvature, the
Adaptive Seeding option can be effective. In both cases, it is not necessary that you
specify the seeding manually part by part.
FX+
Save the model
File
Save
This saves the model under its current name L Clip 2.fdb
2.6
Mapped Meshing
In this section we will demonstrate how to create a Mapped Mesh for the shape defined
by edges only [ 2.3]. Open the file with the geometry and save it as a new model.
FX+
File Open...
Open Filename
L Clip 0.fdb
Open
File Save As...

Save As Filename: L Clip 3.fdb
Save
The mapped mesh is basically available for a closed area with a boundary defined by four
edges [Fig. 2.19]. First we will divide the L-Clip into several areas by defining lines A to
E [Fig. 2.16a]. Then we will divide all the edges at the intersections [Fig. 2.16b].
2.6.1
Defining Lines
Launch the Line dialog via the Geometry menu, or simply by clicking the Line icon in
the Curve tool bar (1) [Fig. 2.17].
FX+
Geometry
Line
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Line...
Location: 0,80
Location: 30,0
2.6 Mapped Meshing
19
cb a
(10,100)
B
(10,90)
(30,90)
(0,80)
(30,80)
d e
(90,30)
(100,30)
E
(90,0)
j
h
i
(100,0)
(a) division of areas
(b) edges after Intersect
Figure 2.16: Preparing a Mapped Mesh for the L-Clip
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
10,100
0,-20
10,90
20,0
90,30
0,-30
100,30
0,-30
Each line requires the specification of the two end-points, by default the first point in
Figure 2.17: Defining a line

absolute coordinates and the second relatively to the first (2). FX+ will draw each defined
line in the Work Plane and also add it to the Curve entry in the Pre-Works Tree.
2.6.2
Dividing Lines at Intersections
To divide the lines at the intersections you must launch the Intersect dialog via the
Geometry menu.
FX+
Geometry
Intersect
Curve
Intersect...
Select all lines Apply

Select lines inside the circles
Work Window
Delete
FX+ will divide all lines that you have selected. Although a wire is not intersecting other
wires or lines, a wire will be divided into lines by the Intersect dialog. In this example, a
total of 29 lines will be generated after applying Intersect to the curves. The lines b and
20
Modeling
h inside the circles [Fig. 2.16b] are unnecessary. You can delete these: select them with a
mouse click, then right-click in the Work Window and choose Delete in the pop-up menu.
The right part of the lower circle indicated by i consists of two sections [Fig. 2.16b]. To
merge these lines you must launch the Merge dialog via the Geometry menu [Fig. 2.18].
FX+
Geometry Curve Merge...
Merge Edge Select both quarter arcs of lower circle
OK
Figure 2.18: Merging sections
2.6.3
Seeding for Optimal Mesh
Prior to meshing, you can predefine a division interval or the number of divisions for
the edge, face and solid. Especially for the Mapped Mesh [Fig. 2.19], the opposite edges
1
Mapping
u
Real Domain
v
0
Master Domain
Figure 2.19: Concept of Mapped Mesh

of a square-shaped Master Domain must have the same number of divisions. Thus you
should assign the number of divisions identically by using Seeding before you generate
the Mapped Mesh.
2.6 Mapped Meshing
21
FX+
Seeding
Mesh Size Control
Edge Mesh Size
Along Edge...
Select edges c and e

Seeding Number of Divisions: 8
Apply
Select edges g and i

Number of Divisions: 10
Apply
Select edges a, d, j and k

Number of Divisions: 2 OK
Mesh Size Control Global Size...
Element size: 5
Global Mesh Size
OK
First we explicitly assign the number of divisions to some edges. Next we must also specify
the interval length (element size) for the rest of the edges. Therefore choose the Global
Size option via the Mesh menu. Here we choose a global element size of 5 mm. The
global size is basically applicable to the edges, faces, and solids, which were not assigned
separate seedings.
FX+
Check seeding
Select all edges
Mesh Size Control Display Mesh Seed...
Show Mesh Seed
Display Mesh Seed Option
OK
It is good practice to check the seeding prior to the meshing procedure. Therefore select
all edges by dragging the mouse in the Work Plane (1) [Fig. 2.20]. Then either choose
Figure 2.20: Checking the seeding

Display Mesh Seed via the Mesh menu, or simply click the corresponding icon in the
Auto/Map-Mesh tool bar (2). In the dialog, check the Show Mesh Seed option (3) and
click OK (4). The seeding now appears along all edges of the model.
2.6.4
Mesh Generation
We will now subsequently mesh the areas of the L-Clip via the k-Edge Area option.
FX+
First area
Mesh Map Mesh k-Edge Area...
Map-Mesh k-Edge Area
Manual-Map
Select Object
Select Object
Select Object
Select Object
Property: 1
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
1
2
3
4
Select
Select
Select
Select
edge 1
edge 2
edges 3a, 3b, 3c
edge 4
Apply
22
Modeling
Figure 2.21: Mapped Meshing the first area
Launch the Map-Mesh k-Edge Area dialog via the Mesh menu, or by clicking the icon (1)
[Fig. 2.21]. When a shape is composed of edges only, this option maps four edges of the
shape into four edges of a square. In the dialog check Manual-Map (2). Since the shape
of this example is too complicated to apply Auto-Map, we use Manual-Map to manually
assign the four edges to be mapped into the four edges of a square. When generating the
Mapped Mesh, you should pay attention to the input order of the edges. Edges must be
assigned clockwise (for instance 4-3-2-1), or counterclockwise (for instance 1-2-3-4), by
clicking the Select Object Edge(s) buttons (3). If you assign edges in the wrong order
(for instance 1-3-2-4) this may result in an error and may not generate a mesh. After you
have assigned all four edges, fill in a property identification number (4) and click Apply
to generate the Mapped Mesh for the first area.
FX+
Remaining areas (5)

Select Object
Select Object
Select Object
Select Object
Property: 1
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
Edge(s)
1
2
3
4
Select
Select
Select
Select
1st edge
2nd edge
3rd edge
4th edge
Apply
Repeat the meshing procedure five times to mesh the remaining areas II to VI with the
edge sequence as indicated [Fig. 2.22]. The final mesh appears [Fig. 2.23]. If you click a
particular area of the Mapped mesh (1) in the Pre-Works Tree then FX+ will indicate it
in the Work Window with a red box and show its properties in the Property Window.
2.7
2.7.1
Finalizing the Model

We will define material properties and the thickness for the clip. We assume that the
clip is made of steel . We launch the Material Manager dialog and create a new material
2.7 Finalizing the Model

3
2
1
3
23
III
1
2
3
4
1
II
3
2
3
1
1
IV
1
4
V
3
3
4
VI
Figure 2.22: Edge selection sequence for Mapped Meshing
Figure 2.23: Mapped Meshing final mesh

called Steel [Fig. 2.24a]. We specify an isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus
E = 210000, Poissons ratio = 0.3, and mass density = 7.850106 .
FX+
Material
Analysis Material...
Material Manager Create...
Create/Modify Material
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Steel
Structural
Elastic Modulus: 210000
Poissons Ratio: 0.3
24
Modeling
Mass Density: 7.850E-6
Constitutive Model Model Type
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Property Manager dialog and create an isotropic property Clip for a
two-dimensional plane stress model with a uniform thickness t = 5.0. We also attach the
material Steel to this property [Fig. 2.24b]. Note that the corresponding Diana element
types for this property are shown for reference purpose only. The actual element type
that will be used is depending on the generated mesh. In our case CQ16M elements will
be used, because the mesh only consists of quadratic quadrilateral elements.
FX+
Thickness
Analysis Property...
Property Manager
Create
2D...
Create/Modify DIANA Property

2D Plane Stress
ID: 1
Name: Clip
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Clip
Regular
Material 1: Steel
Thickness: 5.0
OK
Property Manager
Close
(a) material
(b) thickness
Figure 2.24: Properties
2.7.2
To define the boundary constraints (supports) we zoom in on the upper circle of the clip.
Then we launch the Constraint dialog.
FX+
Supports
Zoom
Zoom in on upper circle
Analysis BC Constraint...
Constraint BC Set ...
BC Set
Name: Circle
Desc.: Fix Circle
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Pinned
Type
Node
Select Node(s)
Select 16 nodes of upper circle
OK
2.7 Finalizing the Model
25
We select the nodes of the upper circle by drawing nets around them: a total of 16
nodes. For the selected nodes we specify a Pinned constraint, i.e., the translation in the
three XY Z-directions are suppressed. Note that the constraint in the Z-direction is not
necessary for plane stress elements [Fig. 2.25a]. The supports appear as red arrows at
each node [Fig. 2.25b].
(a) applying constraints
(b) showing constraints
Figure 2.25: Boundary conditions
2.7.3
Loading
To define the deformation loading we zoom in on the lower circle of the clip. Then
we launch the Displacement dialog. We select the nodes of the lower circle by drawing
nets around them: a total of 20 nodes. For the selected nodes we specify a prescribed
displacement in global Y -direction of 5 mm [Fig. 2.26a]. The deformation loads appear
as red arrows at each node [Fig. 2.26b].
FX+
Prescribed displacements
View
Zoom
Zoom
All
Zoom in on lower circle
Analysis Load Displacement...

Displacement Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: Deformation
Desc.: Prescribed displacement
Add
Close
Displacement
Object Type: Node
Select Node(s)
Select 20 nodes of lower circle
Ref. CSys Global Rectangular
g T2
5
OK
View Display Option...

Display Option
LBC
Load
Display
Displacement
Symbol Size: 20.0
OK
The model is now complete and we will run a linear analysis from Mesh Editor as
explained in the next chapter.
26
Modeling
(b) showing loads
(a) applying loads
Figure 2.26: Deformation loads
Chapter 3
Analysis with Diana

In the FX+Diana work flow, Mesh Editor is used to import the model and to run the
analysis with Diana [Fig. 1.1 p. 3]. See Volume Getting Started for a complete overview of
the Mesh Editors functionality. Here we will highlight the options that are applicable
to the FX+Diana work flow.
3.1
Launching Mesh Editor
We can launch Mesh Editor directly from FX+ as follows:

Launching Mesh Editor
Analysis
FX+
Edit model with Diana mesh-editor
Note that our model of the previous chapter is automatically opened in Mesh Editor.
Alternatively, we could have launched Mesh Editor via the Windows Start menu or
a Unix shell. In that case we need to import the model manually. But first, we have to
export the model from FX+ and saved it as an .fxd file:
Export the model
File Export
Save As
FX+
Pre-Neutral (FXD)...
File name: L Clip 3.fxd

Save
Subsequently, we import the model in Mesh Editor:

Import the model
Mesh Editor
File Import model...

Import model
File name: L Clip 3.fxd

Open
Another way to import the model would be to enter the following Python command:
Import the model using Python
Lclip.py
importModel( "L_Clip_3.fxd" )
3.2
Starting the Analysis
To start an analysis, we first need to create one and define analysis commands. We can
do this as explained in Volume Getting Started. In that case, we need to make sure that
the output device is set to midas FX+.
Alternatively, we could create a new analysis and load the commands from an existing
.dcf file:
28
Analysis with Diana

Linear analysis commands
Lclip.dcf
*LINSTA
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "Lclip"
END OUTPUT
*END
This can be achieved by entering the following Python commands in the Command Console:
Load and run analysis commands
Lclip.py
newAnalysis( "Lclip" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Lclip", "Lclip.dcf" )
runSolver( "Lclip" )
Chapter 4
Results Assessment
We continue with the FX+ model of the previous chapters. If necessary you should open
the saved model L Clip 3.fdb.
4.1
Importing the Results
To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file.
FX+
Import Post Result file

File Import Post-Neutral (DPB)...
Post File Import Post Result Files
Open
File Name
Post File Import
L Clip 3.dpb
File Name
Add...
Open
L Clip 3.dpb
Import
Here we will show how to display some analysis results.
4.2
Displaying Results
We will display the displacements and the Von Mises stress.
4.2.1
Displacements
Displacements
FX+
Post Data
Result Data Type TDtY(V)

g Deformed
Mesh Shape
Deformation Data TDtXYZ(V)
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Post Style
Contour
Edge
Type
Type
g Gradient
g Feature Edge
We click the Post Data tab in the Tool Bar. There we select the vertical displacements
uY as the result data type. For the deformation data we select the displacement vector
u = uX,Y,Z . We set the plot type to contour plot and apply all the settings. The deformed
mesh appears with contours for the value of the vertical displacement [Fig. 4.1a]. We also
apply Post Style options to get gradient contours and only the outlines of the model.
4.2.2
Von Mises Stress
Horizontal stress
FX+
Post Data
g 2D Element Stresses
Data Filter
Result Data Type -Von Mises Apply
30
Results Assessment
(a) displacements
(b) Von Mises stress
Figure 4.1: Analysis results
Still in the Post Data tab we click Data Filter and select the three-dimensional element
stress. As result data type we select the Von Mises stresses. We display these as contours
in the deformed model [Fig. 4.1b].
Part II
Examples
Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA (II)
Chapter 5
Analysis of a Concrete Floor

Name:
CfloorFX
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/CfloorFX
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: cq24p plate.
load: elemen face force weight.
result: cauchy displa extern force green moment reacti strain stress total.
This chapter is a further introduction to FX+ for Diana. Here we will not emphasize
the more basic features but concentrate ourselves on the more advanced ones. We will
also introduce a more automatic meshing algorithm and apply a special FX+ option to
check the quality of the mesh. Furthermore, some general features regarding pre- and
postprocessing with FX+ will be shown that were not introduced earlier. The model
represents a concrete floor of a house [Fig. 5.1].
9.00
3.50
Y
X
4.50
wall
6.50
ROOM
GARAGE
6.00
4.00
7.00
5.50
Figure 5.1: Model
5.1
Finite Element Model
The finite element model will consist of CQ24P plate bending elements for the floor. We
will concentrate on the methods for creating the model and postprocessing the results,
34

rather than examining the results of the analysis.
5.1.1
Geometry
For the modeling session with FX+ we start a new model and ask for a top-view, i.e.,
perpendicular to the the XY -plane.
FX+
New model and grid

File New
View View Point Top
Geometry Work Plane Grid Setting...
Rectangular Grid
Grid Type
Rectangular Grid
Origin: 0, 0
Display
Line
Uniform
Grid
Grid
Size: 0.5
Number:
25
4Q
OK
Zoom & Pan
Via the Rectangular Grid dialog we define a grid in the fourth quadrant (+X, Y ) with 25
intervals of 0.5 m. Note that for many of the parameters in the dialog we can simply accept
the default settings. The defined grid offers a grid point for each of the points indicated
in the model [Fig. 5.1]. This greatly simplifies the definition of the model geometry. With
a bit of zoom and pan we get a clear display of the grid [Fig. 5.2].
Figure 5.2: Grid for the new model

FX+
Geometry profiles
Geometry
Grid
Curve
Create on WP
Profile (Wire)...
Snap
Profile
Polyline
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
0,0
3.5,0 0,-2.5 -3.5,0 0,2.5
3.5,-0.5
2,0 0,0.5 3.5,0 0,-2.5 -4.5,0 0,1.5 -1,0 0,0.5
0,-2.5
9,0 0,-4 -9,0 0,4
9,-4.5
3.5,0 0,-6 -5.5,0 0,4 2,0 0,2
11,-8.5
1,0 0,-1.5 -1,0 0,1.5
We launch the Profile dialog to define the polylines of the five profiles. Prior to the
definition of the polylines we switch on Grid Snap by clicking the button in the Tool Bar.
Now we can simply move the cursor to each appropriate point and click the mouse as
soon as the cursor snaps onto the grid point. Note that the first point of each profile is
specified in absolute XY -coordinates, the other points in xy-coordinates relative to the
5.1 Finite Element Model
35
first point. After the last profile we see the full outline of the model geometry [Fig. 5.3a].
Note that there are duplicate lines at the common edges of the various profiles. We will
now clean up the geometry by removing these duplicates.
(a) profiles
(b) duplicate lines removed
Figure 5.3: Geometry

FX+
Remove duplicate lines

Geometry
Intersect
Curve
Geometry Check
Check Duplicates
Intersect...
Select all shapes
Work Window
Apply
Duplicates...
Apply
Toggle Grid
We launch the Intersect dialog, select all shapes in the Work Window by dragging the
mouse cursor and click Apply. All edges that are common to two profiles are now split,
for instance the right edge of profile 1 is now split in three. Then we launch the Check
Duplicates dialog where we accept all default settings and click Apply. The duplicate
lines are now removed. We switch off the grid and clearly see the remaining lines in blue
[Fig. 5.3b]. When you move the mouse pointer over the lines FX+ will highlight lines that
you point to, so you can check that lines are split properly and duplicates removed.
5.1.2
Properties
We will define material properties and the thickness for the plate model.
FX+
Material
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Cfloor
Structural
Elastic Modulus: 2.5e10
Poissons Ratio: 0.2
Mass Density: 2000
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called Cfloor. We
specify an isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 2.51010 , Poissons ratio
= 0.2, and mass density = 2000 [Fig. 5.4a].
FX+
Thickness
Property Manager
Create
2D...

Plate
ID: 1
Name: Cfloor
36
(b) thickness
(a) material
Figure 5.4: Property specification

Data ID: 1 Data Name: Cfloor
Isotropic
Material: 1: Cfloor
Thickness: 0.3
OK
Property Manager
Close
We launch the Property Manager dialog and create an isotropic property Cfloor for a
two-dimensional plate model with a uniform thickness t = 0.3 [Fig. 5.4b]. We also attach
the material Cfloor to this property. The Diana element type that will be used is the
CQ24P plate bending element [Ap. A], but there is no need to specify this. We close the
dialogs.
5.1.3
Meshing
We will first specify a global element size and then subsequently mesh the five profiles.
FX+
Global size
Mesh Size Control
Global Mesh Size
Mesh Size
Element
Global Size...
Size: 0.5
Name: Floor
OK
We specify a global size of 0.5 for the elements and call the mesh to be generated Floor.
FX+
Profile 1
Auto
Map
Select Object Edges
Select six edges
Preview OK
We launch the Map-Mesh k-Edge Area dialog and select the six edges of Profile 1. FX+
will highlight the selected edges in red. With a click on the Preview button in the lowerleft corner of the dialog we check the division of the edges, i.e., the locations of the nodes
to be generated along the edges [Fig. 5.5a]. We agree and close the dialog. The mesh
appears in the Work Window [Fig. 5.5b].
37
(a) edges division
(b) generated mesh
Figure 5.5: Meshing Profile 1

FX+
Profile 2
Select Edge(s)
Select eight edges
Mesher Grid Mesher Apply
Undo
Mesher Loop Mesher

Select Edge(s) Select eight edges
OK
We launch the Auto-Mesh Planar Area dialog and select the eight edges of Profile 2. First
we try the Grid Mesher. With a click on the Apply button we see that the mesh is slightly
irregular: the vertical lines are curved [Fig. 5.6a]. We undo the last mesh via the Tool
(a) Grid Mesher
(b) Loop Mesher
Figure 5.6: Meshing Profile 2

Button and try the Loop Mesher. This yields a better mesh [Fig. 5.6b]. We accept it and
close the dialog.
FX+
Profile 3
Auto
Map
Select Object Edges
Select eight edges
OK
For Profile 3 we get a nice regular mesh with the Map Mesher [Fig. 5.7a].
Profile 4 and 5
FX+

Select Edge(s)
Select ten edges
Mesher Loop Mesher OK
For Profiles 4 and 5 (the floor with the hole) we apply the Loop Mesher. Note that we
38
(a) Map Mesher for Profile 3
(b) Loop Mesher for Profiles 4 and 5
Figure 5.7: Meshing Profiles 3, 4, 5

must select not only the outer edges but also the edges of the internal hole, this is ten
edges in total. The Loop Mesher also makes a nice regular mesh [Fig. 5.7b]. By default,
FX+ has generated a mesh with linear elements (without mid-nodes). In this model we
will apply quadratic elements (with mid-nodes).
FX+
Quadratic elements
Change
Order
g Mid-Node to Geometry
Select all elements Apply
Quadratic
Select Element(s)
We launch the dialog Change Element Parameters and choose the Quadratic option.
Then we select all elements, 334 in total. We apply the settings and close the dialog.
To check the mesh, for instance to see if the elements are quadratic indeed, we will now
demonstrate some of the mesh display options.
FX+
Final mesh display
Pre-Works
Datum Hide All
Geometry Hide All
Mesh Mesh Set
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Colors green
four sets Color...
four sets Shrink
four sets Display Node
set 1 Properties General Node Color
black
black
black
black
All these options can be applied via the Pre-Works Tree. First we hide the display of
various data (axes, planes etc.) and geometry. Next we select the four mesh sets that form
the complete mesh [Fig. 5.8a]. In the pop-up menu we activate various options: change
the element color to green, display the mesh in shrunken style, and display all nodes as
black dots. In the final display we can clearly see the mid-nodes [Fig. 5.8b].
5.1.4
We will define the boundary constraints (supports) via the BC Set and Constraint dialogs.
FX+
Supports
Work Window
Analysis
BC Set
BC
Hide Datum & WP
Set...
39
(b) display
(a) mesh set selection
Figure 5.8: Displaying the final mesh

Name: Walls
Desc.: Walls supporting the floor
Add
Close
Analysis BC
Constraint
Constraint...
BC Set: Walls
Object
Type Node
Select Node(s)
View View Point
Pre-Works
Select four sets
Select nodes at walls
g T3
DOF
OK
Isometric
Display
Node
Hide
First we launch the BC Set dialog to create a set of boundary constraints called Walls.
Then we launch the Constraint dialog and select this set. With the mouse pointer we
select the appropriate rows of nodes at the walls by dragging selection frames around
them. This selects a total of 232 nodes which show up highlighted in red [Fig. 5.9a]. For
(a) selected nodes
(b) isometric view
Figure 5.9: Supports at walls

the selected nodes we add supports for degree of freedom T3 which is the translation in
the global Z-direction (vertical). An isometric view of the model, with the nodes hidden,
clearly confirms the correct definition of the supports [Fig. 5.9b].
5.1.5
Loading
For the loading we will first create three load sets and then specify the parameters for
each of the load sets separately.
40

FX+
Load sets
Analysis Load
Load Set
Set...
Name: Case 1
Name: Case 2
Name: Case 3
Desc.: Dead weight

Desc.: Pressure house
Desc.: Pressure floor 1
Add
Add
Add
Close
Work Window
Hide All Labels
We launch the Load Set dialog and create three load sets: Case 1 for the dead weight,
Case 2 for pressure on the floor of the house, and Case 3 for a local pressure on floor 1,
i.e., the top-left profile. We close the dialog, and hide the display of axes and supports
via the pop-up menu in the Work Window.
FX+
Dead weight
Analysis Load
Body Force
Body Force...
Load Set Case 1

Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: 0 G3: -9.8
OK
We specify the dead weight load via the Body Force dialog: an acceleration of gravity
g = 9.8 in the third global direction. So the gravity works downward (in the Zdirection).
FX+
Pressure on house floor

View View Point Top
Analysis Load Pressure...
Pressure
Load Set Case 2

Type Face Pressure
Object
Type 2D Element
Select Element(s)
Select elements of house floor
Direction Ref. CSys-Axis 3 Ref. CSys Global Rectangular
g Uniform P or P1: -5
OK
View
View Point
Isometric 1
We revert to a top view of the model and launch the Pressure dialog to specify the pressure
load on the house floor. We select the 224 elements in this floor simply by a single drag
of the mouse pointer [Fig. 5.10a]. We specify a uniformly distributed load q = 5 in the
(a) selected elements
(b) isometric view
Figure 5.10: Pressure on house floor

third global axis direction which yields a downward load. The isometric view confirms
the distribution over the model and the direction [Fig. 5.10b].
5.2 Linear Analysis
41
FX+
Pressure on floor 1
View View Point Top

Work Window Hide All Labels
Analysis Load
Pressure
Pressure...
Load Set Case 3

Type Face Pressure
Object
Type 2D Element
Select Element(s)
Select elements of floor 1
Direction Direction : 0,0,-1
g Uniform P or P1: 7.5
OK
View View Point Isometric 1
Also via the Pressure dialog we specify the pressure load on the 35 elements of floor 1
[Fig. 5.11a]. Here we specify the direction in a different way. First we define a direction
(a) selected elements
(b) isometric view
Figure 5.11: Pressure on floor 1

vector {0, 0, 1} representing the global Z-direction. Then we specify a uniform load
q = 7.5 in this direction. This also yields a vertical load downward [Fig. 5.11b].
5.1.6
Exporting the Model
The model is now complete and we can export it to an FX+ Pre-Neutral file for Diana.
FX+
Pre-Neutral file
File Export
Save As
Pre-Neutral (FXD)...
Save in: directory (folder)

File Name: Cfloor
Save as Type: Pre-Neutral File (*.fxd)
Save
Here we save the file as Cfloor.fxd in the current directory or, if appropriate, in another
directory.
5.2
Linear Analysis
To perform the analysis we launch the Diana Mesh Editor from FX+.
Launching the Mesh Editor
Analysis
FX+
Diana
42

Run analysis
Analysis
Status
Mesh Editor
Run...
Diana
Select analysis type
Type
Structural linear static
OK
Diana
Structural linear static Edit...
Output Device midas FX+ for DIANA
OK
Run
We run a structural linear static analysis and save the results on Post-Neutral files for
FX+. To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and initiate the postprocessing.
FX+
Initiate postprocessing
Open
File Name
Post File Import

View View Point
Results
Cfloor.dpb
File Name
Add...
Open
Cfloor.dpb
Import
Normal
Structural Linear Static
We import the Post Result file Cfloor.dpb. Then we make an isometric view of the
model. In the Results Tree we open Structural Linear Static to see an overview of the
available load cases.
5.2.1
Displacements
We will asses the displacements for load case 1, the dead weight. Fore these displacements
we will demonstrate two display styles: deformed mesh shape and contour plot.
FX+
Deformed mesh
Post Style
Post Data
Edge
Type
g Mesh Edge
Output Set Load Case Number 1

g Nodal Displacements
Data Filter
Result Data Type TDtZ(V)
g Deformed+Undeformed
Mesh Shape
Plot Type all
Apply
On the Post Style tab we switch the display of mesh edges on. Then we activate the Post
Data tab and select load case 1. In the data filter we choose the nodal displacements. We
set the data type to the vertical displacements uZ . We set the mesh shape to deformed
and undeformed with the displacement vectors as deformation data. We switch off all
plot types and click Apply. FX+ displays the undeformed mesh in blue and gray and the
deformed mesh in black [Fig. 5.12a].
FX+
Contour plot
Post Data
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Post Style
Contour
Edge
Type
Type
Apply
g Gradient
g No Edge
On the Post Data tab we set the mesh shape to undeformed and tick the contour plot type.
On the Post Style tab we ask for gradient contours and switch off the display of element
edges. These options give a clean contour plot of the selected data type [Fig. 5.12b].
5.2 Linear Analysis
43
(a) deformed mesh shape
(b) contour plot uZ
Figure 5.12: Displacement for dead weight
5.2.2
Bending Moments
We will draw contour plots of bending moments in the deformed mesh and a diagram of
the bending moment along a line in the model.
FX+
Contours in deformed mesh
Post Style
Post Data
Edge
Type
g Mesh Edge

g 2D Element Forces/Moments
Data Filter
Result Data Type -Mxx
g Deformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Result Data Type -Myy
Apply
In the Post Style tab we switch on the display of the element edges. On the Post Data tab
we select load case 3, the pressure on floor 1. As result we select the bending moments
mXX in the elements. We display these as contours in a deformed mesh [Fig. 5.13a]. We
also display the bending moment mY Y as contours [Fig. 5.13b].
(a) mXX
(b) mY Y
Figure 5.13: Bending moments for pressure on floor 1 (deformed mesh)

FX+
Diagram
Post Style
Edge
Type
g Feature Edge
Legend
Post Data
Data Filter 2D Element Forces/Moments
Result Data Type -Myy
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
Plot Type all
Apply
44

Post On-Curve Diagram...
On-Curve Diagram
Define Curve
2-Point Line: 0,-4.5,0

9,-4.5,0
+Z-Dir
Diagram Direction
Name: Myy Add

g Myy
Diagram
For the moment diagram we display the feature edges only, i.e., the model outlines, and we
switch off the legend. We choose load case 2, the load on the house floor. As result data
we select the bending moments mY Y . For a clear diagram, we switch off the deformed
mesh shape and the plot type. Then we launch the On-Curve Diagram dialog where we
specify the coordinates of the two end-points of the diagram: respectively at the left and
right edge of the floor. We also indicate that the diagram should be drawn perpendicular
to the floor, i.e., in the +Z-direction. We call the diagram Myy and add it to the list
of diagrams. Finally we activate the diagram in the list and click the Diagram button to
get it drawn in the current isometric view of the model [Fig. 5.14a]. This also confirms
the location of the diagram along the specified line.
FX+
Diagram - front view and table

View View Point Front
On-Curve Diagram
Type of Display
g Plot Min/Max Value
Min/Max
Diagram
Size: 25
Table
Close
In a front view of the model we get a more common display of the diagram: the model
reduces to a horizontal line and the diagram values are plotted perpendicular to this line
[Fig. 5.14b]. We also choose to display the extreme values of the diagram in a large font.
(a) isometric view
(b) front view
Figure 5.14: Bending moment diagram mY Y for load on house floor

We click Table to get the values of the diagram in a table on the On-Curve Diagram tab
in the Work Window [Fig. 5.15a]. You can click the top-left cell to select the entire table
and paste it into a spreadsheet [Fig. 5.15b].
5.2 Linear Analysis
45
(a) table
(b) spreadsheet
Figure 5.15: Tabulated bending moment diagram
46
Chapter 6
Post-tensioned Concrete Beam

Name:
PostTeFX
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/PostTeFX
Keywords:
analys: nonlin physic.

constr: suppor.
elemen: bar beam class2 ishape l7ben reinfo.
load: anchor elemen force line postte reinfo weight.
materi: concre consta crack creep cutoff elasti harden isotro kelvin mc1990
nonlin plasti retent shrink smear soften strain time viscoe vonmis.
option: adapti arclen direct groups linese loadin newton normal regula
size units update.
result: cauchy crack displa force green moment plasti strain stress total.
A
Y
P1
P2
X
A
30 m
30 m
500
cBB = 90
300
200
850
250
cAA = 130
800
Figure 6.1: Post-tensioned beam [mm]

This example deals with a post-tensioned concrete beam on three supports [Fig. 6.1]. It
illustrates the use of post-tensioned tendons, and the performance of Limit State analyses
with cracking. The beam is loaded by dead weight, by post-tensioning and by distributed
permanent and live loads from the girders. We will perform three analyses on the model:
Preliminary, Serviceability Limit State (SLS), and Ultimate Limit State (ULS).
Preliminary analysis.
We will start with a preliminary linear elastic analysis [ 6.2]. In this analysis the
concrete is loaded by the post-tensioned tendon, by dead weight at the age of seven
days, and by the permanent load at the age of fourteen days (P1 = P2 = 10 kN/m).
48

Serviceability Limit State analysis.
After completion of the preliminary linear analysis we will perform the nonlinear
SLS analysis [ 6.4]. This analysis includes aging, creep, and shrinkage over five
years according to the CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 [4].
Ultimate Limit State analysis.
Finally we will perform the ULS analysis with the same model and an increasing
live load until collapse [ 6.6].
6.1
FX+
Initiate new model

File New
View View Point Normal
Work Window Hide Datum & WP
Pre-Works
Datum
Work Window
X-Axis
Show
Y-Axis
Show
Grid Setting...
Rectangular Grid
Uniform
Grid
Size: 5
Number:
12
1Q
OK
Work Window
Toggle Grid
Note that in the lower-right corner of the Main Window FX+ shows the units in which
the model is going to be defined. For this example we choose [N,m]. We will use day as
time unit, which we will define in the data file before running the analyses [ 6.1.6 p. 57].
As this is a two-dimensional model we choose a normal view via the View menu to get
a viewing direction perpendicular to the XY -plane. We display only the X- and Y -axis
and define a rectangular grid with 12 intervals of 5 m which gives a grid size of 6060 m
[Fig. 6.2a].
(a) initial grid
(b) displayed line
Figure 6.2: Definition of first line for the new model
6.1.1
Beam
We will define the model of the beam with two lines in its axial direction. After having
checked the lines we will perform the meshing and define the properties. Finally, we will
check the mesh in isometric views.
FX+
Two lines
Geometry
2D Line
Method
Method
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Line...
0,0
30,0
30,0
30,0
49
We create two lines along the X-axis. We specify each line via the absolute coordinates
of its start point and the relative coordinates of its end point. The lines show up in blue
in the Work Window [Fig. 6.2b].
FX+
Check lines
Pre-Works
Geometry
Curve
Line[...]
Properties
Bound
Min X value?
Max X value?
When we select a line in the Pre-Works Tree then its properties appear in the Property
Window. In this case you may check the coordinate bounds for each line. The X-bounds
should be 0 and 30 for the first line and 30 and 60 for the second line. For both lines the
Y - and Z-bounds should be zero.
FX+
Meshing and properties

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s)
Select the two lines
Property ...
Property Manager
Create
1D...

Beam
ID: 1
Name: Beam
Data ID: 1
Data Name: Beam
Class II
2D
Material ...
ID: 1
Dummy
Name: Concrete
OK
Material Manager
Close
Section
Template...
Section Library
H-Section
H: 1.4
B1: 0.5
tw: 0.2
tf1: 0.3
B2: 0.8
tf2: 0.25
OK

Property Manager
OK
Close
Auto-Mesh Edge
Mesh Set
Name: Beam
OK
In the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog we specify a division of 15 elements along the two lines, i.e.,
a total of 30 elements for the model. Then we attach a property number 1 named Beam
to the model. We choose for Class-II beam elements in a two-dimensional model. For
the beam we create a dummy material property now and will specify the actual material
properties in the Mesh Editor later [ 6.1.5 p. 56]. In the Section Library dialog [Fig. 6.3]
we choose a H-Section and specify the dimensions as indicated in Figure 6.1. The dialog
shows the real shape of the specified cross-section.
FX+
Model view
View View Point

Pre-Works
Property
Isometric 1
1D Beam
Show Section
A one-dimensional beam model, like this one, is best viewed with its real dimensions,
including the cross-section, in an isometric view. Therefore we right-click on the Beam
entry in the Pre-Works Tree and choose Show Section in the pop-up menu. The beam
clearly shows its dimensions and division in elements [Fig. 6.4].
50
Figure 6.3: Definition of beam cross-section
Figure 6.4: Isometric view of finite element model
6.1.2
Tendon
To model the tendon we will first define the geometry [ 6.1.2.1], then specify the properties
[ 6.1.2.2], and finally mesh the geometry into sections [ 6.1.2.3].
6.1.2.1
Geometry
To define the geometry of the tendon we will specify some points along its trajectory.
Then we will define a B-spline curve through these points.
Points along tendon
0.0
0.0
11.65 -0.5
29.1
0.6217
30.0
0.68
30.9
0.6217
48.35 -0.5
60.0
0.0
points.txt
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
We prepare an external file with the XY Z-coordinates [m] of seven points along its
trajectory.
FX+
Points
Work Window
Toggle Grid
Geometry Point Tabular Input...

Point Coordinate Table Load from File...
Open
File Name: points.txt
Point Coordinate Table

View View Point
Pre-Works
Geometry
Open
g Make Points as Compound
OK
Top
Compound Point Compound
Show Only
51
Property 1D Beam Hide Section

Mesh Mesh Set Beam Hide
We switch off the grid. Via the Point Coordinate Table dialog we read the file with point
coordinates. For ease of reference we assemble the points in a compound. In the top view
the beam section virtually hides all the points. When we hide the beam section and the
(a) top view
(b) front view
Figure 6.5: Tendon points

mesh itself, the points are visible just above and below the X-axis [Fig. 6.5a]. The front
view confirms the central position of the points [Fig. 6.5b].
FX+
B-spline for trajectory

Geometry Curve Create on WP
2D B-Spline
Through
B-Spline...
Multiple Points
Select Point(s)
Apply
Select all 7 points
We revert to an isometric view of the model and launch the B-Spline dialog. We select
all seven points [Fig. 6.6a] and click Apply to create the B-spline curve [Fig. 6.6b].
(a) selected points
(b) B-spline through points
Figure 6.6: Defining the geometry of the tendon
6.1.2.2
Properties
We must define the shape of the bar sections in the Diana model and the general physical
and material properties for the tendon.
FX+
Shape of bar sections

Analysis Property
Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

Reinforcement Bar Section (1D)
ID: 2
Name: Curve
52

Data ID: 2 Data Name: Curve
Curved Shape
OK
Via the Property Manager dialog we create a reinforcement property which enforces a
curved shape for bar sections in the Diana model.
FX+
Properties of the tendon

Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

Reinforcement Bar
ID: 3
Name: Tendon
Data ID: 3 Data Name: Tendon

Material ...
Isotropic
ID: 2
Structural
Name: Steel
Constitutive Model
Model Type
Von Mises
Yield Stress: 1.86e9
OK
Material Manager
Close

Reinforcement Bar
Material 2: Steel
Cross-Sectional Area: 2.886e-3
OK
Property Manager
Close
We define a property Tendon made of Steel with a Youngs modulus E = 2.11011 Pa

and a Von Mises yield stress y = 1.86109 Pa. Finally we give the property Tendon a
cross-sectional area A = 0.002886 m2 .
6.1.2.3
Meshing
We will first split the B-spline into reinforcement sections and then assemble all these
sections into one tendon.
Split B-spline into sections
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
FX+
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the B-spline

Property
2: Curve
g Reinforcement
Type Bar in Beam

3: Tendon
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
g Generate Mid-Side Nodes
OK
Auto-Mesh Edge
Mesh Set
Name: Tendon
OK
Pre-Works
Geometry Curve Hide all
Mesh Reinforcement Tendon
Show Only
Shrink
Display Node
In the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog we select the B-spline [Fig. 6.7a] and indicate a division into
twenty sections. We also assign the property to enforce the curved shape of all sections.
53
(a) selected B-spline
(b) sections
Figure 6.7: Meshing the tendon

For an accurate approximation of the tendon trajectory we choose quadratic sections,
i.e., curved with mid-nodes on the geometry of the B-spline. We can directly generate a
reinforcement from the reinforcement sections. We assemble all the twenty sections into
one tendon. We also assign the appropriate property to the tendon. Finally we display
the sections in the current isometric view, in shrunken style and with nodes [Fig. 6.7b].
6.1.3
Supports
We prepare the definition of the supports with some useful display options.
FX+
Display options
Pre-Works
Geometry Compound Point Compound

Mesh Reinforcement Tendon Hide
Mesh Mesh Set Beam Show Only
Mesh Mesh Set Beam Shrink
Datum X-Axis Hide
Datum Z-Axis Show
Work Window
Hide
Toggle Grid
Toggle GCS Triad
Toggle WCS Triad
Display Option
LBC
BC
Display
Constraint
Symbol Size: 30.0
OK
Via the Show Only option of the Beam Mesh and the Hide option for the Compound and
the Reinforcement, we hide the tendon and display the mesh of the beam elements. We
also apply the Shrink option for the mesh and hide the X-axis and switch on the Z-axis.
Via the Display Option dialog we set the symbol size such that the supported degrees of
freedom will stand out in the model display.
FX+
Define supports
BC Set
Name: Supports
Desc.: Three supports
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the two outer nodes

g T2
Apply
DOF
Select Node(s)
g T1
g T2
DOF
Select node at middle of beam

OK
Via the Constraint and BC Set dialogs we create a new set of boundary constraints. For
54

the two outer nodes we support the vertical displacement uY (degree of freedom T2). For
the middle node we support the axial and vertical displacements uX,Y (degrees of freedom
T1 and T2). The display confirms the correct definition of the supports [Fig. 6.8.]
Figure 6.8: Supports
6.1.4
Loading
The loading comprises the dead weight and three line loads on the beam.
FX+
Dead weight
Analysis Load Body Force...
Body Force Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: Gravity & Postten
Desc.: Gravity load and post-tensioning load
Add
Close
Body Force
Load Set Gravity & Postten
Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: -0.732313e11
G3: 0
OK
We specify the dead weight load via the Body Force dialog: an acceleration of gravity
g = 0.732313e11 m/day2 in the second global direction. So the gravity works downward
(in the Y -direction). Note, that we need to enter the gravity acceleration in m/day2 ,
because we will use day as time unit.
Post-tensioning load
FX+
Pre-Works
Mesh Hide All

Mesh Reinforcement Show All
BC Hide All
Analysis Load Post Tension...
Post Tensioning for Reinforcement
Load Set Gravity & Postten

Object Select Mesh Set Select the reinforcement bar
Both Ends
Type
Select First Node Select node at origin
Select Second Node Select node at (60,0,0)
Nodal Force 1: 0.44e7
Nodal Force 2: 0.44e7
Coulomb Shear Coefficient: 0.22
Wobble Factor: 0.01
Retention Length 1: 0.01
Retention Length 2: 0.01
OK
Basically the post-tensioning load is defined by the prestress values, the parameters of the
55
Coulomb friction model and the retention of the anchors. We specify the post-tensioning
load via the Post Tension dialog. The display confirms the correct definition of the posttensioning load [Fig. 6.9.]
Figure 6.9: Post-tensioning load

FX+
Display options
Display Option
LBC
Load
Element Beam Load
Display
Proportional Size True

Symbol Size: 20.0
Apply
OK
Via the Display Option dialog we ask for load arrows with a size proportional to the load
value. We also set the symbol size such that element beam loads will stand out in the
model display.
FX+
Line loads on beam
Pre-Works
Mesh Show All

Mesh Reinforcement Hide All
Mesh Mesh Set Beam Shrink
Load Hide All
Analysis Load Element Beam Load...
Element Beam Load Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: Left and Right
Name: Left
Name: Right
Desc.: 10 kN/m
Desc.: 15 kN/m on the left part
Desc.: 15 kN/m on the right part
Add
Add
Add
Close
Element Beam Load

Load Set Left and Right
Object
Type Element
Force
Select Element(s)
Select all 30 elements
Distributed
Direction Global Y
Fraction
x1: 0
Value
w1: -10000
x2: 1
w2: -10000
Load Set Left

Object Select Element(s)
Select 15 elements at left side
Value
w1: -15000
x1: 0
x2: 1
w2: -15000
Load Set Right

Select 15 elements at right side
Value
w1: -15000
x1: 0
x2: 1
w2: -15000
Preview Apply
Preview Apply
Preview OK
We launch the Element Beam Load dialog and create three load sets, respectively for the
fully loaded beam and for the load on the left and right parts only. Then we define the
parameters of the three load sets: the selected elements, a distributed force load in global
Y -direction, and the start and end values of the load. For each load set a click on the
Preview button confirms its correct definition [Fig. 6.10].
56
(a) set 1: on full beam
(b) set 2: on left half
(c) set 3: on right half
Figure 6.10: Line loads on beam
6.1.5
Mesh Editor
To complete the material parameters we launch the Mesh Editor from FX+, which
brings you in the Mesh Editor of Diana.
FX+
Analysis
Now we will specify the material parameters for the concrete and the reinforcement steel.
First, we fill in the material parameters for the nonlinear behavior of the C55 grade
concrete according to the CEB-FIP Model Code 1990 [Vol. Material Library]: notional
size hc = 580 mm, and an age at the element birth tel = 7 days. Furthermore we use
the multidirectional fixed crack model with tensile strength ft = 4.75106 Pa, fracture
energy Gf = 100 N/m, numerical crack bandwidth h = 2 m, constant shear retention
factor = 0.2 and the Hordijk softening curve.
Set additional concrete parameters
setMaterialParameter(
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
PostTeFX.py
"CONCRE", "MC1990" )
"GRADE", "C55" )
"CRACK", 1 )
"CRKVAL", 4.75E+6 )
"TENSIO", 5 )
"GF", 100.0 )
"CRACKB", 2.0 )
"TAUCRI", 1 )
"BETA", 0.2 )
"CREEPN", "" )
"H", 580.0 )
"AGING", 7.0 )
"SHRINN", "" )
Subsequently, for the steel of the reinforcement tendon we additionally specify that the
steel is not bonded to the surrounding concrete.
Set additional steel parameter
PostTeFX.py
setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "NOBOND", "" )
Finally, we save the model as an Diana data file Beam.dat.

Export model to input data file
Mesh Editor
File Export model...

Export model
File name: Beam.dat

Files of type Diana mesh data files (*.dat)
Save
6.2 Linear Analysis
6.1.6
57
Adapting the time units
However, prior to the analysis we will adapt the model with respect to the time unit.
With an appropriate text editor we modify the table UNITS on the data file Beam.dat,
specifying that the unit of time is DAY.
Add time unit in data file
Beam.dat
UNITS
TIME DAY
Subsequently, we import the changed data file in Mesh Editor.

Import the changed data file
Mesh Editor

Import model
File name: Beam.dat

Open
6.2
Linear Analysis
First of all, we will perform a linear analysis in order to check the model.
Linear analysis commands
Linear.dcf
*LINSTA
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "Linear"
END OUTPUT
*END
The above commands can be set up using the GUI as follows. Click on the button Create
new analysis
and name it Linear. Then set the analysis type to Structural linear
static and click on the button Add command. Subsequently, navigate through the tree
to Output linear static analysis and right-click on it. Select Properties and set Device
to midas FX+ for DIANA. Then click close and subsequently click on the button Run
solver
.
Alternatively, we could import the existing Linear.dcf file that contains the linear
analysis commands and then run the analysis:
Import linear analysis commands
PostTeFX.py
newAnalysis( "Linear" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Linear", "Linear.dcf" )
runSolver( "Linear" )
6.3
Preliminary Linear Analysis Results
To assess these results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files.
58

FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files

Post Model File
Open
Add...
Open
Add...
File name
File name
Linear.dpb
Open
Linear.dmb
Open
Import
First we open the FX+ database Beam.fdb. Then we import the Post-Neutral files: the
Post Result file Linear.dpb and the Post Model file Linear.dmb.
6.3.1
Stress in Tendon
We will make a graph of the distribution of the axial stress along the reinforcement tendon
for the dead weight plus post-tensioning load case.
FX+
Dead weight plus post-tensioning
Pre-Works
View
Results
View Point
Top

Sxx Table
Records Activation OK
Table
Load Case 1
1D Reinforcement Stresses/Strains ...
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
X (m) Select cells with Position 1.0000 L middle points of the reinforcement sections
Sxx Select corresponding cells
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Sxx
OK
In the Results Tree we select load case 1 and the axial stress xx of the reinforcement.
In the pop-up menu we choose Table which brings the analysis results in tabular form
on a new tab in the Work Window [Fig. 6.11a]. With a right-click in the table a menu
(a) output table with selected cells
(b) for dead weight plus post-tensioning
Figure 6.11: Axial stress along the tendon

pops up where we choose Sorting Dialog. In the Sorting Information dialog we perform a
operation to sort the results by position. In the table we select the cells which form the
values for the horizontal and vertical axes of the graph: the cells in column X with 1.0000
L in column Position (5190), which represent the middle nodes of the reinforcement
sections and the corresponding cells in column Sxx. The graph shows the distribution
of the stress along the tendon [Fig. 6.11b].
6.3 Preliminary Linear Analysis Results
6.3.2
59
Bending Moment in Beam
We will make graphs of the distribution of the bending moment Mx along the beam for
the dead weight plus post-tensioning and for the live load.
FX+
Dead weight plus post-tensioning
Results

Mz Table
Table
Load Case 1
1D Element Forces/Moments ...
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Table Columns
Sort Key Columns

Priority
Asc|No
Down Down
Sort Close
Table
X (m) Select cells with Position 0.0000 L at origin and Position 1.0000 L
-Mz Select corresponding cells
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Mz
OK
In the Results Tree we select load case 1 and the bending moment Mz of the beam
elements. In the pop-up menu we choose Table which brings the analysis results in
tabular form on a new tab in the Work Window [Fig. 6.12a]. With a right-click in the
(a) output table with selected cells
(b) for dead weight plus post-tensioning
Figure 6.12: Bending moment along the beam

table a menu pops up where we choose Sorting Dialog. In the Sorting Information dialog
we perform a few operations to sort the results by X position. In the table we select the
cells which form the values for the horizontal and vertical axes of the graph: the cell in
column X with position 0.0000 L at the origin, which represents the first node of the
beam, and all cells in column X with position 1.0000 L, which represent all end nodes
of the beam elements, and the corresponding cells in column Mz. The graph shows the
distribution of the bending moment along the beam [Fig. 6.12b].
FX+
Live load
Results

Mz Table
Table
Load Case 3
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Table Columns
Sort Key Columns

Priority
Asc|No
Down Down
Sort Close
60

Table
Mz Select corresponding cells
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Mz
OK
Here we select load case 3, the live load on the beam. We make the graph with the same
procedure as shown previously [Fig. 6.13].
Figure 6.13: Bending moment along the beam for live load
6.3.3
Shear Force in Beam
We will make a graph of the distribution of the shear force Qy along the beam for the
dead weight plus post tensioning load case.
FX+
Dead weight and post-tensioning
Results

Qy Table
Table
Load Case 1
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Table Columns
Sort Key Columns

Priority
Asc|No
Down Down
Sort Close
Table
Qy Select corresponding cells
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Qy
OK
Here we select load case 1, the dead weight plus post tensioning. We also select the shear
force Qy in the beam elements and finally make the graph with the same procedure as
shown previously [Fig. 6.14].
6.4
Serviceability Limit State Analysis
We will perform a nonlinear analysis for the Serviceability Limit State (SLS). This analysis
applies the creep and shrinkage modeling features of Diana. However, prior to the
analysis we will adapt the model with respect to the integration schemes of the elements.
6.4.1
Adapting the Element Integration Scheme
The default integration scheme of the beam cross-section is not appropriate for this nonlinear analysis. Indeed, under integration along the beam is not recommended for physical
6.4 Serviceability Limit State Analysis
61
Figure 6.14: Shear force along the beam for dead weight plus post-tensioning
nonlinear analysis. Moreover, a three-point scheme within the cross-section is also too
low. With the following commands we can overrule the default integration scheme.
Adapt the integration scheme for beam elements
PostTeFX.py
setElementDataParameter( "Beam", "NINTEG", [ 3, 11 ] )

setElementDataParameter( "Beam", "NUMINT", [ "GAUSS", "SIMPSO" ] )
With the NINTEG input data item we adopt three integration points along the beam and
eleven integration points in each rectangle of the I-shaped cross-section (see also Volume
Element Library for integration schemes of beam elements). This gives a reasonable dense
distribution of points along the height of the I-profile [Fig. 6.15]. Note that integration
11
6
1
33
28
23
22
17
12
Figure 6.15: Integration points in I-shape cross-section

points 11 and 12 are on the outer fibers of the cross-section and that there are two pairs
of overlapping integration points: (1, 33) and (22, 23).
6.4.2
Running the Analysis
For the Serviceability Limit State analysis we apply the following commands:
SLS analysis commands
SLS.dcf
*NONLIN
TYPE PHYSIC CRACKI OFF
:
Post-tensioning and dead weight
EXECUT
:
7 days of creep and shrinkage
BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.03 0.07 0.2 0.7 2(3)
62

ITERAT MAXITE 20
PHYSIC BOND
END EXECUT
:
Permanent load
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 2
ITERAT MAXITE 20
PHYSIC BOND
END EXECUT
5 years of creep and shrinkage

BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.03 0.07 0.2 0.7 2 7 20 70 265 365(4)
ITERAT MAXITE 20
PHYSIC BOND
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "SLS"
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRAIN SHRINK GREEN
STRESS TOTAL FORCE
STRESS TOTAL MOMENT
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
In the TYPE command block we switch off the use of cracking. The PHYSIC BOND command
in the last three EXECUT blocks indicates that the tendon fully sticks to the concrete beam
after applying dead weight and post-tensioning load. We run the structural nonlinear
analysis by importing a prepared command file SLS.dcf:
Import SLS analysis commands
PostTeFX.py
newAnalysis( "SLS" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "SLS", "SLS.dcf" )
runSolver( "SLS" )
6.5
Serviceability Limit State Results
To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file.
FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files

Post Model File
Add...
Add...
Open
Open
File name
File name
SLS.dpb
Open
SLS.dmb
Open
Import
First we open the FX+ database Beam.fdb. Then we import the Post-Neutral files: the
Post Model file SLS.dmb and the Post Result file SLS.dpb.
6.5.1
Prestress relaxation in the tendon
We will assess the relaxation of the prestress in the tendon. First we will show the stress
distribution at specific points in time. Then we make a time-graph for a specific point of
the tendon. We select some load cases that represent the situation of the model at four
specific points in time:
LC1 1
Application of post-tensioning and dead weight,

6.5 Serviceability Limit State Results
63
seven days of creep and shrinkage,

application of permanent load,
five years of creep and shrinkage.
LC1 8
LC2 9
LC1 22
FX+
Prestress relaxation in the tendon
Pre-Works
View
Results
View Point
Top
Structural Nonlinear Load Step 1 (1)

Sxx Table
Table
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
Table Copy Copy to Excel Work Sheet
Repeat for Time Step 8 (7)

Repeat for Load Step 9 (1)
Repeat for Time Step 22 (1832)
Then we select the stress XX in the tendon. We display the stress distribution as multiple
graphs along a line of elements that represent the reinforcement tendon [Fig. 6.16a].
(a) distribution at four points in time
(b) evolution in time for mid-point
Figure 6.16: Prestress relaxation in the tendon

Prestress relaxation in time
FX+
Post Extract Result...

Extract Result
Output Data
Analysis Set Structural Nonlinear
Ref. Step Time Step 2 (0.03)
Data Sxx
Step : Data Check all time steps
Element Result Extraction
User-Defined
Select reinforcement section at mid-point
Extraction position in Element
Node 1
Table Close
Table
Step Value Select all cells of column
Element Select all cells of column
Ctrl
64
Table
Copy Copy to Excel Work Sheet
We select all load cases that represent time steps. We make a time-graph for the element
at the mid-point of the tendon [Fig. 6.16b].
6.5.2
Stress Relaxation in the Beam
Another interesting phenomenon to represent with to the long-term behavior of prestressed concrete structures is relaxation of concrete.
FX+
Time evolution of the normal stress

Extract Result
Output Data
Ref. Step Time Step 10 (7.03)
Data Fiber11-SXX
Step : Data Check time step 10 to time step 22
User-Defined
Select beam element at mid-point
Extraction position in Element
Node 1
Table Close
Table
Element Select all cells of column
Ctrl
Repeat for Fiber12-SXX
We first select the last thirteen load cases corresponding to a five-year period of time after
the application of the permanent load and during which creep and shrinkage effects are
analyzed. Then we choose the normal stress XX in the beam. As locations for the results
to be shown we select the upper and lower fiber of the concrete beam. Note that the fibre
numbers correspond to the integration point numbers in the vertical direction [Fig. 6.15
p. 61]: fibres 11 and 12 represent the outer fibers of the beam. Finally we present the
time evolution of the stress for the middle element of the beam [Fig. 6.17].
Figure 6.17: Time evolution of the normal stress in the beam
6.6
Ultimate Limit State Analysis
We will now perform the Ultimate Limit State analysis including cracking modeling.
During this analysis the following sequence is analyzed after the preliminary analysis:
Application of a live load on one field: P1 = 25 kN/m, P2 = 10 kN/m,
6.6 Ultimate Limit State Analysis
65
Application of a live load on two fields: P1 = 25 kN/m, P2 = 25 kN/m,

Increase the live load until failure.
In the ULS analysis we will apply the two live loads P1 and P2 with two separate load
increments. We will then increase the live loads until failure of the beam. As output
results we will ask for the total displacements, the total stresses , the plastic strains, and
the crack strains.
ULS analysis commands
ULS.dcf
*NONLIN
:
Post-tensioning and dead weight
EXECUT
:
7 days of creep and shrinkage
BEGIN EXECUT
PHYSIC BOND
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.3E-1 0.7E-1 0.2 0.7 2.(3)
ITERAT MAXITE=20
END EXECUT
:
Permanent load
BEGIN EXECUT
PHYSIC BOND
LOAD LOADNR=2
ITERAT MAXITE=20
END EXECUT
:
Live load field 1
BEGIN EXECUT
PHYSIC BOND
LOAD LOADNR=3
ITERAT MAXITE=20
END EXECUT
:
Live load field 2
BEGIN EXECUT
PHYSIC BOND
LOAD LOADNR=4
ITERAT MAXITE=20
END EXECUT
:
Increase permanent load until
:
reinforcement yielding at support
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR=2
BEGIN STEPS
BEGIN ITERAT
ARCLEN
INISIZ 0.25
NSTEPS 100
END ITERAT
END STEPS
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
ENERGY CONTIN
FORCE OFF
END CONVER
LINESE
MAXITE=20
END ITERAT
PHYSIC BOND
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
FILE ULS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
66

STRESS TOTAL MOMENT
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
STRAIN CRACK GREEN
END OUTPUT
*END
With these commands we apply automatic adaptive load increments based on the number
of iterations in combination with Arc-length control. The initial size of the load step is
set to 0.25. With such parameter values, the number of steps could be set to 100. The
Line Search algorithm is applied within the equilibrium iteration and the convergence
criterion will be only energy-based. To perform the ULS analysis we return to the Mesh
Editor. We run a structural nonlinear analysis with a previously prepared command file
ULS.dcf.
Import ULS analysis commands
PostTeFX.py
newAnalysis( "ULS" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "ULS", "ULS.dcf" )
runSolver( "ULS" )
During the analysis Diana will store the results on Post-Neutral files for FX+. To assess
these results we return to FX+ and initiate the postprocessing.
FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files

Post Model File
Add...
Add...
Open
Open
File name
File name
ULS.dpb
Open
ULS.dmb
Open
Import
We open the FX+ database and import the Post-Neutral files. For the tendon we will
assess the plasticity [ 6.6.1] and the stress [ 6.6.2].
6.6.1
Plasticity in Tendon
We will assess the plastic strain in the Ultimate Limit State (ULS) and the development
of the maximum plastic strain during the nonlinear analysis.
FX+
Plastic strain at ULS
View View Point

Results
Top
Structural Nonlinear Load Step 41(6.21252)

Epxx Table
Table
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
Epxx Select corresponding cells
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Epxx
OK
In the Results Tree we select the last load step that reached convergence. We assume
that this step represents the ULS of the model. For the ULS we select the plastic strain
pxx in the tendon. In the pop-up menu we ask for a representation in tabular form. FX+
shows the table on a new tab in the Working Window. Via the pop-up menu of the table
we launch the Sorting Information dialog and perform some sorting operations. In the
67
sorted table we select all cells of column X related to 1.0000 L in column Position.
Finally we select the corresponding cells with the values of the plastic strain pxx . Via the
Graph View dialog we get the graph in a new tab of the Work Window [Fig. 6.18].
Figure 6.18: Plastic strain along the tendon at ULS

Development of maximum plastic strain
FX+
Work Window Beam:1

Extract Result
Output Data
Ref. Step Load Step 9 (1)
Data Epxx
Step : Data Check load step 9 to load step 41
Maximum
Table Close
Table
Maximum Select all cells of column
Ctrl
In the Work Window we activate the model display. Then we launch the Extract Result
dialog where we select load step 9 (load case 2). We extract the maximum values of the
plastic strain pxx in the tendon and put these in an output table and uses these values
to create a graph for the maximum plastic strain in the tendon as function of the load
factor [Fig. 6.19].
Figure 6.19: Maximum plastic strain in the tendon
6.6.2
Stress in Tendon
We will asses the stress in the tendon at three stages of the nonlinear analysis: for live
load 1, for live load 2, and at the ULS.
68

FX+
Stress for live load 1
Results

Sxx Table
Table
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
X (m) Select cells with Position 1.0000 L
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Sxx
OK
For load step 10, which represents live load 1, we select the stress xx in the reinforcement tendon. Similar to the plastic strain procedure we produce a graph of the stress
distribution [Fig. 6.20].
Figure 6.20: Stress along the tendon for live load 1

FX+
Stress for live load 2
Results

Sxx Table
Table
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Sxx
OK
For load step 11, which represents live load 2, we produce a graph of the distribution of
stress xx along the tendon [Fig. 6.21].
FX+
Stress at ULS
Results
Structural Nonlinear Load Step 41 (6.21252)

Sxx Table
69
Figure 6.21: Stress along the tendon for live load 2
Table
Sorting Dialog...
Sorting Information
Sort Key Columns
Priority
Asc|No
Down
Sort Close
Table
Table Show Graph...
Graph View
Y Label: Sxx
OK
We select the last load step that reached convergence, this presumably represents the
ULS. We produce a graph of the stress distribution [Fig. 6.22].
Figure 6.22: Stress along the tendon for the ULS
70
Chapter 7
Dynamic Relaxation
Name:
DynRel
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/DynRel
Keywords:
analys: dynami eigen nonlin physic transi.

constr: suppor.
elemen: bar cq16m pstres reinfo.
load: deform force node time.
materi: crack dampin elasti harden isotro linear plasti rotati soften strain
totstr viscou vonmis.
option: bfgs consta direct groups newmar secant units.
result: crack displa eigen extern force green reacti strain total values
veloci.
Figure 7.1: Reinforced concrete beam with loading and support plates
Sometimes it is difficult to get a converged solution for an equilibrium iteration process of
an analysis of a reinforced concrete structure. This is due to strong changes in the stress
development in the concrete as result of cracking. In such case, dynamic relaxation can
be added to the static model in order to stabilize the convergence process. This example
illustrates how dynamic relaxation may be used to stabilize a nonlinear static problem
and also some pitfalls are indicated. The principal of stabilization of a static analysis by
adding dynamic relaxation is that inertia and damping are used to control the abrupt
changes in stress development. When too much inertia and/or damping are added to the
model, the physical behavior will be affected and results will not be correct. In general,
such situation comes with very smooth equilibrium convergence, and crack patterns in
which cracks are smeared over several elements and do not show localization.
7.1
7.1.1
Model Definition
Mesh
The model in this example is a reinforced concrete beam with length of 4 m and height of
0.45 m, modeled with CQ16M elements. Because of symmetry only half of the beam is considered in the finite element model. A reinforcement bar with cross-section A = 622 mm2
is defined with a coverage of 30 mm from the bottom face of the concrete beam. Steel
72
Dynamic Relaxation
plates are applied at the locations where the vertical loads and supports are located. A
vertical displacement is prescribed as loading at the loading plate. The right hand side
of the mesh is a symmetry plane which is supported in horizontal direction. A vertical
support is defined at the center of the lower steel plate. The thickness of concrete and
plates is 0.2 m [Fig. 7.2].
Figure 7.2: Finite element mesh with supports and prescribed displacement
7.1.2
Material Properties
In this section we assume that a finite element model was prepared, consisting of a mesh as
shown in the previous section and two element groups named Concrete and Steel. After
importing the model in Mesh Editor we will define the material models for concrete
and steel using the Command console.
Import the model
DynRel.py
importModel( "DynRel.fxd" )
The material model for concrete is defined with a rotating total strain crack model, with
linear softening in the tensile regime.
Define concrete parameters
DynRel.py
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"Concrete",
"YOUNG", 2.8E+4 )
"POISON", 0.2 )
"TOTCRK", "ROTATE" )
"TENCRV", "LINEAR" )
"TENSTR", 2.5 )
"GF1", 0.1 )
For the steel plates and the reinforcement bar we employ a Von Mises plasticity model
without hardening.
Define steel parameters
7.1.3
"Steel",
"Steel",
"Steel",
"Steel",
DynRel.py
"YOUNG", 2.1E+5 )
"POISON", 0.0 )
"YIELD", "VMISES" )
"YLDVAL", 4.4E+2 )
Integration Scheme
Now we will adapt the integration scheme for the plane stress elements. Instead of accepting the default 2 2 integration scheme, we will apply a 3 3 integration scheme for
the CQ16M elements.
Adapt the integration scheme
DynRel.py
setElementDataParameter( "Concrete", "NINTEG", [ 3, 3 ] )

setElementDataParameter( "Plates", "NINTEG", [ 3, 3 ] )
7.2 Displacement Control Analysis
7.2
73
Displacement Control Analysis
7.2.1
Commands
In the first analysis we apply a prescribed displacement of 0.0015 m at node 490 in

10 increments. We apply 10 more load increments of 0 to be able to compare with the
dynamic relaxation analysis. Convergence norms of 0.00001 for displacement and force
are chosen, so that we can better follow and judge the convergence behavior for different
analysis settings. A secant iteration scheme is defined with a maximum of 20 iterations
per load step. The analysis will continue with the next step, when the convergence criteria
are not reached. As output we chose for FX+ output in order to display and check crack
patterns, and for tabulated output of applied forces and displacements at node 490 to
make load-displacement graphs.
Reference analysis
DynRel.dcf
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR=1
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.1(10) 0.(10)
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
METHOD SECANT
MAXITE=20
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=0.00001 CONTIN
FORCE TOLCON=0.00001 CONTIN
ENERGY OFF
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
FORCE REACTI TRANSL
FORCE EXTERN TRANSL
STRAIN CRACK GREEN
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT TABULA
SELECT NODES 490 /
LAYOUT COMBIN
DISPLA Y
FORCE REACTI Y
END OUTPUT
*END
7.2.2
Convergence Logging
When we run this analysis we get the following logging about the convergence behavior:
Convergence logging
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
1 TERMINATED, CONVERGENCE AFTER

0
0
0
3
7
6 TERMINATED, CONVERGENCE AFTER 12
DISPLACEMENT VARIATION = 6.338E-04
OUT OF BALANCE FORCE
= 1.235E-02
7 TERMINATED, NO CONVERGENCE AFTER
= 2.363E-02
DynRel.out
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
74
Dynamic Relaxation
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP

= 1.496E-02
= 8.209E-03
= 2.242E-05
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
In 5 load steps the convergence criterion is not reached within 20 iterations. For these
load steps the last variations of displacement and force are printed in the logging above.
For all steps the defined convergence criterion of 0.001 is reached or approached closely
for either relative displacement variation or relative out-of-balance force. Therefore we
assume that the calculated solution can be accepted as reference analysis for this example.
7.2.3
Results
Figure 7.3 shows the crack pattern at the last load step. A local crack with maximum
crack strain of 0.00194 is shown in the third column of elements for the right hand side.
Figure 7.3: Crack pattern at last load step for displacement control analysis
Figure 7.4 displays two graphs of results related to the loading node 490: The vertical
displacement as function of the step number [Fig. 7.4a], and the reaction force as function
of the vertical displacement [Fig. 7.4b].
(a) vertical displacement
(b) load-displacement
Figure 7.4: Displacement control results of node 490
7.3 Force Control Analysis
7.3
75
Force Control Analysis
7.3.1
Model Modifications
Next, we perform a similar analysis, but instead of displacement control [ 7.2], we apply
force control. The force control loading is less robust in case local softening occurs, such as
is the case in this model. In this situation it can be considered to activate the arc-length
control option, but this option will adapt the load-increments, which we do not want in
this example. As the maximum reaction force in the previous analysis is circa 27000 N,
we apply in this analysis a force of 28000 N in 10 steps, and keep that load level constant
at 10 following load steps. Thus we need to redefine Load case 1 (replace the deformation
load by a nodal load) and we also need to remove the support that was required for the
imposed displacement.
Replace the deformation load by a nodal load
DynRel.py
removeLoadCase( "Deformation" )
addLoadCase( "Force" )
addForceLoad( "Force", -28000.0, 2, [ 490 ] )
removeSupportSet( "L_Deformation" )
Note that we do not need to adapt to the analysis commands.
7.3.2
Convergence Logging
Convergence logging
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP

0
0
0
0
0
7
9
= 1.483E-03
= 2.428E-02
= 2.409E-01
= 3.755E-02
DISPLACEMENT VARIATION = 8.164E+00
= 2.289E-02
= 1.117E-01
= 5.474E-02
= 7.641E-02
= 5.333E-02
= 3.951E-02
= 8.143E-02
= 1.664E-01
= 1.022E-01
force.out
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
76
Dynamic Relaxation
In 13 of 20 load steps the convergence norm is not reached. In 11 load steps the relative
displacement variations and relative out-of-balance forces are far away from the default
norm of 0.001. Therefore these results may not be accepted as reliable. Note that in load
steps 11 to 20 in which a zero load increment is applied, the unbalance from the previous
steps can not be reduced by additional iterations.
7.3.3
Results
In Figure 7.5 the crack pattern at the last load step is displayed. Two local cracks with
maximum crack strainis of circa 0.004 are shown in the second and fourth columns of
elements for the right hand side. The crack pattern and crack strains are very different
from the analysis that was performed with displacement control [Fig. 7.3].
Figure 7.5: Crack pattern at last load step for force control analysis
of the vertical displacement [Fig. 7.6b]. The graphs show curves for both the displacement
and force control analysis. Remarkable and incorrect is that the vertical displacements
continue to increase in the load steps 11 to 20, when the applied force does no longer
increase for the force control analysis.
Figure 7.6: Force control results of node 490
7.4
7.4.1
Dynamic Relaxation Analysis

Model Modifications
We will use the physical density of concrete and steel as reference. In units of New3
ton and meter, N and m, these properties are respectively concr = 2500 kg/m and
3
steel = 7500 kg/m . In units of Newton and millimeter, N and mm, these proper3
ties have to be transformed to respectively concr = 2500 109 kg/mm and steel =
7.4 Dynamic Relaxation Analysis
77
7500 109 kg/mm .

To obtain identical wave speed velocities (c), natural frequencies () and time periods
(Tf ) in both the [N, m, s] and the [N, mm, s] unit system, the density properties in the
[N, mm, s] unit system have to be adjusted, because the force unit of a Newton (N) is
expressed in kgs2m which conflicts with the length unit in mm, see appendix. Which implicates that the mass unit is no longer kilogram (kg) but becomes metric ton (t).
Therefore, the density properties are now set to respectively concr = 25001012 t/mm3
and steel = 7500 1012 t/mm3 .
Add mass density properties
DynRel.py
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "DENSIT", 2500.0E-12 )

setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "DENSIT", 7500.0E-12 )
7.4.2
Eigenvalue Analysis
Next, we will calculate the first five eigenmodes of the model.

Eigenvlaue analysis
eigen.dcf
*EIGEN
EXECUT NMODES=5
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
END OUTPUT
*END
That analysis results in the following logging of eigenvalues in the output file:
Eigenvalues
eigen.out
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
FREQUENCY
0.51140E+02
0.38220E+03
0.40998E+03
0.85212E+03
0.10580E+04
EFF.MASS TX
0.34052E-06
0.18406E-01
0.37531E+00
0.67286E-03
0.22885E-04
PERCENTAGE
0.70088E-04
0.37884E+01
0.77248E+02
0.13849E+00
0.47103E-02
CUM.PERCENT.
0.70088E-04
0.37884E+01
0.81036E+02
0.81175E+02
0.81180E+02
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
FREQUENCY
0.51140E+02
0.38220E+03
0.40998E+03
0.85212E+03
0.10580E+04
EFF.MASS TY
0.33455E+00
0.27924E-01
0.12557E-02
0.10950E-01
0.96013E-01
PERCENTAGE
0.68859E+02
0.57475E+01
0.25846E+00
0.22538E+01
0.19762E+02
CUM.PERCENT.
0.68859E+02
0.74607E+02
0.74865E+02
0.77119E+02
0.96881E+02
The effective mass results show the energy for movements in X direction is dominated by
the third eigenmode, whereas the energy for movement in Y direction is dominated by
the first and fifth egenmode. The frequency range for these modes is from 51 to 1058 Hz.
Figure 7.7: Eigenmode 1 (51 Hz)
78
Dynamic Relaxation
7.4.3
79
The integration time step t and the rise time Td of the applied loading are derived from
the first fundamental mode, i.e. the mode which will give the highest participation in the
response. Results from the Eigenvalue analysis show that the first mode with a frequency
of f1 = 51.140 Hz can be denoted as the fundamental mode, because it has the highest
participation factor with respect to the load direction (Y ).
The load must be applied via a ramp input function with a rise time of Td . For minimizing
the oscillations about the static response, i.e. the dynamical effects should be negligible,
the rise time must be much longer than the time period of the first fundamental mode,
T1 , i.e. Td >> T1 . In that case there will be a little overshoot and the system will just
undergo small oscillations about the static response. The dynamic response amplitude
Rd depends only on the ratio TTd1 , the ratio of the rise time to the first natural time period
[Fig. 7.12]. The maximum response amplitude Rd with respect to the static response can
Response at n + 12 ratio(left) and n

ratio(right)
Response spectrum
Figure 7.12: Dependency of dynamic response amplitude Rd on ratio
Td
Tn
be expressed as
"
umax = ustat 1 +
sin(1 T2d )
1 T2d
#
= ustat Rd
(7.1)
with 1 = 2f1 = 2
T1 .
By taking Td = 9.5 T1 , the maximum overshoot is now in the order of
"
#
9.5T1
sin( 2
1
T1
2 )
umax = ustat 1 +
=
u
1
+
= ustat 1.033506 (7.2)
stat
2 9.5T1
30
T
2
1
1
The rise time of the applied load is now set to Td = 10T1 = 5 51.140
0.2s. and it may
now be assumed that the inertial effects in the response are negligible. The integration
time-step t may be chosen arbitrarily, but for reason of accuracy the time step must be
significant smaller then Td : t 0.20 Td .
Due to expected nonlinear behavior, cracking in the concrete and yielding in the reinforcement, it is recommended to apply the total load in at least 10 increments, so the
time step is now set to t = T10d = 0.02 s.
For the transition of the dynamic response into a quasi-static response, Rayleigh damping
proportional with the stiffness is applied. The Rayleigh damping coefficient must now be
derived from the algorithmic counterpart of the natural frequency 1 , denoted as the
pseudo natural frequency
; this pseudo natural frequency is defined by the integration
time step size:
2
2
=
=
= 314.160 rad/s.
(7.3)
t
2 102
The damping coefficient b is determined so that the mode associated with the pseudo
natural frequency
is damped with a damping ratio in the range 0.01 0.1. The
relaxation time, in which the dynamic response is transformed into a quasi-static response
is strongly dependent on the size of the damping ratio. When a relative high damping
80
Dynamic Relaxation
ratio is used, the obtained response may stay behind the rise time Td of the applied load
and the necessary relaxation time must be much be larger than the rise time of the load,
say 2 4 Td . In this example a damping ratio = 0.03 is chosen with a relaxation
time equal to Td = 0.2 s. From the Rayleigh damping definition, C = a M + b K,
the damping coefficient b is calculated as:
b =
2
2 0.03
=
= 0.000191 0.2 103
314.160
(7.4)
We add this property to the material parameters of the concrete and steel.
Add Rayleigh damping parameters
DynRel.py
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "RAYLEI", [ 0.0, 0.0002 ] )

setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "RAYLEI", [ 0.0, 0.0002 ] )
7.4.3.1
Linear Dynamic Analysis
To check if a correct quasi-static response can be found, both a linear static analysis and a
linear dynamic analysis is executed. The vertical load of 28000 N is incrementally applied
in 10 equal time steps of t = T10d = 0.02 s. Next the load is kept constant during a
time period of 3 Td s by using the same time step t = 0.02 s and this time period is
indicated as the relaxation phase. During the relaxation phase, the dynamic oscillations
are damped out and the dynamic response is transformed into a quasi-static solution.
First a linear static analysis is performed.
Linear static analysis
lindyn.dcf
*NONLIN
TYPE PHYSIC OFF
BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.02(40)
BEGIN ITERAT
MAXITE=0
METHOD CONSTA
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT TABULA FILE="linsta"
SELECT NODES 490 /
LAYOUT COMBIN
DISPLA Y
FORCE EXTERN Y
END OUTPUT
Next a linear transient analysis is performed. For the time integration, the default
Newmark- method is used and Rayleigh damping is applied.
Linear transient dynamic analysis
lindyn.dcf
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
PHYSIC OFF
BEGIN TRANSI
METHOD NEWMAR
DYNAMI DAMPIN CONSIS
END TRANSI
END TYPE
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN ITERAT
MAXITE=0
METHOD CONSTA
END ITERAT
81
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT TABULA FILE="lindyn"
SELECT NODES 490 /
LAYOUT COMBIN
DISPLA Y
FORCE EXTERN Y
VELOCI Y
END OUTPUT
displacement as function of the time history of the applied load [Fig. 7.13a], and the
applied load as function of the vertical displacement [Fig. 7.13b].
Figure 7.13: Linear dynamic relaxation results of node 490
7.4.3.2
Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis
Next a dynamic analysis with nonlinear material behavior is executed. In accordance

with the linear dynamic analysis, the load is incrementally applied in 10 equal time steps
of t = 0.02 s and in the following time period of 1 Td = 0.2 s, the relaxation phase,
the load is kept constant and the same time step t = 0.02 s is used.
Nonlinear transient dynamic analysis
dynami.dcf
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
BEGIN TRANSI
METHOD NEWMAR
END TRANSI
END TYPE
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN ITERAT
METHOD SECANT
MAXITE=20
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=0.00001 CONTIN
FORCE TOLCON=0.00001 CONTIN
ENERGY OFF
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
FORCE REACTI TRANSL
FORCE EXTERN TRANSL
STRAIN CRACK GREEN
82
Dynamic Relaxation
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT TABULA
SELECT NODES 490 /
LAYOUT COMBIN
DISPLA Y
FORCE EXTERN Y
VELOCIO Y
END OUTPUT
*END
7.4.4
Convergence Logging
Convergence logging
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
STEP

= 2.963E-12
0
= 1.833E-12
0
= 8.100E-13
0
= 9.205E-13
0
= 6.568E-13
0
= 1.202E-05
5
= 3.521E-05
8
= 8.772E-05
= 1.373E-03
= 2.545E-02
= 1.481E-02
= 4.315E-04
= 5.712E-04
= 2.876E-04
= 2.927E-05
= 7.794E-05
= 1.437E-05
= 7.050E-06
= 2.019E-05
= 1.069E-05
dynami.out
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
CHECK =
CHECK =
20 ITERATIONS
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
In nearly all steps the requested convergence criteria are not satisfied, but the relative
variations are smaller than the default criteria of 0.001. Only at the end of the loading
phase and at the begin of the relaxation phase the convergence criteria are beyond the
defaults. Therefore the results may be acceptable.
7.4.5
83
Results
In Figure 7.14 the crack pattern at the last step is displayed. One local crack with
maximum crack strain of circa 0.00276 is shown in the third column of elements for the
right hand side. The crack pattern and crack strains are similar as for the reference
analysis with displacement control Figure 7.3.
Figure 7.14: Crack pattern at last step for dynamic relaxation analysis
of the vertical displacement [Fig. 7.15b]. The graphs show curves for all analyses.
Figure 7.15: Dynamic relaxation results of node 490
7.4.6
Appendix
The natural frequencies of a one-dimensional bar are examined in two different unit
systems.
7.4.6.1
E
Units in N, m and s
=
=
=
2.125 1010
2500
1.875
in N/m2
in kg/m3
in m
Longitudinal wave speed cl in m/s:

q
q
E N/m2
E kg m s2 /m2
=
cl =
kg/m3
kg/m3
q
=
E m2
s2
2.1251010
2500.
m/s
3 103 m/s
(7.5)
Natural frequency l in rad/s:

q
c
2 L
q
(m/s)
L (m)
2 qL
2.1251010
2500.
1.875
(7.6)
=
1600 rad/s
84
Dynamic Relaxation
7.4.6.2
E
Units in N, mm and s
=
=
=
2.125 104
2500 109
1875.
in N/mm2
in kg/mm3
in mm
Longitudinal wave speed cl in mm/s:

q
q
E N/mm2
E kg m s2 /mm2
cl =
=
3
kg/mm
kg/mm3
q
=
q
=
E kg (1000 mm) s2 /mm2

kg/mm3
E
mm2
103
s2
q 10
mm/s
2.125104
(2500109 )103
= 3 106 mm/s
(7.7)
Natural frequency l in rad/s:

q
7.4.6.3
c
2 L
E
103
(mm/s)
L (mm)
103
2 r L
2.125104
(2500109 )103
1875
1600 rad/s
(7.8)
Resulting frequency of one-dimensional bar.
By adjusting the density in the [N, mm, s] unit system by a factor of 103 , correct natural
frequencies are now found with respect to the SI [N, m, s] unit system.
l
The first longitudinal frequency is fl = 2
= /21600
= 400 Hz
2
Chapter 8
Pedestrian Excitation on a
Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge
Name:
pedbrid
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/pedbrid
Keywords:
analys: dynami nonlin transi.

class: large.
constr: suppor.
elemen: beam box class1 l12be l2tru sp1tr sp2tr spring truss ushape.
load: force node time weight.
materi: dampin elasti isotro spring unload viscou.
option: direct groups hilber newton regula units.
result: accele total.
This example illustrates simulation of pedestrian walking loads on the steel cable stayed
footbridge and performance of a transient dynamic analysis. The model is based on an
experiment described by Hartley et al. [8]. A three-dimensional model with a height of
20 m (Z direction), a width of 4 m (Y direction) and a span of 35 m (X direction) will
be analyzed [Fig. 8.1]. The bridge is made of steel. The pedestrian walking loads will be
applied on the deck along the walking path [Fig. 8.4].
86
Pedestrian Excitation on a Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge
Figure 8.1: Elevation and plan of footbridge
8.1 Model
8.1
87
Model
Two-node three-dimensional class-I beam elements (L12BE) are used in the model. The
[N, m] unit system is chosen for this example.
8.1.1
Boundary Conditions
The deck is supported by vertical springs at each end and on the edge beam between the
tower legs [Fig. 8.1]. The values of the spring stiffness are based on the experimental data
and given in Table 8.1. The tower ends are restrained against motions in every direction
[Fig. 8.1].
Table 8.1: Spring stiffness values
Location
Front left corner
Front right corner
Back left corner
Back right corner
Edge beam
8.1.2
Value
2 108
3 108
9.5 107
1 109
3.3 104
Unit
N/m
N/m
N/m
N/m
N/m
Sectional Properties
The section dimensions of the tower, deck, and cable, as displayed in Figure 8.1, are given
in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2: Section dimensions of tower, deck and cable
Section
Tower/End transverse beam
Cable
Longitudinal beam
Transverse beam
Edge beam
Shape
Square hollow
Circular
Rolled steel channel
Rolled steel channel
Rectangular hollow
Dimension
300 300 16
28
127 64 14.9
178 89 26.81
450 250 16
Unit
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
88

The sectional properties entered through FX+ are recorded in a data file as follows:
Data file
GEOMET
1 NAME
BOX
ECCENT
ZAXIS
2 NAME
USHAPE
ECCENT
ZAXIS
3 NAME
USHAPE
ECCENT
ZAXIS
4 NAME
BOX
ECCENT
ZAXIS
5 NAME
USHAPE
ECCENT
ZAXIS
6 NAME
BOX
ECCENT
ZAXIS
7 NAME
BOX
ECCENT
ZAXIS
8 NAME
CROSSE
8.1.3
eigen.dat
"RHS_450x250x167"
2.50000E-001 4.50000E-001 1.60000E-002
1.60000E-002 1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000
"C_127x64x14.9"
6.35000E-002 1.27000E-001 6.40000E-003
9.50000E-003
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000
"C_127x64x14.9"
6.35000E-002 1.27000E-001 6.40000E-003
9.50000E-003
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 -1.00000E+000
"SHS_300x300x142"
3.00000E-001 3.00000E-001 1.60000E-002
1.60000E-002 1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000
"C_178x89x26.81"
8.89000E-002 1.77800E-001 7.60000E-003
1.26000E-002
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000
"SHS_300x300x142"
3.00000E-001 3.00000E-001 1.60000E-002
1.60000E-002 1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
-9.86421E-001 0.00000E+000 1.64239E-001
"SHS_300x300x142"
3.00000E-001 3.00000E-001 1.60000E-002
1.60000E-002 1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
9.86421E-001 0.00000E+000 1.64239E-001
"Steel_cable_(28mm_D)"
6.16000E-004
1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000
9.50000E-003
0.00000E+000
9.50000E-003
0.00000E+000
1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000
1.26000E-002
0.00000E+000
1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000
1.60000E-002
0.00000E+000
Material Properties
The material properties of the tower, deck, and cable are given in Table 8.3.
The material properties of the tower, deck, and cable entered through FX+ are recorded
in a data file:
Data file
eigen.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"43A"
YOUNG
2.05000E+011
POISON 3.00000E-001
8.2 Preliminary Eigenvalue Analysis
89
Table 8.3: Material properties of tower, deck and cable

Parameters
Elastic modulus
Poissons ratio
Mass density
Tower, Deck
2.05 1011
0.3
7850
Cable
1.9995 1011
0.3
7861
Unit
N/m2
kg/m3
DENSIT 7.85000E+003
2 NAME
"A416-270(Low)"
YOUNG
1.99950E+011
POISON 3.00000E-001
DENSIT 7.86100E+003
8.1.4
Loading
Self weight of the bridge is applied for both the preliminary eigenvalue analysis and the
transient dynamic analysis. The loading entered through FX+ is written in the data file
as follows:
Data file
eigen.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
WEIGHT
8.2
Preliminary Eigenvalue Analysis
First of all, a preliminary eigenvalue analysis is performed to check the frequencies of

the structure and the location of the maximum displacement. To include five vertical
eigenmodes as described for the experiment, we need to calculate 16 eigenmodes. The
analysis settings are recorded in a command file, which looks like the following:
Command file
eigen.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*EIGEN
BEGIN EXECUT
NMODES 16
TOLERA = 1.E-4
END EXECUT
TYPE FREEVI STRESS
OUTPUT FXPLUS
*END
8.3
Results of Preliminary Eigenvalue Analysis
The results of preliminary eigenvalue analysis are checked to be used for calcultion of
the Rayleigh damping parameters and the pacing rate of the pedestrian in the transient
dynamic analysis.
90
8.3.1
Eigenfrequencies
To simulate the pedestrian excitation which is applied in the transient dynamic analysis,
we need to determine the pacing rate of the pedestrian as calculated in Equation [Eq. (8.1)
p. 91]. The pacing rate of the pedestrian is determined from the eigenfrequency of the
first vertical mode, i.e. mode 3 with an eigenfrequency of 4.11 cycles per second (Hz),
which can be checked from the standard output file.
eigen.out
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FREQUENCY
0.10408E+01
0.24422E+01
0.41127E+01
0.47911E+01
0.53349E+01
0.56192E+01
0.72951E+01
0.80047E+01
0.90442E+01
0.99172E+01
0.11212E+02
0.12076E+02
0.14154E+02
0.14983E+02
0.16438E+02
0.16887E+02
EFF.MASS TZ
0.27767E-06
0.33027E-04
0.14297E+04
0.48525E-03
0.73742E-04
0.65027E+04
0.62961E-04
0.51497E-01
0.61647E+03
0.83143E-02
0.17935E+03
0.46253E-04
0.20752E-04
0.26606E-01
0.13596E+00
0.26347E+03
PERCENTAGE
0.70621E-09
0.84000E-07
0.36362E+01
0.12342E-05
0.18755E-06
0.16539E+02
0.16013E-06
0.13097E-03
0.15679E+01
0.21146E-04
0.45615E+00
0.11764E-06
0.52779E-07
0.67668E-04
0.34581E-03
0.67011E+00
CUM.PERCENT.
0.70621E-09
0.84706E-07
0.36362E+01
0.36362E+01
0.36362E+01
0.20175E+02
0.20175E+02
0.20175E+02
0.21743E+02
0.21743E+02
0.22199E+02
0.22199E+02
0.22199E+02
0.22199E+02
0.22199E+02
0.22870E+02
To perform the transient dynamic analysis, it is necessary to apply Rayleigh damping.

Rayleigh damping coefficients, and are determined using eigenfrequencies. We see
that the lowest frequency is 1.04 Hz and the highest frequency is 16.89 Hz.
8.3.2
Eigenmodes
Figure 8.2 shows the first five vertical modes of the footbridge.
2) 5.62 Hz
1) 4.11 Hz
4) 11.21 Hz
3) 9.04 Hz
5) 16.89 Hz
Figure 8.2: Eigenmodes
8.4 Model Completion
8.3.3
91
Maximum Vertical Displacement Location
Figure 8.3 shows that node 107 has the largest displacement for the first vertical eigenmode. This node will be used to plot an acceleration-time diagram after performing the
transient dynamic analysis.
Figure 8.3: Maximum vertical displacement at node 107
8.4
Model Completion
Based on the results of the preliminary eigenvalue analysis, we will add the Rayleigh
damping parameters to the material properties and add time dependent loading to perform the transient dynamic analysis.
8.4.1
Loading
In addition to the self weight of the bridge, the pedestrian walking loads, expressed as
sinusoidal functions based on the commonly used Equation (8.1), are applied on the deck
[Fig. 8.4]. In this example, the pacing rate of the pedestrian is set to 2.06 Hz, which is
half of the first vertical mode of the structure.
F (t) = G2 sin(4fp t
)
2
(8.1)
Where F (t) represents the walking load at time; G is the static weight of the pedestrian
which equals 802 N; fp is the pacing rate which is 2.06 Hz; 2 is the dynamic load factor,
which equals 0.1 as described for the experiment.
One cycle of the sine function is computed at 17 points as in Table 8.4 which gives a
reasonably smooth curve as shown in Figure 8.5. The second cycle of the pedestrian
walking load is applied immediately after the first cycle ends [Table 8.5]. Likewise the
remaining 68 cycles are computed.
92
Figure 8.4: Pedestrian walking loads
Table 8.4: First cycle of the pedestrian walking load

Time [s]
0
0.01519694
0.03039388
0.045590821
0.060787761
0.075984701
0.091181641
0.106378581
0.121575522
0.136772462
0.151969402
0.167166342
0.182363282
0.197560222
0.212757163
0.227954103
0.243151043
Loading force [N]

-80.2
-74.09513851
-56.70996385
-30.69121127
1.86572E-09
30.69121128
56.70996385
74.09513851
80.2
74.09513851
56.70996385
30.69121127
-5.59718E-09
-30.69121128
-56.70996386
-74.09513851
-80.2
93
Table 8.5: Second cycle of the pedestrian walking load

Time [s]
0.243151043
0.258347983
0.273544923
0.288741864
0.303938804
0.319135744
0.334332684
0.349529624
0.364726565
0.379923505
0.395120445
0.410317385
0.425514325
0.440711265
0.455908206
0.471105146
0.486302086
Loading force [N]

-80.2
-74.09513851
-56.70996385
-30.69121127
1.86572E-09
30.69121128
56.70996385
74.09513851
80.2
74.09513851
56.70996385
30.69121127
-5.59718E-09
-30.69121128
-56.70996386
-74.09513851
-80.2
Figure 8.5: First cycle of walking load expressed as sinusoidal function
94

The pedestrian walking loads are sequentially applied to 70 nodes (node 57 to 126), which
are the nodes located along the centerline of the deck [Fig. 8.4], in the negative Z direction
as unit loads. The pedestrian loading entered through FX+ is written in the data file as
follows:
Data file
LOADS
CASE 1
WEIGHT
CASE 2
NODAL
57
FORCE
CASE 3
NODAL
58
FORCE
CASE 4
NODAL
59
FORCE
CASE 5
NODAL
60
FORCE
CASE 6
NODAL
61
FORCE
transi.dat
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
...
CASE 67
NODAL
122 FORCE
CASE 68
NODAL
123 FORCE
CASE 69
NODAL
124 FORCE
CASE 70
NODAL
125 FORCE
CASE 71
NODAL
126 FORCE
95
The time functions entered through FX+ for these load cases are written in table TIMELO:
Data file
TIMELO
LOAD 2
TIMES
0.00000E+000
6.07878E-002
1.21576E-001
1.82363E-001
2.43151E-001
FACTOR -8.02000E+001
1.86572E-009
8.02000E+001
-5.59718E-009
-8.02000E+001
LOAD 3
TIMES
2.43151E-001
3.03939E-001
3.64727E-001
4.25514E-001
4.86302E-001
FACTOR -8.02000E+001
1.86572E-009
8.02000E+001
-5.59718E-009
-8.02000E+001
transi.dat
1.51969E-002 3.03939E-002 4.55908E-002

7.59847E-002 9.11816E-002 1.06379E-001
1.36772E-001 1.51969E-001 1.67166E-001
1.97560E-001 2.12757E-001 2.27954E-001
/
-7.40951E+001 -5.67100E+001 -3.06912E+001
3.06912E+001 5.67100E+001 7.40951E+001
7.40951E+001 5.67100E+001 3.06912E+001
-3.06912E+001 -5.67100E+001 -7.40951E+001
/
2.58348E-001 2.73545E-001 2.88742E-001
3.19136E-001 3.34333E-001 3.49530E-001
3.79924E-001 3.95120E-001 4.10317E-001
4.40711E-001 4.55908E-001 4.71105E-001
/
-7.40951E+001 -5.67100E+001 -3.06912E+001
3.06912E+001 5.67100E+001 7.40951E+001
7.40951E+001 5.67100E+001 3.06912E+001
-3.06912E+001 -5.67100E+001 -7.40951E+001
/
...
LOAD 71
TIMES
1.67774E+001 1.67926E+001 1.68078E+001 1.68230E+001
1.68382E+001 1.68534E+001 1.68686E+001 1.68838E+001
1.68990E+001 1.69142E+001 1.69294E+001 1.69446E+001
1.69598E+001 1.69750E+001 1.69902E+001 1.70054E+001
1.70206E+001 /
FACTOR -8.02000E+001 -7.40951E+001 -5.67100E+001 -3.06912E+001
1.86572E-009 3.06912E+001 5.67100E+001 7.40951E+001
8.02000E+001 7.40951E+001 5.67100E+001 3.06912E+001
-5.59718E-009 -3.06912E+001 -5.67100E+001 -7.40951E+001
-8.02000E+001 /
8.4.2
Material Properties
The Rayleigh damping coefficients and as displayed in Table 8.6 are calculated from
Equation (8.2).
= 21 2 (1 2 2 1 ) / 22 12
(8.2)
= 2 (2 2 1 1 ) / 22 12
Where 1 = 2f1 and 2 = 2f2 . For the first two vertical eigenmodes we want at
most 5% damping. For the loading frequency (2.06 Hz) [ 8.4.1 p. 91], we want to have
the smallest amount of damping possible. Therefore, the following settings are chosen
to calculate the Rayleigh damping parameters: f1 = 1.04 Hz and 1 = 0.015, i.e. 1.5%
damping for the first calculated eigenmode; f2 = 5.62 Hz and 2 = 0.05, i.e. 5% damping
for the second vertical eigenmode.
To add Rayleigh damping parameters, launch the Mesh Editor from FX+, which brings
you in the Mesh Editor of Diana.
Analysis
FX+
96
Table 8.6: Extended material properties of tower, deck and cable

Parameters
Elastic modulus
Poissons ratio
Mass density
Rayleigh damping
Rayleigh damping
Tower, Deck
2.05 1011
0.3
7850
0.077741
0.00277
Cable
1.9995 1011
0.3
7861
0.077741
0.00277
Unit
N/m2
kg/m3
-
Add Rayleigh damping
transi.py
setMaterialParameter( "43A", "RAYLEI", [ "7.77410E-002", "2.77000E-003" ] )

setMaterialParameter( "A416-270(Low)", "RAYLEI", [ "7.77410E-002",
"2.77000E-003" ] )
The material properties updated in a data file look like the following:
Data file
transi.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"43A"
YOUNG
2.05000E+011
POISON 3.00000E-001
DENSIT 7.85000E+003
RAYLEI 7.77410E-002 2.77000E-003
2 NAME
"A416-270(Low)"
YOUNG
1.99950E+011
POISON 3.00000E-001
DENSIT 7.86100E+003
RAYLEI 7.77410E-002 2.77000E-003
8.5
Before performing the transient dynamic analysis we need to determine the step size.
Preferably 20 time steps must be applied in the small period Ti of the highest mode.
t
1
Ti
20
(8.3)
A step size of 0.001 s is chosen, which is less than the maximum step size of 1/20 T16 =
0.003 s for the highest calculated eigenmode. After 17.0206 s the pedestrian has walked
from left to right over the bridge. Therefore, the analysis is carried out up to 18 sec, which
requires 18000 time steps of 0.001 s. HilberHughesTaylor is chosen as time integration
method, which makes it possible to introduce numerical dissipation without degrading the
order of accuracy. Before the time steps representing the walking pedestrian are executed,
self weight load is applied and the resulting strains and displacements are suppressed. As
there is no physical nonlinearity, PHYSIC OFF is specified. The accelerations for all nodes
at each 10th time step are written to the FX+ output file. The analysis settings are
recorded in a command file:
Command file
transi.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
PHYSIC OFF
BEGIN TRANSI
8.6 Results of Transient Dynamic Analysis
97
DYNAMI DAMPIN
METHOD HHT
END TRANSI
END TYPE
: Application of self weight load
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
INITIA STRESS CALCUL
END START
PHYSIC SUPPRE STRAIN
END EXECUT
: Application of pedestrian walking loads
EXECUT TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.001(18000)
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
SELECT STEPS 10-18000(10) /
ACCELE TOTAL TRANSL GLOBAL
END OUTPUT
*END
8.6
Results of Transient Dynamic Analysis
The result is obtained in terms of accelerations. We will plot the acceleration time history
graph [Fig. 8.7] for the node showing the largest vertical displacement for the first vertical
eigenmode, which is node 107 [Fig. 8.3]. In FX+ the Extract Result option of the Post menu
can be used [Fig. 8.6].
Figure 8.6: Extract result option

From Figure 8.7 we see one response cycle of the result is 0.24 s, which is the same as the
period of the first vertical eigenmode [ 8.3.1 p. 90]:
T =
1
1
=
= 0.24 s
f
4.11
(8.4)
Note that the envelope of the accelerations corresponds to the first vertical eigenmode in
Figure 8.8.
98
Figure 8.7: Acceleration time history for walking pedestrian
Figure 8.8: First vertical eigenmode in acceleration time history
Chapter 9
Construction of a Tunnel
Section
Name:
TunnelPh
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/TunnelPh
Keywords:
analys: nonlin phase physic.

constr: suppor.
elemen: beam cl18b class3 cq40s cq48i curved interf pipe shell struct.
materi: elasti isotro nonlin.
option: direct groups newton regula units.
result: displa moment stress total tracti.
0.50
1.50
stay
4.75
0.40
0.40
4
0.75
5
6
0.75
9.20
0.75
(a) cross-section
initial
end
(b) ground and

water levels
Figure 9.1: Tunnel section [m]

In this example we will analyze the influence of the construction history on a concrete
tunnel section with a length of 24 meters. The overall dimensions of the cross-section are
11.56.0 m [Fig. 9.1a].
Material properties. The tunnel is constructed of concrete with a Youngs modulus
E = 10000 N/mm2 , a Poissons ratio = 0.15, and a mass density = 2400 kg/m3 .
During the construction stays are placed every 6 meters at 1.5 meter below the top of
the walls. The stays are steel pipes with a diameter of 500 mm and a wall thickness
of 10 mm. These pipes have a Youngs modulus E = 210000 N/mm2 , a Poissons ratio
= 0.3, and a mass density = 7850 kg/m3 . The model is supported on a bedding of
sand with a normal stiffness of 40000 kN/m3 . For the bedding we specify a linear normal
stiffness Dn = 4107 and a tangential stiffness Dt = 1107 . For the nonlinear interface
behavior a bi-linear diagram for the forcedisplacement relation in the normal direction,
100
Construction of a Tunnel Section

with a normal stiffness under pressure and a very low stiffness under tension [Fig. 9.2], is
assumed. We do not specify nonlinear interface behavior for the shear direction, Diana
will consider this as linear.
Pressure [N/m2 ]
1010
closure
opening
0
2
4
1000
500
500
1000
Displacement [m]
Figure 9.2: Stressdisplacement relation in normal direction for the bedding
q0
q1
0
1
q4
q1
q2
q4
q2
4
5
q3
q3
q5
q5
q6
q6
(a) initial
(b) end
Figure 9.3: Loading schemes
Loading. The ground and water levels vary during the construction [Fig. 9.1b]. This
leads to different loading on the structure in the initial phase and in the end-stage [Fig. 9.3]
[Table 9.1].
Table 9.1: Loading levels
Load
q0
q1
q2
q3
q4
q5
q6
9.1
Stage
initial end
0.0
15.0
3.3
5.0
12.2
19.8
45.5
66.4
44.5
72.5
7.5
7.5
25.0
35.0
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
For the modeling session we start a new model.
101
FX+
Initiate new model
File
New
the model is going to be defined. For this example we choose [N,m].
Symmetry. The tunnel part is equally loaded on both sides and is symmetric in longitudinal direction. Therefore we will model only a quarter of the model. We will model the
tunnel section with curved shell elements. These elements do not have a stress component
in the thickness direction but can handle bending and shear. Because of this, we only
have to model the mid-planes of the walls, the roof and the floor.
9.1.1

FX+
Materials
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
Structural
Elastic Modulus: 10E9
Poissons Ratio: 0.15
Mass Density: 2400
Elastic
Apply
Interface
ID: 2
Name: Bedding
Interface Nonlinearities
Structural
Nonlinear Elastic
Normal Stiffness Modulus (Kn):4e7

Shear Stiffness Modulus (Kt):1e7
g Nonlinear Parameters
Multilinear Function (Normal) ...

Create/Modify Function
Name: Bedding
1 Relative Displacement:
-1000. Value: -4e10

1.e-6 Value: 40
1000. Value: 41
OK
Multilinear Function (Normal)Bedding
Apply
Isotropic
ID: 3
Name: Steel
Structural
Poissons Ratio: 0.3
Mass Density: 7850
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
FX+
Concrete thickness
Property Manager
Create
2D...

Curved Shell
ID: 1
Name: Floor
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Floor
Flat
Regular
102

Material 1: Concrete
Thickness: 0.75
Apply
Curved Shell
ID: 2
Name: Wall
Data ID: 2 Data Name: Wall
Flat
Regular
Thickness: 0.40
Apply
Curved Shell
ID: 3
Name: Roof
Data ID: 3 Data Name: Roof
Flat
Regular
Thickness: 0.50
OK
FX+
Interfaces
Property Manager
Create
Interface...

Surface Interface ID: 4
Name: Bedding
Data ID: 4 Data Name: Bedding

Material 2: Bedding
Orientation 1st Tangent Dir. (X,Y,Z) 0,1,0
OK
FX+
Stays
Property Manager
Create
1D...

Beam
ID: 5
Name: Stay
Data ID: 5 Data Name: Stay
Class III
3D
Material 3: Steel
Section Template...
Section Library
Pipe
D: 0.5
tw: 0.01
OK
OK
FX+
Floor (dummy)
Property Manager
Create
3D...

Solid
ID: 6
Name: Dummy
Data ID: 6 Data Name: Dummy
Regular
OK
Property Manager
9.1.2
Close
Geometry
Due to symmetry we only have to model one quarter of the tunnel.
103
FX+
Grid and view

Geometry Workplane
Rectangular Grid
Grid Setting...
Origin: 0,0
Display
Line
Uniform
Grid
Grid
Size: 1 Number: 12
All
Location
OK
View
View Point
Isometric 1
We set a grid with twelve intervals of 1 m in all four quadrants. We also initiate an
isometric view of the coordinate space.
FX+
Roof
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location: 0,0
Location: 4.8,12
FX+
Wall
Geometry Work Plane
Move Work Plane
Move...
Ref. Plane
Select Reference Face

Offset: 0
Select Y Z-plane
OK
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location: 0,0
Location: 12,-5.375
FX+
Floor
Geometry Work Plane
Move Work Plane
Move...
Ref. Plane

Offset: -5.375
Select XY -plane
OK
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location: 0,0
Location: 4.8,12
Apply
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Location: 0,0
Location: -0.95,12
104

FX+
Stays
Geometry Work Plane
Move Work Plane
Move...
Ref. Plane
Select XY -plane

Offset: -1,5
OK
Geometry
Line
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Line...
Location: 0,3
Location: 4.8,0
Geometry
Translate
Transform
Translate...
Direction & Distance
Select Object Shape(s) Select stay

Select Direction
Select global Y -axis
Direction
Uniform
Copy
Distance: 6
Number of Times
OK
FX+
Display
View Zoom Window All

Work Window Hide Datum & WP
Pre-Works
Datum Select XYZ-axes Show
Geometry Curve Hide All
Geometry Surface Rectangle (1st)
Color... Colors
Surface Rectangle (1st)
Transparency... Transparency Level
Surface Rectangle (2nd)
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry Curve
red
OK
blue
Surface Rectangle (3rd)
Color... Colors green
Surface Rectangle (4th)
Color... Colors yellow
Surface Select 4 rectangles Color... Colors light gray
Surface Rectangle (1st)
Hide
Color... Colors
Show All
We display the faces with various colors [Fig. 9.4a]. Note that we make the roof semitransparent so that the hidden part of the wall is dimly visible. In a separate view we
display the stays in blue against the wall and floor in gray [Fig. 9.4b].
(a) faces
(b) stays
Figure 9.4: Defined geometry
9.1.3
105
Meshing
Prior to the actual meshing procedure we define some mesh sets. and prepare the geometry
display. Then we will successively mesh the faces of the tunnel, the stays and the bedding.
FX+
Mesh sets
Mesh Mesh Set Create...
Create Empty Mesh Set
Mesh Set
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Roof
Wall
Floor
Floor inside
Floor outside
Stays
Bedding
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Floor
Floor
Mesh
Mesh
Set
Set
Set
Apply
Apply
Apply
Apply
Apply
Set
Set
Apply
OK
FX+
Display preparation
Pre-Works
Geometry
Show All
We display the complete geometry so that we can select each individual part for the
meshing procedure [Fig. 9.5].
Figure 9.5: Geometry display for meshing

FX+
Faces
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Face
Face...
Select Face(s) Select roof

Element Size: 0.5
Mesh Size
Property
3: Roof
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
Mesh Set
Type
Quadrilateral
Into Existing Mesh Set

Add to Roof
OK
Apply
Select Face(s) Select wall

Element Size: 0.5
Mesh Size
Property
2: Wall
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
106

Loop Mesher
Mesh Set
Type
Quadrilateral
Into
Existing Mesh Set

Add to Wall
OK
Apply
Select Face(s) Select inside floor

Element Size: 0.5
Mesh Size
Property
1: Floor
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
Mesh Set
Type
Quadrilateral
Into
Existing Mesh Set

Add to Floor inside
OK
Apply
Select Face(s) Select floor outside

Element Size: 0.5
Mesh Size
Property
1: Floor
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
Mesh Set
Type
Quadrilateral
Into
Existing Mesh Set

Add to Floor outside
OK
OK
For all faces we apply the Loop Mesher and choose for quadrilateral elements with a size
of 0.5 m. First we mesh the face of the roof [Fig. 9.6a]. Then we successively mesh the
wall and the two faces of the floor [Fig. 9.6b].
(a) roof meshed
(b) all faces meshed
Figure 9.6: Meshing the faces

FX+
Stays
Pre-Works
Mesh
Mesh Auto Mesh

Auto-Mesh Edge
Select Edges(s)
Seeding Method
Select two stays
Property
Hide All
Edge...
Interval Length 0.5
5: Stay
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesh Set
107
Into Existing Mesh Set

Add to Stays
OK
OK
Pre-Works
Property
1D Stay
Show Section
We hide the display of the face meshes so that the stays stand out in the geometry display.
For the stays we also apply an elements size of 0.5 m. With the Show Section option we
clearly see the stays with their proper cross-section [Fig. 9.7a].
(a) stays with cross-section
(b) stays and wall
Figure 9.7: Meshing the stays

Checking the staywall connection
FX+
Pre-Works
Mesh Mesh Set Wall Show
Mesh Mesh SetWall Display Mode Shading
Mesh Mesh SetWall Shrink
Property 1D Stay Hide Section
Mesh Mesh Set Stays Show
Mesh Mesh Set Stays Color...
Colors red
Mesh Show Node

View Zoom Window
Mesh Node Merge...
Merge Node
Nodes
Select Node to Move

Select Node to Retain
Select node in wall near stay

Select node in stay near wall
View Zoom
View Zoom
Mesh Node
Merge Node
All
Window
Merge...
Drag zoom window around second wall-stay connection
Nodes
Select Node to Move

Select Node to Retain
Drag zoom window around first wallstay connection
Select node in wall near stay

Select node in stay near wall
To check the staywall connection we display the mesh of the wall in Shrunken style. We
also switch off the cross-section of the stays [Fig. 9.7b]. Zooming in on the connection
shows that the end node of the stay is not a node of the wall [Fig. 9.8a]. Via the Merge
Node dialog we move the appropriate node of the wall to the stay end. This merges the
two nodes to one single node [Fig. 9.8b]. The stay is now connected to the wall while
retaining its proper location and straight shape. We repeat this procedure for the second
staywall connection.
Bedding floor extrusion to solids
FX+
108
(a) before
(b) after
Figure 9.8: Merging nodes for the staywall connection

View Zoom All
Pre-Works Mesh Mesh Set Floor
Mesh Protrude Mesh

Extrude Mesh
Show Only
Extrude...
2D>3D
Select 2D-Element(s) Select all floor elements

Extrusion Direction Selection
Select Extrusion Direction Select Z-axis
Offset/Times
Offset: -0.5 Number of Times
Uniform
Property
6: Dummy
Advanced Option
Mesh Set
Into
Existing Mesh Set

Add to Stays
OK
OK
Via the Extrude Mesh dialog we extrude the elements of the floor to solids, over a distance
of 0.5 m in the Z direction [Fig. 9.9a]. Now we must convert the solid elements to
interfaces.
(a) floor extruded to solids
(b) floor and interface elements
Figure 9.9: Meshing the bedding

Bedding - interface elements
FX+

Mesh Element Create Interface Element...
Create Interface Element
Type
Plane
Method
Convert Element
Parameters
Select Element(s) Select all elements in view
Select Base Node(s) Select nodes on lower edge

Property
4: Bedding
View View Point

Pre-Works
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh Set
Mesh Set
Mesh Set
OK
Isometric 1
Bedding Shrink
Floor Show
Floor Select floor in- and outside
109
Mesh Mesh Set Floor Select floor in- and outside

Transparency Level 5 OK
Color... Colors
gray
Transparency...
We can easily convert the solids to interfaces in a front view of the floor. Then we launch
the Create Interface Element dialog to perform the conversion. When we select all the
elements in the view, we automatically select all the solid elements in the bedding. We
can also easily select all base nodes by dragging a selection window around the lower edge
of the solids. After the actual conversion we revert to an isometric view where we display
the interface elements in Shrunken style. We also display the floor in transparent gray so
that the colored interface elements shimmer through [Fig. 9.9b].
FX+
Quadratic elements
Pre-Works
Mesh
Show All

Change
Order
Quadratic
Select Element(s)
Select entire mesh
OK
Via the Change Element Parameters dialog we change the order parameter to Quadratic.
We select the entire mesh, for instance by dragging a selection window around it in the
Work Window display.
FX+
Display entire mesh

Pre-Works
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Mesh
Set Floor Floor inside Shrink

Set Floor Floor outside Shrink
Set Wall Shrink
Set Roof Shrink
Colors violet
Set Roof Color...
Mesh Mesh Set Bedding Shrink

Mesh Show Node
Property 1D Stay Show Section
View Zoom Window
Drag zoom window
For a final display of the entire mesh we apply the Shrink option to all elements. We
also display the stays with their cross-section. To let the stays stand out in contrast to
the roof we color the elements of the latter in violet. In the final display we can already
discern the mid-side nodes of the elements [Fig. 9.10a]. For further assessment we can
zoom in on various areas of the model, for instance on the wallfloor connection in the
front [Fig. 9.10b].
9.1.4
The boundary constraints involve the supports below the bedding and the symmetry
conditions.
FX+
Supports below bedding

BC Set
Name: Bedding
Add
Constraint
Select Node(s)
Select base nodes of bedding interface
Pinned
110
(a) full mesh
(b) detail wallfloor connection
Figure 9.10: Final mesh of the tunnel section

OK

Pre-Works Mesh Mesh Set Hide all
We create a new set of boundary constraints called Bedding. In the front view of the
model we select the base nodes of the bedding interface elements, i.e., the bottom line.
We support the translations in the global XY Z-directions, which show up in the front
view [Fig. 9.11a]. An isometric view confirms that all nodes of the base are supported
[Fig. 9.11b].
(a) front view
(b) isometric view
Figure 9.11: Supports of bedding interface

Symmetry condition sets
Pre-Works
Mesh
Work Window
Analysis
BC Set
BC
Name: SymY
Name: SymX
Name: Stay
FX+
Show All
Hide All Labels
Set...
Add
Add
Add
For the symmetry conditions we create three sets of boundary constraints: SymY for the
symmetry related to the Y = 0 cross-section (the front), SymX for the symmetry related
to the longitudinal cross-section, and Stay for the symmetry related to the mid-points
of the stays.
Symmetry Y = 0 cross-section
FX+
View View Point Right

Constraint
BC Set SymY
Object Type Node
111
Select Node(s)
Select all nodes on left edge
Symmetry Plane 31
Apply
We make a Right view of the model and hide the currently displayed boundary conditions.
This view shows the wall where we select the nodes on the left edge. For these nodes we
support the translation in Y -direction (longitudinal), the rotation around the X-direction
and the rotation around the Z-direction [Fig. 9.12a].
(a) Y = 0 cross-section
(b) longit. cross-section
(c) mid-points of stays
Figure 9.12: Definition of boundary constraints for symmetry

Symmetry longitudinal cross-section
FX+

Work Window Hide All Labels
Constraint
BC Set SymX
Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
Select all nodes on right edge
Symmetry Plane 23
Apply
We make a Front view of the model and hide the currently displayed boundary conditions.
This view shows the cross-section at Y = 0 where we select the nodes on the right
edge. For these nodes we support the translation in X-direction (transverse), the rotation
around the Y -direction and the rotation around the Z-direction [Fig. 9.12b].
Symmetry mid-points of stays
Work Window
FX+
Hide All Labels
Constraint
BC Set Stay
Select Node(s)
g R1
DOF
Select nodes at right beam ends
OK
The mid-points of the stays are located in the longitudinal symmetry plane. Hence
we have already constrained the translation in X-direction, the rotation around the Y direction and the rotation around the Z-direction in the set SymX. However, the beam
elements of the stays also have rotational degrees of freedom around the X-direction. We
additionally constrain these degrees of freedom [Fig. 9.12c].
Symmetry conditions display
View View Point
Pre-Works
FX+
Isometric 1
BC SymY Show All

SymX Show All
View Zoom Window
Drag zoom window
In an isometric view of the model we can finally check the defined boundary constraints
for symmetry [Fig. 9.13a]. For further assessment we can zoom in on appropriate areas,
for instance on the wallfloor connection [Fig. 9.13b].
112
(a) full model
(b) detail wallfloor connection
Figure 9.13: Boundary constraints for symmetry
9.1.5
Loading
The loading of the model consists of the dead weight and of the pressure loads on the
roof, wall and floor in the initial- and end-stage. See Figure 9.3 and Table 9.1 on page 100
for the loading schemes and values of the pressure loads.
FX+
Loading sets
Analysis Load
Load Set
Set...
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Dead weight
q0end
q123end
q4end
q5end
q6end
q123ini
q4ini
q5ini
q6ini
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
We define a load set for dead weight and for the various pressure loads.
FX+
Dead weight
Analysis Load Body Force...
Body Force Load Set Dead weight
Type
Gravity

Gravity G1: 0 G2: 0 G3: -9.81
OK
We specify the dead weight load with an acceleration of gravity g = 9.81 in the third
global direction. So the gravity works downward (in the Z-direction).
FX+
End load on roof
Work Window
Hide All Labels
View Zoom All

Pressure Load Set q0end
Object
Tool Bar
Type
Select
Face Pressure
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Add
Mode
Type
2D Element
Select roof elements

g Uniform
P or P1: -15000 Base Function None

Apply
113
Here we specify load q0 on the roof which is only active in the end stage [Fig. 9.3]. We
hide the currently displayed labels and launch the Pressure dialog to specify the pressure
load. We activate mesh selection in the Tool bar to enable easy element selection via
the Pre-Works Tree or in the Work Window. We specify the load q0 = 15000 in the
Z-direction (downward). The display confirms the definition [Fig. 9.14]
Figure 9.14: End load q0 on roof

FX+
Initial load on wall
Work Window
Pressure
Hide All Labels
Load Set
Type
Object
Tool Bar
Select
q123ini
Type
Face Pressure
2D Element
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Select wall elements
Add
Direction
Ref. CSys-Axis 1 Ref. CSys Global Rectangular

P or P1: 1 P2: 1 P3: 1 P4: 1 Base Function
Uniform
...
Spatial
Name: ini
Z: -6.0
Z: -3.5
Z: -2.0
Z: -1.999
Z: 0.0
stage Ref. CSys

Value: 45500
Value: 12200
Value: 3300
Value: 0.0
Value: 0.0
Global Rectangular
Independent Var.
OK
Pressure
Base Function
ini stage

Display Option
LBC
Load
Display
Pressure
Pressure
Proportional Size
Preview
True
Apply
Apply
Here we specify the load q1 -q2 -q3 on the wall in the initial stage [Fig. 9.3]. First we define a
face pressure load in X-direction with unit values at each corner. Then we define a spatial
curve [Fig. 9.15a] for the loading values q1 , q2 , and q3 [Table 9.1], at the appropriate Zlevels (depth). Finally we attach the curve to the load. The load display with proportional
size confirms the definition of the load [Fig. 9.15b].
End load on wall
Work Window
FX+
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Load Set q123end Type Face Pressure
Object Type 2D Element
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
114
(b) q123 display

(a) spatial curve
Figure 9.15: Initial load on wall

Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Select wall elements
Add

Uniform P or P1: 1 P2: 1 P3: 1 P4: 1 Base Function
...
Spatial
Name: end
Z: -6.0
Z: -2.5
Z: 0.0
stage
Value:
Value:
Value:
Ref. CSys
66400
19800
5000
Global Rectangular
Independent Var.
OK
Pressure
Base Function
Preview
end stage
Apply
Similar to the initial load, we define the end load q1 -q2 -q3 on the wall [Fig. 9.16].
(b) q123 display

(a) spatial curve
Figure 9.16: End load on wall

Initial load on outside floor
Work Window
FX+
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Load Set q4ini Type Face Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Select outside floor elements

Mode
115
Add

g Uniform

Preview
Apply
Work Window
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Add

g Uniform
P or P1: 7500 Base Function None

Preview
Apply
Here we define the two uniform loads q4 and q5 acting on the outside part of the floor in
the initial stage [Fig. 9.17].
(a) q4 down
(b) q5 up
Figure 9.17: Initial load on outside floor

FX+
Initial load on inside floor
Work Window
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Select inside floor elements
Add
Direction Ref. CSys-Axis 3

g Uniform
P or P1: 25000
Preview

Base Function None
Apply
We define the uniform load q6 acting on the inside part of the floor in the initial stage
[Fig. 9.18].
FX+
End load on outside floor
Work Window
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Add
Direction
Ref. CSys-Axis 3
Ref. CSys
Global Rectangular
116
Figure 9.18: Initial load q6 on inside floor

g Uniform
Preview
P or P1: -72500
Base Function
None
Apply
Work Window
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Add

g Uniform
P or P1: 7500 Base Function None

Preview
Apply
The definition of the loads q4 and q5 acting on the outside floor in the end stage is similar
to the initial stage [Fig. 9.17]. The only difference is the increased value of q4 .
FX+
End load on inside floor
Work Window
Hide All Labels
Pressure
Tool Bar
Select
Mesh (M)
Select Element(s)
Pressure
Mode
Select inside floor elements
Add

g Uniform
P or P1: 35000
Preview

Base Function None
OK
The definition of the load q6 acting on the inside floor in the end stage is similar to the
initial stage [Fig. 9.18]. The only difference is the increased value of q6 .
9.1.6
We must add data to the model that cannot be supplied via FX+. Therefore we launch
the Mesh Editor from FX+, which brings you in the Mesh Editor of Diana.
Analysis
FX+
Via the Analysis menu we choose Edit model with Diana mesh-editor to launch the
Mesh Editor. We will now specify the remaining properties of the bedding interfaces
and also combine load cases into load combinations.
117
Properties of bedding interfaces
TunnelPh.py
setElementDataParameter( "Bedding", "NUMINT", [ "LUMPED" ] )
With the NUMINT LUMPED input data item we apply a nodal lumping integration
scheme to the interface elements of the bedding.
Load combinations
addLoadCombination( "Load combination 1"
setLoadCaseFactor( "Load combination 1",
TunnelPh.py
)
"Dead weight", 1
)
"q123ini", 1 )
"q4ini", 1 )
"q5ini", 1 )
"q6ini", 1 )
)
"Dead weight", 1
"q123ini", 1 )
"q4ini", 1 )
"q5ini", 1 )
"q6ini", 1 )
)
"q123end", 1 )
"q4end", 1 )
"q5end", 1 )
"q6end", 1 )
"q123ini", -1 )
"q4ini", -1 )
"q5ini", -1 )
"q6ini", -1 )
)
"Dead weight", 1
"q123end", 1 )
"q4end", 1 )
"q5end", 1 )
"q6end", 1 )
)
"q0end", 1 )
)
"Dead weight", 1
"q0end", 1 )
"q123end", 1 )
"q4end", 1 )
"q5end", 1 )
"q6end", 1 )
We define some load combinations for the various phases of the analysis [Table 9.2].
By filling in the cells of the matrix in the dialog [Fig. 9.19] we combine load cases into load
combinations. Note that the sequence of the columns in the matrix, the load cases, is the
same as the loading sets that we have specified in FX+ [ 9.1.5 p. 112]. Each combination
(17) contains one or more loads including a load factor. Combination 4 is a special
combination, it applies the increment from the construction load to the final load.
Save as input data file
TunnelPh.py
exportModel( "C:/TunnelPh/Tunnel.dat" )
We export the model as an input data file Tunnel.dat in Diana batch format.
118
Table 9.2: Load combinations

Combination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Loads
Dead weight
All loads of the construction phase
Dead weight and all loads of the construction phase [Fig. 9.3-left]
Replacement of all loads of the construction phase by the end loads
Dead weight and all loads in the end stage [Fig. 9.3-right]
Top load on the roof of the tunnel
Dead weight, top load on the roof of the tunnel and all loads in the end stage
Figure 9.19: Specification of load combinations
9.2
Nonlinear Phased Analysis
This example requires a phased analysis because the geometry of the model changes. For
instance in a certain stage the roof is added. The analysis of this model can be split up
into four phases, each with its own active part of the model geometry and applied loading
[Table 9.3]. To perform the phased analysis we reopen the model in the Mesh Editor.
Table 9.3: Model phases and loads
Phase
1
Geometry
Wall
Floor (bottom)
Bedding
Wall
Floor (bottom)
Bedding
Stays
Wall
Floor (bottom)
Bedding
Stays
Top
Wall
Floor (bottom)
Bedding
Top
Run analysis
File Open...
Open File Name
Loads
Dead weight
Construction load level
Dead weight
Final load level
Dead weight
Final load level
Dead weight
Final load level
Top load
Mesh Editor
Analysis
Tunnel.dat
Open
Run...
9.2 Nonlinear Phased Analysis
119
Status
Diana
Type
Phased
OK
Diana
Phased Edit...
Phased Settings
Phase
Active Elements and Reinforcements
Select active parts of the model
User
Selection
Modify
OK
Run
We read the previously stored input data file of the model. After termination of the
reading process the dialog Analysis Setup pops up. Here we choose Phased for the analysis
type which launches the Diana - Phased dialog. For each phase we must select the active
parts of the model as outlined in the following sections. During the analysis Diana will
store the results on Post-Neutral files for FX+.
9.2.1
Phase 1
Mesh Editor
Phased Settings
Select active parts of the model

...
In the Diana - Phased dialog we set the options for the first phase [Fig. 9.20]. We select
Figure 9.20: Phase 1 model selection

which model parts are active in this phase [Table 9.2]. We click on the Run button on
the tool bar to initialize the phased analysis. iDiana will open up a status dialog, similar
to the initialization dialog. If there are no errors we click OK. iDiana closes the pop
up dialog. iDiana will open up the initialization dialog again and we select Structural
Nonlinear. A new dialog will pop up. Now we have to specify which loads we want to
apply on the model. On the Execute tab we click on load-steps Settings. We select load
1 and keep the step size 1. This load represents the gravity load on the model. We click
Close and the dialog closes again. After the gravity we want to apply the loads from the
soil and groundwater. We right-click in the Execute block and select Add new. We click
again on the Settings button for the loads steps. We select load 2, which refers to the
load combination containing the initial soil and water loads and a step size of 1.0. On the
Output tab we click on the Properties button to change the base name of our output file
into phase1. We also verify whether the whole model is selected and if all primary results
are selected. All things for the first phase are set. This would result in the following
analysis commands.
120

Analysis commands for Phase 1
phase1.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Floor inside" "Floor outside" "Wall" "Bedding" /
REINFO NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
EXECUT
EXECUT LOAD LOADNR=2
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="phase1"
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
END OUTPUT
*END
We can now run the first phase analysis by clicking Run. If the analysis has run without
any errors, we click OK and return to the Analysis Setup dialog. To assess the results for
Phase 1 we return to FX+ and initiate the postprocessing.
FX+
Initiate postprocessing for Phase 1

File Open...
Open File Name
Tunnel.fdb
Open

Post File Import
Post Result Files
Open
Add...
File Name
phase1.dpb
Open
Light On
Import
View
Post Style
Rendering Option...
Contour
Edge
Type
Type
Rendering Option
g Gradient
g Feature Edge
We import the Post Result file for Phase 1. For the forthcoming contour plots we switch
of the light. We also set some style options for postprocessing: gradient contours for
smooth transition from one contour to another, and display of the edges of meshes. We
will now assess the displacements, the bending moments, and the stress in the bedding.
FX+
Displacements
Pre-Works
Results
Structural Phased Nonlinear

Post Data
Mesh
Show All
Load Step 2, Phase 1
Displacement
TDtXYZ(V)
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
In the Results Tree we open the analysis type Structural Phased Nonlinear where we
choose the displacements of the final load step of Phase 1. Then we double-click the total
displacement vectors and proceed in the Post Data tab of the Tool Bars. Here we set some
options to produce a contour plot of the displacements in a deformed model [Fig. 9.21].
FX+
Bending moments
Post Data
Pre-Works
Results
Structural Phased Nonlinear Load Step 2, Phase 1 2D Element Forces/Moments

Pre-Works Mesh Mesh Set Floor Floor inside Show Only
Results
Mesh Shape
g Undeformed
Mesh
Mesh Set Wall
Show Only
2D Element Forces/Moments
-Mxx
-Myy
In an undeformed model we produce a contour plot of the bending moments in the wall
and the inside floor [Fig. 9.22].
121
Figure 9.21: Phase 1: total displacements in deformed mesh
(a) mxx in wall
(b) myy in inside floor
Figure 9.22: Phase 1: bending moments

FX+
Stress in bedding
Pre-Works
Results
Mesh
Mesh Set Bedding
Show Only
2D Element Misc.
-STx
Finally, for Phase 1, we produce a contour plot of the stress in the bedding [Fig. 9.23].
Figure 9.23: Phase 1: stress in bedding
9.2.2
Phase 2
The analysis commands for Phase 2 are as follows.

phase2.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Floor inside" "Floor outside" "Wall" "Bedding" "Stays" /
REINFO NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
122

BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=3
STEPS
END START
END EXECUT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
END OUTPUT
*END
To assess the results for Phase 2 we return to FX+ and initiate the postprocessing.
FX+

Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
phase2.dpb
Open
Import
We import the Post Result file for Phase 2 and will asses the same results as for the
previous phase.
FX+
Displacements
Pre-Works
Results
Structural Phased Nonlinear Load Step 2, Phase 2

Post Data Mesh Shape
Mesh
Show All
Displacement
TDtXYZ(V)
Here we choose the displacements of the final load step of Phase 2. Then we doubleclick the total displacement vectors and produce a contour plot of the displacements in a
deformed model [Fig. 9.24].

FX+
Bending moments
Post Data
Pre-Works
Results
Structural Phased Nonlinear Load Step 2, Phase 2 2D Element Forces/Moments

Pre-Works Mesh Mesh Set Floor Floor inside Show Only
Results
Mesh Shape
g Undeformed
Mesh
Mesh Set Wall
Show Only
-Mxx
-Myy
and the inside floor [Fig. 9.25].
123
(a) mxx in wall
(b) myy in inside floor

FX+
Stress in bedding
Pre-Works
Results
Mesh
Mesh Set Bedding
Show Only
2D Element Misc.
-STx
9.2.3
Phase 3

phase3.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Floor inside" "Floor outside" "Roof" "Wall" "Bedding" "Stays" /
REINFO NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=5
STEPS
END START
END EXECUT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
END OUTPUT
*END
124

FX+

Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
phase3.dpb
Open
Import
previous phase.
FX+
Displacements
Pre-Works
Results

Mesh
Show All
Displacement
TDtXYZ(V)
Here we choose the displacements of the final load step of Phase 3. Then we doubleclick the total displacement vectors and produce a contour plot of the displacements in a
deformed model [Fig. 9.27].

FX+
Bending moments
Post Data
Pre-Works
Results

Pre-Works
Mesh
Mesh
Results
Mesh Shape
g Undeformed
Mesh
Mesh Set
Mesh Set
Mesh Set Wall
Show Only
Floor Floor inside

Roof Show
-Mxx
Show Only
-Myy
[Fig. 9.28a] and in the inside floor and the roof [Fig. 9.28b].
FX+
Stress in bedding
Pre-Works
Results
Mesh
Mesh Set Bedding
Show Only
2D Element Misc.
-STx
9.2.4
Phase 4
125
(a) mxx in wall
(b) myy in inside floor and roof

phase4.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Floor inside" "Floor outside" "Roof" "Wall" "Bedding" /
REINFO NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=7
STEPS
END START
END EXECUT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
END OUTPUT
*END
FX+

Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
phase4.dpb
Open
Import
previous phase.
Displacements
FX+
126
Pre-Works
Results

Mesh
Show All
Displacement
TDtXYZ(V)
Here we choose the displacements of Phase 4. Then we double-click the total displacement
vectors and produce a contour plot of the displacements in a deformed model [Fig. 9.30].

FX+
Bending moments
Post Data
Pre-Works
Results

Pre-Works
Mesh
Mesh
Results
Mesh Shape
g Undeformed
Mesh
Mesh Set
Mesh Set
Mesh Set Wall
Show Only
Floor Floor inside

Roof Show
-Mxx
Show Only
-Myy
[Fig. 9.31a] and in the inside floor and the roof [Fig. 9.31b].
(a) mxx in wall
(b) myy in inside floor and roof

FX+
Stress in bedding
Pre-Works
Results
Mesh
Mesh Set Bedding
Show Only
2D Element Misc.
-STx
127
9.2.5
Conclusion
In the displays of the results for the four phases you may have noticed that the displacements are not continuous from phase to phase. The different parts became active in the
different phases and the total displacements do not have to be continuous. In the figures
of the bedding stresses you can see the nonlinear effect of the bedding, the red parts of
the model show very small values. This is what we expect, because of the input of the
stressdisplacement diagram [Fig. 9.2 p. 100].
128
Chapter 10
Early Age Behavior of a

Purification Wall
Name:
PurWalFX
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/PurWalFX
Keywords:
analys: flow flowst heat nonlin phase physic stagge transi.

constr: initia suppor temper.
elemen: b2ht cq16e ct12e flow potent pstrai q4ht t3ht.
load: elemen node temper time weight.
materi: adiaba capaci concre conduc elasti hydrat isotro jsce maturi power
viscoe.
result: cauchy crkind displa reacti stress temper total.
plane strain
0.70
2.30
wall
28.60
0.80
base
5.30
soil foundation
Figure 10.1: Specimen of the wall [m]

This example combines a coupled flowstress analysis with a phased analysis, applied on
a purification wall [Fig. 10.1]. The base of the structure consists of a slab of 0.8 m thick
and 5.3 m wide. After thirty-six days a water-purification wall has been cast on the base.
The wall is 0.7 m thick and 2.3 m high. The structure is 28.6 m long and directly founded
on the underlaying soil. The casts of the base slab and the wall have been removed when
the concrete was seven days old. To completely analyze the structure we will perform a
staggered analysis for each of the two construction phases: the casting of the slab and
the casting of the wall.
130
Early Age Behavior of a Purification Wall
10.1
Due to the large length of the structure we may apply plane strain elements with the
same discretization in space for the thermal and the stress analysis. These isoparametric
elements are quadratically interpolated with eight nodes for the concrete parts and six
nodes for the soil foundation. Due to symmetry we only have to model one half of the
purification wall. To make the finite element model we start FX+ with a new model.
FX+
Initiate new model
File New
View View Point
Top
The model is two-dimensional [Fig. 10.2]. With a top-view we look down on the XY -plane
where we will define the model. Note that in the lower-right corner of the Main Window
FX+ shows the units in which the model is going to be defined. For this example we
choose [N,m]. Furthermore, we will use [day] as time unit during the analysis, which we
will specify explicitly in the data file later [ 10.2.4 p. 140].
Note that for this unit system the mass unit equals 7.46496 109 kg. For more
information on units, see Volume Analysis Procedures.
q is boundary flux
q=0
uX = 0
convective exchange
T = 20
uX = 0
3.00
3.80
6.10
T = 20
Y
X
T = 20
uY = 0
0.35
2.65
5.00
Figure 10.2: 2D geometry and boundary conditions [m, C]
10.1.1
Geometry
We will start with the definition of three rectangles indicated with a dashed diagonal
[Fig. 10.3a]. Then we will separate the various edges [Fig. 10.3b].
FX+
Three rectangles
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
Create on WP
Location: 0,0
Location: 0,3
Location: 0,3
Rectangle (Wire)...
Method
Method
Method
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
Location: 5,3
Location: 2.65,0.8
Location: 0.35,3.1
View
Zoom
All
We define each rectangle by the absolute XY -coordinates of the lower-left corner and
the relative coordinates of the upper-right corner. Via the Zoom option we display the
geometry with a best-fit in the Work Window [Fig. 10.4a].
131
n
l m
j
g h
d
k
i
e
Y
a
(a) three rectangles
(b) edges
Figure 10.3: Defining the geometry
Figure 10.4: Defined geometry

FX+
Intersection of edges
Geometry
Intersect
Curve
Intersect...
Select Entities to Intersect

Apply
Select the three rectangles
Because some edges of the defined rectangles do overlap we must apply the intersection
option. Via the Intersect dialog we let FX+ determine all edges separately.
10.1.2
Properties
10.1.2.1
Material Properties
We must now specify material properties for the soil, the concrete and the boundary.
Therefore we launch the Material Manager dialog.
For material Concrete we specify the thermal and mechanical properties of concrete
according to Table 10.1. These values apply for slowly hardening concrete according to
the formulas provided by the Japan Society of Civil Engineers [10] (JSCE). They define
the compressive strength, the tensile strength and the Youngs modulus. A large number
of these material properties are either temperature or time dependent. In this context, we
create a dummy material for the concrete now and we will specify the material properties
of the concrete via an input data file in Diana batch format in the Mesh Editor later
on [ 10.2.1].
Concrete
FX+
Material Manager Create
132
Table 10.1: Properties of slowly hardening concrete

Cement quality
Adiabatic temp. rise
Arrhenius constant
Thermal conductivity
Thermal capacity
Convection coefficient, cast
Convection coefficient, no cast
Mass density
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Thermal expansion coefficient
Compressive
strength
Tadiab
cA
c
h
h
fc (t)
fc (91)
Tensile strength
ft (t)
Youngs modulus
for 0 t < 3 days
for 3 t < 5 days
for t 5 days
EC (t)
(t)
(t)
(t)
Dummy
ID: 1
SL
`
36 1 exp1.25t
5000
311
2675
700
1500
2300
27000
0.2
105
t
fc (91)
6.2 + 0.93 t
29
p
0.35 fc (t)
p
4700 (t) fc (t)
0.73
0.135 t + 0.325
1.00
C
K
kJ/(Kmday)
kJ/(Km3 )
kJ/(Km2 day)
kJ/(Km2 day)
kg/m3
MPa
C1
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
Name: Concrete
OK
We define the material properties for thermo-mechanical soil behavior in a material named
Soil, according to Table 10.2.
Table 10.2: Thermo-mechanical soil properties
Thermal conductivity
Thermal capacity
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Mass density
Thermal expansion coefficient
c
E
191
3200
630
0.3
1720
7106
kJ/(mKday)
kJ/(m3 K)
MPa
kg/m3
K1
FX+
Soil
Material Manager
Create
Isotropic
ID: 2
Name: Soil
Structural
Elastic Modulus: 630e6
Poissons Ratio: 0.3
Expansion Coeff.: 7e-6
Mass Density: 2.304098e-7
Constitutive Model
Model Type
Elastic
OK
Note that the density of 1720 kg/m3 needs to be specified as 2.304098 10 7 for the used
unit system [ 10.1 p. 130]. We will specify the thermal conductivity and capacity for the
soil material in the Mesh Editor later on [ 10.2.2].

FX+
Boundary convection
Material Manager
133
Create
Dummy
ID: 3
Name: Convec1
Apply
ID: 4
Name: Convec2
OK
Material Manager
Close
For the boundary convection of the wall and the base two dummy materials, named Convec1
and Convec2 respectively, are created now. We will specify the convection coefficient for
the boundary elements, along with their time dependencies, in the Mesh Editor later
on [ 10.2.3].
10.1.2.2
Physical Properties
We launch the Property Manager dialog to define the physical properties for the wall, the
foundation and the boundaries.
FX+
Wall
Property Manager
Create
2D...

2D Plane Strain
ID: 1
Name: Wall
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Wall
Regular
Apply
FX+
Soil
ID: 2 Name: Soil
Data ID: 2 Data Name: Soil
Regular
Material 2: Soil
OK
FX+
Upright boundary
Property Manager
Create
Flow...

Flow Boundary 2D
ID: 3
Name: Upright
Data ID: 3 Data Name: Upright
Heat
Material 3: Convec1
Thickness: 1
Apply
FX+
Slab boundary
ID: 4 Name: Slab
Data ID: 4 Data Name: Slab
Heat
Material 4: Convec2
Thickness: 1
OK
Property Manager
Close
134
10.1.3
Meshing
We may now create a finite element mesh on the defined geometry. First we will mesh the
concrete structure comprising the wall and the base slab, and then the soil foundation.
By meshing the foundation, we have to ensure the continuity of the element size between
the base slab and the soil part. Moreover, away from the concrete structure, a coarser
mesh is satisfactory. Therefore we explicitly specify the divisions (seeding) of the edges,
referring to them with letters a to n [Fig. 10.3b].
FX+
Seeding all edges

Mesh Size Control
Edge Mesh Size
Along Edge...
Select Edges Select edges d, g, h, i, j, n

Seeding Number of Divisions
Number of Divisions: 5 Preview

Select Edges Select edges l, m
Number of Divisions: 13 Apply
Select Edges
Select edges e, k
Select Edges
Select edges a, c
Select Edges
Select edge b
Seeding Linear Grading (Ratio)
Apply
Ratio: 1/9 Div: 8 Apply

Select Edges Select edge f
Ratio: 4 Div: 4
OK
Work Window
Select all edges

Display Mesh Seed...
Show
Mesh Seed
OK
Edges d, g, h, i, j and n are divided in five equal sections [Fig. 10.5a]. Edges l
and m are divided in thirteen sections; edges e and k in fifteen sections; and edges
a and c in four sections. A linear grading for edges b and f will provide the coarser
mesh away from the concrete structure and will complete the seeding [Fig. 10.5b].
(a) seeding of first edges
(b) full seeding
Figure 10.5: Seeding of edges

FX+
Meshing the structure

Auto
Map
Property:
Select Object Edges
Select edges j, m, n, l
1: Wall
Mesh Set: Wall

Apply
Auto
Map
Property:
Select Object Edges
Select edges d, h, j, g
1: Wall
Mesh Set: Base

135
Apply
Auto
Map
Select edges e, i, k, h
Select Object Edges
Property:
Advanced
Option...
1: Wall
Advanced Option
Mesh Set
g Into Existing Mesh Set
Add To
Base
OK
OK
First we generate the mesh for the wall and the base [Fig. 10.6a].
(a) mapped mesh for structure
(b) plus Delaunay mesh for foundation
Figure 10.6: Generating the mesh

FX+
Meshing the soil foundation

Select edges b, a, c, f, e, d
Select Edge(s)
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Delaunay Mesher
Type
Triangle
OK
Property:
2: Soil
Mesh Set: Foundation

OK
Then we mesh the foundation with triangular elements [Fig. 10.6b].

FX+
Boundaries
Pre-Works
Mesh Hide All

Geometry Show All
Work Window
Select all edges

Display Mesh Seed...
Hide
Mesh Seed
OK
Mesh Element Extract Element...

Extract Element
From
Shape
Property:
Edge
Mesh Set: Bound 2
From
Select Edge(s)
Select edges n, m
3: Upright
Shape
Apply
Edge
Select Edge(s)
Select edge j
Property: 4: Slab
Mesh Set: Bound Tmp
Apply
From
Shape
Property:
Edge
Select Edge(s)
Select edges k, i
4: Slab
136

Mesh Set: Bound 1
OK
Pre-Works
Geometry Hide All
Mesh Mesh Set Bound 2 Show Only
Bound Tmp Show
Mesh Mesh Set
Bound 1 Show
Mesh Mesh Set
Bound 2 Shrink
Bound Tmp Shrink
Bound 1 Shrink
Prior to meshing the boundaries we revert to a clean display of the geometry. Then we
launch the Extract Element dialog to generate the boundary elements, which we display
in shrunken style [Fig. 10.7a].
(a) boundaries
(b) quadratic elements
Figure 10.7: Finishing the mesh

FX+
Quadratic elements
Pre-Works
Mesh Mesh Set Show All
Mesh Mesh Set Display Show Node
g Mid-Node to geometry
Select meshes Wall, Base, Foundation
Select entire mesh
Change
Order
Quadratic
Select Element(s)
Work Window
OK
Shrink
Via the Change Element Parameters dialog we change the order parameter to Quadratic
for the Wall, Base and Foundation meshes. We display the mid-side nodes to check if the
meshes for the foundation, base and wall contain quadratic elements [Fig. 10.7b].
10.1.4
Loading and Boundary Conditions

FX+
Defining load sets

Analysis Load
Load Set
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Case
Case
Case
Case
1
2
3
4
Set...
Desc.:
Desc.:
Desc.:
Desc.:
Fixed temperature Add

External temperature Add
Dead weight Add
Initial temperature Add
Close
FX+
Fixed nodal temperature

Analysis Load Nodal Temperature...
Nodal Temperature
Load Set Case 1

Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
Select 25 nodes on outer edges of soil
Temperature: 20
Base Function ...
137
Non-spatial
Name: Temp. in time Independent Var.

1 Time: 0.0 Value: 1.0
2 Time: 70.0 Value: 1.0
Time(i)
OK
Nodal Temperature
Pre-Works
Base Function
Load Case 1
Temp. in time
OK
Show all
We define a function Temp. in time with a constant value of 1 in a time span from t = 0
to t = 70. Assigning this function to the nodal temperature gives a constant temperature
for the time span. Via the Pre-Works tree we display the nodes with fixed temperatures
[Fig. 10.8a].
(a) nodes with fixed temperature
(b) elements with external temperature
Figure 10.8: Temperature loading

FX+
External temperature
Pre-Works
Show Only
Mesh Set Bound 2
Bound Tmp Show
Bound 1
Show
Analysis Load External Potential...
External Potential
Mesh
Load Set: Case 2

Potential: 20
Base Function
Select 43 boundary elements
Temp. in time
OK
Pre-Works
Load Case 2
Show all
Via the Pre-Works tree we display the boundary elements. We select the boundary
elements in the current model display. We assign the already defined constant function
to the external temperature. Via the Pre-Works tree we display the boundary elements
with external temperature [Fig. 10.8b].
FX+
Dead weight
Analysis Load
Body Force
Body Force...
Load Set Case 3

Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: -7.323e10
G3: 0
OK
The gravity acceleration acts downward, i.e., in the Y direction, and equals g = 9.81 m/s2 =
7.323 1010 m/day2 for the chosen units.
138

FX+
Initial nodal temperature

Pre-Works
Mesh Mesh Set Show All
Load Hide All
Analysis Load Nodal Temperature...
Nodal Temperature
Load Set Case 4

Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
Select all nodes in the model
Temperature: 20
g Initial temperature
OK
Pre-Works
Load Case 4
Show all
We give all the nodes of the model an initial temperature of 20C [Fig. 10.9a].
(a) nodes with initial temperature
(b) constraints

FX+
Boundary constraints
Pre-Works
Load Hide All
Mesh Mesh Set Display Show Node
Analysis BC Set...
BC Set Name: Supports Desc.: Structural supports
Analysis BC
Constraint
Add
Close
Constraint...
BC Set Supports
Object Type Node
Select node(s)
Select node(s)
Select node(s)
g T1
Select 53 nodes on left edge
DOF
g T1
Select 9 nodes on soil right edge
DOF
g T2
Select 9 nodes on soil bottom edge DOF T1
Apply
Apply
OK
Pre-Works
BC
Show All
We apply the boundary constraints on the soil and the boundary constraints for the
symmetry conditions [Fig. 10.9b].
10.2
We must add data to the model that cannot be supplied via FX+. In this case the
additional data implies various material properties. To add the additional data to the
model definition we launch the Mesh Editor.
Analysis
FX+
10.2 Finishing the Model with the Mesh Editor
10.2.1
139
Concrete Material Properties
We will now specify the concrete parameters. The ADIAB data item specifies the temperature values in C during adiabatic hydration reaction development at different ages
ranging from 0 to 70 days. These values are calculated according to the formula for Tadiab
[Table 10.1]. To model viscoelasticity Diana offers the young hardening concrete model
according to JSCE. For that, we must use the Double Power Law model and specify
CONCRE as JSCE and YOUHAN [Vol. Material Library]. The Power Law is used with the
parameters a = 1.0 and p = d = 0.3 and a development time td = 33 days. Three more
parameters are required: FCK91 for fc (91), YOUN91 for E(91) and CEMTYP for the cement
quality [Table 10.1]. Finally, the evolution of the tensile strength according to the formula
for ft (t) [Table 10.1] is specified by TIMFT The evolution of the tensile strength in time
is necessary to calculate the crack index. All the other data items, respectively CONDUC,
CAPACI, ARRHEN, YOUNG, THERMX, POISON and DENSIT, have been defined according to
Table 10.1.
Set concrete parameters
PurWalFX.py
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "YOUNG", 27000.0E+6 )

setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "POISON", 0.2 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "DENSIT", 3.08106E-7 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "THERMX", 10.0E-6 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "CONDUC", 311.0 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "CAPACI", 2675.0 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "ADIAB", [ 0.0, 20.00, 0.1, 23.94, 0.2, 27.50,
0.3, 30.72, 0.4, 33.63, 0.5, 36.26, 0.6, 38.63, 0.7, 40.78, 0.8, 42.72, 0.9,
44.48, 1.0, 46.07, 1.5, 51.99, 2.0, 55.56, 2.5, 57.72, 3.0, 59.02, 4.0,
60.28, 5.0, 60.74, 10.0, 61.00, 70.0, 61.00 ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "ARRHEN", 5000.0 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "POWER", [ 0.3, 33.0, 1.0, 0.3 ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "CONCRE", "JSCE" )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "FCK91", 29.0 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "YOUHAN", "" )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "YOUN91", 27000.0 )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "CEMTYP", "SL" )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "FTTIME", [ 0.00, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.00,
2.00, 3.00, 4.00, 5.00, 6.00, 7.00, 8.00, 9.00, 10.00, 15.00, 20.00, 30.00,
70.00 ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "FTVALU", [ 0.0, 0.37E+6, 0.52E+6, 0.62E+6,
0.71E+6, 0.94E+6, 1.09E+6, 1.20E+6, 1.28E+6, 1.34E+6, 1.40E+6, 1.44E+6,
1.48E+6, 1.51E+6, 1.63E+6, 1.69E+6, 1.77E+6, 1.87E+6 ] )
10.2.2
Soil Material Properties
For the soil properies we have already specified the values for Youngs modulus, Poissons
ratio, the thermal expansion coefficient, and the mass density [ 10.1.2.1 p. 132]. Now we
will add values for the conductivity and the capacity.
Set soil parameters
PurWalFX.py
setMaterialParameter( "Soil", "CONDUC", 191 )

setMaterialParameter( "Soil", "CAPACI", 3200 )
10.2.3
Boundary Convection
For the convection along the two boundaries we will specify the required parameters which
are the initial value for the convection coefficient and its time dependency.
140

Set convection parameters
10.2.4
"Convec1",
"Convec1",
"Convec1",
"Convec2",
"Convec2",
"Convec2",
PurWalFX.py
"CONVEC",
"TIME", [
"CONVTT",
"CONVEC",
"TIME", [
"CONVTT",
700 )
0.0, 7.0, 7.0001, 70.0 ]
[ 700, 700, 1500, 1500 ]
700 )
0.0, 43.0, 43.0001, 70.0
[ 700, 700, 1500, 1500 ]
)
)
] )
)
Time Unit
We will now finalize the complete input data file in Diana batch format. First, we save
the input data file under the name purwal.dat.
Export model to input data file
Mesh Editor
File Export model...

Export model
File name: purwal.dat

Files of type Diana mesh data files (*.dat)
Save
Then, with an appropriate text editor we modify the table UNITS on the data file,
specifying that the unit of time is DAY.
Add time unit to data file
purwal.dat
UNITS
TIME DAY
Finally, we import the adapted purwal.dat file in Mesh Editor:

Import the adapted data file
Mesh Editor

Import model
File name: purwal.dat

Open
10.3
Staggered FlowStress Analysis
We are now ready to perform a phased analysis which consists of two construction stages.
The first stage simulates the casting of the base slab. This part of the analysis is nonlinear
since the material properties are time and temperature dependent. Note that at this stage
not all parts of the model are active. The active parts include the base slab and the soil
foundation as well as their boundaries to the environment. The analysis of the first
construction stage comprises a transient heat transfer analysis and a structural nonlinear
analysis.
First construction stage
PurWalFX.dcf
*PHASE
ACTIVE ELEMEN "Base" "Foundation" "Bound Tmp" "Bound 1"
*HEATTR
BEGIN INITIA
NONLIN HYDRAT DGRINI 0.01
TEMPER INPUT FIELD 4
END INITIA
EXECUT SIZES 0.1(20) 0.5(10) 1(3) 5(4) 6
10.3 Staggered FlowStress Analysis
141
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE "Flow1"

REACTI
TEMPER
END OUTPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.1(20) 0.5(10) 1(3) 5(4) 6
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON 1e-10
FORCE TOLCON 1e-10
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE "Struc1"
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL GLOBAL
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY GLOBAL
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY CRKIND
END OUTPUT
In the second construction stage the wall is casted. This implies that the wall is added
to the selection of active model parts as well as its boundary to the environment. As a
consequence, the boundary at the wallbase slab connection should no longer be active.
Also for this second construction stage we first perform a transient heat transfer analysis,
followed by a structural nonlinear analysis. The following commands reflect the entire
phased analysis, including the selected output items.
Second construction stage
PurWalFX.dcf
*PHASE
ACTIVE ELEMEN "Wall" "Base" "Foundation" "Bound 2" "Bound 1"
*HEATTR
BEGIN INITIA
NONLIN HYDRAT DGRINI 0.01
TEMPER INPUT FIELD 4
TIME0 36
END INITIA
EXECUT SIZES 0.1(20) 0.5(10) 1(3) 5(4)
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE "Flow2"
REACTI
TEMPER
END OUTPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR 3
STEPS EXPLIC
TIME 36
END START
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON 1e-10
FORCE TOLCON 1e-10
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.1(20) 0.5(10) 1(3) 5(4)
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON 1e-10
FORCE TOLCON 1e-10
END CONVER
END ITERAT
142

BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
END EXECUT
*END
"Struc2"
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
CRKIND
First, we import the above command file in Mesh Editor and subsequently we run the
analysis.
Import command file and run the analysis
PurWalFX.py
newAnalysis( "PurWal" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "PurWal", "PurWal.dcf" )
runSolver( "PurWal" )
10.4
Analysis Results of First Stage

FX+
Import result files

Open
Add...
File Name: Flow1.dpb Struc1.dpb
Post File Import
Open
Import
We import the two result files for the first stage: Flow1.dpb for the results of the heat
flow analysis, and Struc1.dpb for the results of the nonlinear structural analysis.
FX+
Mesh display
Pre-Works
View
Zoom
Mesh
Mesh Set Base
Show Only
Window
We display the mesh of the base slab [Fig. 10.10a]. We will apply the indicated nodes to
display the analysis results.
(b) time graph

(a) nodes
Figure 10.10: Temperature evolution in the base slab
10.4 Analysis Results of First Stage
10.4.1
143
Heat Flow Analysis Results

FX+
Temperature in time
Extract Result
Output Data
Analysis Set Transient Phased Heat Transfer
Data PTE
Step : Data Select All
Nodal Result Extraction
Table
select nodes:
User-Defined
1 85 88
Close
Work Window
Step Value
Graph View
Extract Result
Node:1
Ctrl
Ctrl
Y Label: Temperature OK
Work Window Table Graph View
Node:85
Node:88
Ctrl
Graph...
Graphs
To assess the evolution of the temperature in time we launch the Extract Result dialog.
For the transient heat transfer analysis we select the PTE result (temperatures) and all
time steps (138). In the mesh display we select the three indicated nodes along the axis
of symmetry, i.e., the left edge of the model [Fig. 10.10a]. Note that the node numbers automatically appear in the dialogs text field. We extract the selected data to a table which
appears in the Work Window. In the table we select the columns with the step numbers
and the temperatures of the three nodes. Finally we make graphs for the temperature
evolution [Fig. 10.10b].
FX+
Temperature after 1.6 days

Work Window
Results
Tool Bar
PurWal:1
Post Style
Tool Bar
Edge
Type
No Edge
Transient Phased Heat Transfer
Post Style
Edge
Type
Time Step 16, Phase 1
Nodal Misc.
PTE
Mesh Edge

On-Curve Diagram
Define Curve
2-Point
Line
select end-nodes:
0, 3.48, 0
2.65, 3.48, 0
Add
g Curve Plot
Table
Close
Working Window
On-Curve Diagram
X Ctrl Value
Graph View
Graph...
Work Window Table Graph View:2
Graph
We return to the display of the base slab mesh and switch off the display of element
edges. We select time step 16 of the heat transfer analysis representing the situation after
1.6 days. A double-click on the PTE result item gives a contour plot of the temperature
[Fig. 10.11a].
We will also make a graph of the temperature distribution along a horizontal line in the
core of the slab. To see the node locations we switch on the display of element edges. We
launch the On-Curve Diagram dialog. In the mesh display we select the two end-nodes
of this line. Note that the node coordinates automatically appear in the dialogs text
fields. When we click the Table button FX+ will write the coordinates of all nodes along
this line, together with the values of the selected result (temperatures), in a table. In
this table we select the columns X and Value. We make a graph for these two columns
[Fig. 10.11b].
10.4.2
Structural Analysis Results
Transverse stress distribution

FX+
144
(a) contour plot
(b) horizontal distribution in the core
Figure 10.11: Temperature in the base slab after 1.6 days

Work Window
Tool Bar
Results
purwal:1
Post Style
Edge
Type
No Edge
Time Step 1, Phase 1 2D Element Stresses -SZZ

Time Step 38, Phase 1 2D Element Stresses -SZZ
In the Work Window we revert to the display of the model and switch off the element
edges. We select the results of the structural analysis and make contour plots of the
transverse stress ZZ for the first and last time step [Fig. 10.12]. Note that contour
ranges in the first display and the second display are not the same. Therefore, the two
contour plots cannot be compared directly.
(a) after 2.4 hours
(b) after 36 days
Figure 10.12: Transverse stress in base slab

FX+
Tranverse stress evolution
Properties
Contour
Max/Min Value On/Off

Max Value: 1.9e6
Min Value: -0.5e6
True
Apply
Tool Bar Post Data

Output
Set Slider
Move slider back and forth
For consistent contour plots of the stresses for the various time steps we fix the contour
extremes via the Contour pane in the Property Window: from 0.5e6 (dark blue) to
+1.9e6 (red). Then we launch the Output Set Slider. Moving the slider back and forth
clearly shows the development of the stress in time. Here we show the stress contours for
0.1, 0.6, 1, 2.5, 4, 6, 9, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 36 days [Fig. 10.13].
10.5
Analysis Results of Second Stage
Import result files

FX+
10.5 Analysis Results of Second Stage
145
Figure 10.13: Evolution of transverse stress in the base slab

Tool Bar Analys
Pre-Mode

Open
Add...
File Name: Flow2.dpb Struc2.dpb
Post File Import
Open
Import
We return to the preprocessing mode and import the two result files for the second stage:
Flow2.dpb for the results of the heat flow analysis, and Struc2.dpb for the results of the
nonlinear structural analysis.
FX+
Mesh display
Pre-Works
View
Zoom
Mesh
Mesh Set Wall
Show
Window
We add the mesh of the wall to the current model display [Fig. 10.14b]. We will apply
the indicated node to display the analysis results.
(b) time graph

(a) node
Figure 10.14: Temperature evolution in the wall
10.5.1
Heat Flow Analysis Results
Temperature in time
FX+

Extract Result
146

Output Data
Analysis Set Transient Phased Heat Transfer
Data PTE
Table
select node:
User-Defined
Close
Work Window
Step Value
Graph View
Extract Result
Node:7
Ctrl
Graph...
Work Window Table Graph View
Graphs
We launch the Extract Result dialog and select the transient heat transfer analysis. We
also select the PTE result (temperatures) and all time steps (137). In the mesh display
we select the indicated node on the axis of symmetry, i.e., the left edge of the model
[Fig. 10.14a]. We extract the selected data to a table where we select the columns with
the step numbers and the temperatures of the node. Finally we make a graph for the
temperature evolution [Fig. 10.14b].
FX+
Temperature distribution
Work Window
Tool Bar
purwal:1
Post Style
Properties
Edge
Type
No Edge
Contour
Max/Min Value
Max Value: 31
Min Value: 20
True
Apply
Results
Transient Heat Transfer
Time Step 3, Phase 2 Nodal Misc. PTE

We return to the display of the base slab mesh and switch off the display of element edges.
We select time step 16 of the heat transfer analysis representing the situation after 1.6
days. A double-click on the PTE result item gives a contour plot of the temperature. We
make consistent contour plots for three time steps, respectively representing the situation
at 9.6 hours, 1 day, and 4 days after the casting of the wall [Fig. 10.15].
(a) after 9.6 hours
(b) after 1 day
(c) after 4 days
Figure 10.15: Temperature distribution in the base slab and the wall
10.5.2
Structural Analysis Results

FX+
Transverse stress distribution
Properties
Contour
Max/Min Value True

Max Value: 2.1e6
Min Value: -0.24e6
Apply
Results
2D Element Stresses
-SZZ
10.5 Analysis Results of Second Stage

2D Element Stresses
2D Element Stresses
147
-SZZ
-SZZ
We make consistent contour plots for three time steps, respectively representing the situation at 9.6 hours, 1 day, and 30 days (the end of the analysis) after the casting of the
wall [Fig. 10.16].
(a) after 9.6 hours
(b) after 1 day
(c) after 30 days
Figure 10.16: Transverse stress distribution in the base slab and the wall
148
Chapter 11
Derived Results for Beams

Name:
DerResBea
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/DerResBea
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: beam class1 l12be rectan.
load: force node.
option: direct groups units usersu.
result: stress total.
Y
F
600
Z
1500
3500
1500
400
Figure 11.1: Idealized model

In this example we will analyze a reinforced concrete beam. The results will be checked by
calculating unity checks on strength, area of reinforcement and cracking according to the
Dutch National Annex of Eurocode 2 NEN-EN 1992-1-1 [13]. The finite element model
consists of L12BE beam elements. The ends of the model are supported and there are two
nodal loads in vertical direction. This model is visualized in Figure 11.1. We will run a
linear elastic analysis. Unity checks will be specified via the usersupplied subroutine for
derived beam results USRBEA.
Properties. For the concrete we will use grade C20/25 and for the reinforcement steel
we will use B500. We assume four reinforcement bars with a diameter of 25 mm (i.e.
4 25) and the stirrups have a diameter equal to 8 mm. The cover on the reinforcement
c equals 30 mm. The loading consists of a permanent load Fp of 40 kN and a variable
load Fq of 50 kN.
11.1
The finite element model consists of L12BE beam elements. A unit load of 1 N will
be applied. The results will be multiplied using loading factors in the usersupplied
subroutine USRBEA. This is possible, because we run a linear elastic analysis. For the
150

modeling session we start a new model and specify the XY -plane as the reference face.
We save the model as Beam.fdb.
FX+
Initiate new model

File New
Geometry Work Plane
Move Work Plane
Ref. Plane
Move...
Select
XY-Plane
OK
View View Point Top

File Save
Save As File Name: Beam.fdb
Save
The Units are shown in the lower-right corner of the main Window. In this example we
choose for N and mm.
11.1.1
Geometry
We launch the polyline dialog to model the beam.

FX+
lines
Geometry Curve
2D Polyline
Create on WP
Single
Polyline (Wire)...
Location
Method
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
0,0
1500,0
3500,0
1500,0
FXD
Create new polyline?

ViewZoomAll
11.1.2
Yes
Properties
Now, we will define material and crosssection properties for the beam. First, we launch
the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called Concrete. We specify an
isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 30000 N/mm2 and Poissons ratio
= 0.2.
FX+
Material
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
Structural
Poissons Ratio: 0.2
Constitutive Model
Model Type
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
Subsequently, we launch the Property Manager dialog and create an isotropic property
Beam. We use the Section Library to define a rectangular crosssection.
151
FX+
Crosssection
Property Manager
Create
1D...

Beam
ID: 1
Name: Beam
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Beam
Class I
3D
Material: 1: Concrete
Section
Template...
Section Library
Solid Rectangle
H: 600
B: 400
Offset: Center-Center
OK

Property Manager
11.1.3
OK
Close
Meshing
In the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog we specify a division of four elements along the three lines
of the beam. This results in twelve elements in total for the beam.
Meshing and properties
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
FX+
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the three lines

Seeding Method Number of Divisions: 4
Property: 1
Mesh Set: Beam
OK
including the cross-section, in an isometric view. Therefore we right-click on the Beam
entry in the Pre-Works Tree and choose Show Section in the pop-up menu.
FX+
Model view
View View Point

Pre-Works
Property
Isometric 1
1D Beam
Show Section
The beam clearly shows its dimensions and division in elements [Fig. 11.2].
152
11.1.4
Boundary Conditions
We launch the Constraint dialog to define the supports at the begin and end node of the
beam. At the begin node the displacements uX and uY in axial and vertical direction,
respectively, are constrained (degrees of freedom T1 and T2). The end node is supported
in vertical direction (degree of freedom T2). The display confirms the correct definition
of the supports [Fig. 11.3a].
FX+
Define supports
Boundary Condition Set

Name: Supports
Desc.: Supported nodes
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select begin node

g T2
g T1
Apply
DOF
Select Node(s) Select end node

g T2
OK
DOF
11.1.5
Loading
We apply two unit loads on the beam.

FX+
Define nodal loads

Analysis Load Force
Force Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: Force
Desc.: Nodal loads
Add
Close
Force
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select two nodes
Components
Base Function None
F2 -1
OK
The display confirms the correct definition of the loading [Fig. 11.3b].
11.1.6
Mesh Editor
Via the Analysis menu we launch the Mesh Editor.

Analysis
FX+
In the Mesh Editor we will specify the USRVAL input parameters which will be passed
to the subroutine USRBEA by specifying the USRRBE command.
11.2 Unity Checks
153
(a) supports
(b) loads
Figure 11.3: Supports and loading

Set parameters for user-supplied subroutine
DerResBea.py
setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "USRRBE", "" )

setMaterialParameter( "Concrete", "USRVAL", [ 20, 500, 30, 25, 4, 8, 80e3,
100e3, 0.3 ] )
The USRVAL values will be interpreted as (given in order):

1. characteristic compressive strength concrete = fck
2. characteristic yield stress steel = fyk
3. cover on reinforcement = c
4. diameter reinforcement =
5. number of reinforcement bars = n
6. diameter braces = b
7. Permanent load = Fp
8. Variable load = Fq
9. crackwidth = wk
11.2
Unity Checks
The following checks will be defined:

1. Strength in Ultimate Limit State (ULS)
2. Area of reinforcement
3. Cracking in Serviceability Limit State (SLS)
These checks will be described in the next subparagraphs.
11.2.1
Strength in Ultimate Limit State
This example reflects a case of pure bending. In this case the maximum possible bending
moment Mrd should be larger than the maximum bending moment in Ultimate Limit
State Md . The following procedure can be used to determine Mrd : There should be
equilibrium in crosssection:
Nc = Ns
(11.1)
With Nc the normal force in concrete and Ns the normal force in steel (reinforcement).
154

The maximum normal force in steel occurs when the reinforcement is yielding:
Ns = As fyd
(11.2)
Where As is the area of the reinforcement, and fyd the yield stress.
fcd
Nc
Xu
d
z
Ns
fyd
Figure 11.4: Stress diagram

The maximum normal force in concrete occurs when the ultimate strain in compression
will be reached in the ultimate fiber [Fig. 11.4]. When using the bilinear stressstrain
relation for the concrete in compression, the normal force in the concrete equals:
3
xu fcd b
(11.3)
4
The distance xu for concrete in compression can be calculated using the last three equations:
Nc =
xu =
As fyd
3
4 fcd b
(11.4)
The distance d from ultimate top fiber of the concrete to the location of the reinforcement
can be calculated using the following equation:
1
d = h c r b
2
(11.5)
The distance z between the normal forces Ns and Nc equals

z =d
7
xu
18
(11.6)
For the maximum possible bending moment Mrd holds:

Mrd = As fyd z
(11.7)
Mrd should be larger than the occuring bending moment Md in Ultimate Limit State.
This result in the following unity check:
U CU GT =
11.2.2
Md
Mrd
(11.8)
Area of Reinforcement
We run the analysis with no reinforcement, but we will check the results to see if the
assuming reinforcement will fulfill.
For the required reinforcement area As,req holds:
As,req =
Md
fyd z
(11.9)
For the minimum area holds (Equation 9.1N of Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1):

As,min,1 = 0.26
fctm
b d 0.0013 b d
fyk
(11.10)
11.3 Fortran Code for Subroutine
155
fctm is defined in Table 3.1 of Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1. For concrete grade less equal
C50/60 holds:
2
3
fctm = 0.3fck
(11.11)
As,min,2 = 1.25As,req
(11.12)
The minimum area As,min is the minimum value of As,min,1 and As,min,2 . The unity
check on minimum area reinforcement equals:
As,min
As
(11.13)
As,max = 0.04bh
(11.14)
U CM IN =
For the maximum reinforcement area holds:
This results in the following unity check:

U CM AX =
11.2.3
As
(11.15)
As,max
Cracking in Serviceability Limit State
The checks for cracking are based on the maximum diameter of the reinforcement and
the spacing between the reinforcement. For this we need the stress in the reinforcement:
s =
Mrep As,req
fyd
Md As
(11.16)
This stress will be used in Table 7.2N of Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 to get the maximum
diameter reinforcement for cracking s and in Table 7.3N of Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 to
get the maximum spacing between the reinforcement smax .
s = s
fct,ef f kc hc
2.9 2(h d)
(11.17)
b
n
The following two unity checks can be defined:
s=
U C =
U Cs =
11.3
(11.18)
s
s
(11.19)
smax
Fortran Code for Subroutine
All the equations for the unity checks given in [ 11.2] will be implemented in the user
supplied subroutine USRBEA. A possible implementation for this example is:
usrbea.f90
SUBROUTINE USRBEA( task, labels, usrval, nval, force, moment, elmnr, &
mdpnr, young, poison, ymin, ymax, zmin, zmax,
&
crosse, iy, iz, iyz, it, torsio, curlc, nres,
&
result )
!MS$ !DEC$ ATTRIBUTES DLLEXPORT::USRBEA
!........................................Copyright (c) 2012 TNO DIANA BV
! PURPOSE:
! User-supplied subroutine for definition of derived results for beam
! elements.
!.......................................................................
156
IMPLICIT NONE
CHARACTER*6,
INTEGER,
CHARACTER*6,
INTEGER,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
INTEGER,
INTEGER,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
INTEGER,
DOUBLE PRECISION,
INTENT(IN)
:: task
!
!
INTENT(INOUT) :: nres
!
INTENT(INOUT) :: labels(nres) !
INTENT(IN)
:: nval
!
INTENT(IN)
:: usrval(nval) !
INTENT(IN)
:: force(3)
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: moment(3)
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: elmnr
!
INTENT(IN)
:: mdpnr
!
INTENT(IN)
:: young
!
INTENT(IN)
:: poison
!
INTENT(IN)
:: ymin
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: ymax
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: zmin
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: zmax
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: crosse
!
!
INTENT(IN)
:: iy
!
INTENT(IN)
:: iz
!
INTENT(IN)
:: iyz
!
INTENT(IN)
:: it
!
INTENT(IN)
:: torsio
!
INTENT(IN)
:: curlc
!
INTENT(INOUT) :: result(nres) !
Task: NUMBER, LABELS

or RESULT
Number of results/labels
Result-labels
Number of user parameters
User parameters
Cross-section forces in
midpoint of beam Nx, Qy, Qz
Bending moment in midpoint
of beam Mx, My, Mz
Element number
Mid-point number
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Max distance extreme fiber
(down) to neutral axis
Min distance extreme fiber
(up) to neutral axis
Max distance extreme fiber
(right) to neutral axis
Min distance extreme fiber
(left) to neutral axis
Cross-section of beam at
midpoint
Moment of inertia local IY
Moment of inertia local IZ
Moment of inertia local IYZ
Moment of inertia It
Torsional rigidity Wt
Current loadset number
User-defined result-value
DOUBLE PRECISION
pi
PARAMETER
( pi=3.14159265358979323846D0 )
INTEGER
i, col, row, smax, phis, tab72(8,4), tab73(6,4)
DOUBLE PRECISION h, d, md, mrep, as, fcd, b, xu, fyd, ns, &
z, mrd, fctm, asmin1, asmin2, asb, asmax, sigs,
mindif, dif, s, kc, phisn, asreq
!
!
Table 7.2N, maximum diameter reinforcement

Units N and mm
DATA tab72 / 160, 200, 240, 280, 320, 360, 400, 450, &
40, 32, 20, 16, 12, 10,
8,
6, &
32, 25, 16, 12, 10,
8,
6,
5, &
25, 16, 12,
8,
6,
5,
4,
0 /
!
!
Table 7.3N,
Units N and
DATA tab73 / 160,
300,
300,
200,
&
maximum spacing reinforcement

mm
200, 240, 280, 320, 360, &
300, 250, 200, 150, 100, &
250, 200, 150, 100, 50, &
150, 100, 50,
0,
0 /
IF
( task .EQ. NUMBER ) THEN

IN THIS BLOCK ONLY NRES MAY BE DEFINED AS OUTPUT
INPUT ARGUMENTS OTHER THEN TASK MAY NOT BE USED
nres = 5
ELSE IF ( task .EQ. LABELS ) THEN
!
IN THIS BLOCK ONLY LABELS MAY BE DEFINED AS OUTPUT
!
!
11.3 Fortran Code for Subroutine
157
INPUT ARGUMENTS OTHER THEN TASK MAY NOT BE USED

labels(1) = UC-UGT
labels(2) = UC-MIN
labels(3) = UC-MAX
labels(4) = UC-PHI
labels(5) = UC-S
ELSE IF ( task .EQ. RESULT ) THEN
!
IN THIS BLOCK ONLY RESULTS MAY BE DEFINED AS OUTPUT
!
ALL INPUT ARGUMENTS MAY BE USED
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
usrval(1)
usrval(2)
usrval(3)
usrval(4)
usrval(5)
usrval(6)
usrval(7)
usrval(8)
usrval(9)
!
!
!
!
DERIVED INPUT PARAMETERS

This application is only applicable for concrete (grade < C50/60)
Other formulas are required for high strength concrete
(grade > C50/60)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
characteristic compressive strength concrete

characteristic yield stress steel
cover
diameter reinforcement
number of reinforcement bars
diameter shearforce reinforcement
permanent load
variable load
crackwidth
Material properties
fcd = usrval(1) / 1.5D0
!
!
fctm = 0.3D0 * usrval(1)**( 2.D0 / 3.D0) !
!
fyd = usrval(2) / 1.15D0
!
!
design value compression

strength concrete
mean value tensile strength
concrete
design value yield stress
reinforcement
Loadfactors
md
= ABS( moment(3) * ( usrval(7)*1.2D0 + usrval(8)*1.5D0 ) )
mrep = ABS( moment(3) * ( usrval(7)*1.D0 + usrval(8)*1.D0 ) )
!
!
!
Unity checks on strength ultimate limit state

Equilibrium in cross section: Nc = Ns
Steel
as = pi * (usrval(4)/2)**2 * usrval(5)
ns = as * fyd
Concrete
b = zmax - zmin
h = ymax - ymin
d = h - usrval(3) - 0.5D0*usrval(4) - usrval(6)
Using bi-linear stress-strain relation concrete, compression
Nc = 3/4 * xu * Fcd * b
xu = ns / ( fcd * b * 3.D0 / 4.D0 )
z
= d - xu * 7.D0 / 18.D0
mrd = as * fyd * Z
!
!
Condition: MD < MRD

result(1) = md / mrd ! Unity check UC_BGT
Unity checks on area reinforcement

asreq = md / (fyd * z)
Minimum reinforcement area
asmin1 = 0.26D0 * fctm * b * d / ( usrval(2)*1.15D0 )
asb
= 0.0013D0 * b * d
IF ( asmin1 .LT. asb ) asmin1 = asb
asmin2 = 1.25D0 * asreq
158
!
!
Condition: as > asmin

Unity check UC_ASMIN = asmin / as
IF ( asmin1 .LT. asmin2 ) THEN
result(2) = asmin1 / as
ELSE
result(2) = asmin2 / as
END IF
Maximum reinforcement area

asmax = 0.04D0 * b * h
Condition: as < asmax

result(3) = as / asmax ! Unity check UC_ASMAX
!
!
Servicebility stage
Unity checks on cracking
sigs = ( mrep / md ) * ( asreq / as ) * fyd
Which
IF (
col =
ELSE IF
col =
ELSE
col =
END IF
column in table, depending on wk (=usrval(9))

usrval(9) .GT. 0.35D0 ) THEN
2
( usrval(9) .GT. 0.25D0 ) THEN
3
4
Find row in table (closest value for stress in steel SIGS)

mindif = fyd
row
= 8
! Set row for case dif larger then ABS( tab72(8,1)-sigs )
DO 100, I = 1, 8
dif = ABS( tab72(I,1) - sigs )
IF ( dif .lt. mindif ) THEN
mindif = dif
row
= i
END IF
100 CONTINUE
phis = tab72(row,col)
!
!
Values first column table 7.3N are equal to table 7.2N

Only table 7.2N has 8 rows and table 7.3N 6 rows
smax = tab73(MIN(6,row),col)
!
!
Check on maximum diameter reinforcement

FORMULA 7.6N:
phisn = phis * ( fctm / 2.9D0 ) * 0.5D0 * h / ( 2.D0 * (h - d) )
!
!
Condition: phisn > usrval(4)

Unity check UC_PHIS
result(4) = usrval(4) / phisn
Check on maximum spacing reinforcement

s = b / usrval(5)
Condition: s < smax
Unity check UC_S
result(5) = s / smax
!
!
ELSE
CALL my_prgerr( USRBEA, 2 )
END IF
END SUBROUTINE USRBEA
11.4 Analysis
159
SUBROUTINE my_prgerr( routin, errnr )

!........................................Copyright (c) 2012 TNO DIANA BV
! PURPOSE:
! Print error message and stop
!.......................................................................
IMPLICIT NONE
INTEGER,
CHARACTER*(*),
INTENT(IN)
INTENT(IN)
:: errnr
:: routin
! Error number
! Routine name
PRINT *, Severe program error in routine , routin, code = , errnr

STOP
END SUBROUTINE my_prgerr
The bending moments are multiplied using loading factors because unit loads are applied
on the model. There are five unity checks defined with the following labels:
UC-UGT
UC-MIN
UC-MAX
UC-PHI
UC-S
11.4
Analysis
The commands for the linear analysis could be as follows.

beam.dcf
*FORTRAN
USE "usrbea.dll"
*LINSTA
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRESS TOTAL USRRBE
END OUTPUT
*END
11.5
Results
To assess the results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files.
FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
Beam.dpb
Open
Import
In FX+ we can create contour plots to check if the unity checks have values equal or less
than 1.0. In this example all the unity checks have values less than 1.0. So the assumed
crosssection of the beam and the reinforcement fulfill all performed unity checks.
160
Figure 11.5: Unity check Ultimate Limit State
11.5.1
Strength in Ultimate Limit State
The unity checks on the strength in Ultimate Limit State are given in Figure 11.5.
11.5.2
Area of Reinforcement
The unity checks on the minimum area of reinforcement are given in Figure 11.6.
Figure 11.6: Unity check minimum area of reinforcement

The unity checks on the maximum area of reinforcement are given in Figure 11.7.
11.5.3
Cracking in Serviceability Limit State
The unity checks on the maximum reinforcement diameter are given in Figure 11.8.
The unity checks on the reinforcement spacing are given in Figure 11.9.
11.5 Results
161
Figure 11.7: Unity check maximum area of reinforcement
Figure 11.8: Unity check reinforcement diameter
162
Figure 11.9: Unity check reinforcement spacing
Chapter 12
Cablestayed Bridge
Installation
Name:
Cable
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/Cable
Keywords:
analys: geomet nonlin phase.

constr: suppor.
elemen: cable cl6tr truss.
load: deform elemen equiac prestr.
option: direct groups lagran newton regula total units.
result: displa force reacti stress total.
In this example it is demonstrated how the installation forces at the ends of a cable and
the forces in the cable of a cable-stayed bridge develop during installation. The following
stages are distinguished:
Initially the cable is pending at one end and the gravity load is applied.
The pending end of the cable is moved a little sidewards and then elevated to the
level of the bridge-deck from where it is moved to the installation point.
A cable protection cover is applied.
A vertical displacement at the installation point is prescribed to calculate the operational forcedisplacement relation.
A phased geometrically nonlinear analysis will be performed.
12.1
Preparing the finite element model
We open a new project in FX+, set an appropriate view, and save the project as Cable.fdb
via the following commands.
FX+
Initiate a new model

File New
View View Point Normal
File Save
Save As File name: Cable.fdb
Save
the model is going to be defined. For this example we choose [N,m].
12.1.1
Geometry
We will define the model of the cable with a vertical line having a length of 75 m.
164
Cablestayed Bridge Installation

FX+
Define the cable geometry

Geometry
2D Line
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Line...
Location: 0,0
Location: 0,75
12.1.2
Material properties
We will define material properties for the cable which we assume to be made of steel.
After launching the Material Manager dialog and creating a new material called Steel, we
specify an isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 200109 N/m2 , Poissons
ratio = 0.2, and mass density = 7850 kg/m3 .
Define the material properties
FX+
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Steel
Structural
Poissons Ratio: 0.2
Mass Density: 7850
Elastic
OK
Close
12.1.3
Physical properties
Now we launch the Property Manager dialog and create a property Cable for a truss model
with a crosssectional area of 300 mm2 . We also attach the material Steel to this property.
Define the physical properties
Property Manager
Create
FX+
1D...

Truss
ID: 1
Name: Cable
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Cable
Cable
2D
Material 1: Steel
Cross Sectional Area: 300E-6
OK
Close
12.1.4
Mesh generation
We divide the line in 20 equally sized elements.
12.1 Preparing the finite element model
165
FX+
Create a mesh
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s)
Select the line
Property: 1: Cable
Mesh Set: Cable
OK
Via the Change Element Parameters dialog we change the order parameter to quadratic.
We select the entire mesh, for instance by dragging a selection window around it in the
Work Window display. Then we get a mesh with node numbers as displayed in [Fig. 12.1].
Change element order to quadratic
Pre-Works
Mesh
FX+
Show All

Change
Order
Quadratic
Select Element(s)
Select entire mesh
OK
Figure 12.1: Mesh with node numbers
12.1.5
Prestress and dead weight loads
We define three load cases with FX+. Four additional load cases will be created later on
with Mesh Editor. The three load cases that will be defined here comprise a prestress
load, the dead weight of the cable and the dead weight of the cable cover. The prestress
load is applied since in geometrically nonlinear analysis truss elements must always be
stressed.
Define load sets for prestress and dead weight
Analysis Load
Load Set
FX+
Set...
Name: Prestress
Desc.: Initial stress
166

Add
Name: Cable weight

Desc.: Dead weight of cable
Add
Name: Cover weight

Desc.: Dead weight of cable cover
Add
Close
For the initial stress a value of 1.0E5 is applied, which we consider small compared to the
stresses due to the dead weight load.
FX+
Define the initial stress

Analysis Load
Prestress
Prestress...
Load Set Prestress

Truss / Beam
Element Type
Object
Type
Element
Select Element(s)
Prestress
Axial:
Select all elements
1E5
OK
Subsequently, we define the dead weight load of the cable.

FX+
Define the dead weight of the cable

Analysis Load
Body Force
Body Force...
Load Set Cable weight

Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: -10.0 G3: 0
OK
The Cover load case represents the weight of the protection cover of the cable. This
load is -72 N/m, which is applied to the cable as an additional gravity load of G2 =
-72/(density*crosssection) = -72/(7850*3E-4) = -30.5.
FX+
Define the dead weight of the protection cover

Analysis Load
Body Force
Body Force...
Load Set Cover weight

Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: -30.5 G3: 0
OK
12.2
Finalizing the finite element model
We will finalize the finite element model using Mesh Editor. Three placements and an
operation load are to be defined as well as the boundary conditions. First we save the
model in FX+ and we launch Mesh Editor from FX+, which transfers the model to the
Mesh Editor of Diana.
Save the file and launch Mesh Editor
FX+
File Save
Analysis Edit model with Diana mesh-editor
12.3 Phased Analysis
12.2.1
167
Imposed deformations
Now we add three placements and an operation load in terms of prescribed displacements
to the bottom end node. In the first placement a horizontal displacement of 5 m and
an upward displacement of 1 m are prescribed. If we would move the lower end purely
horizontal it would lead to undesired and unrealistic tensile stresses in the cable. To avoid
that the horizontal displacement is accompanied by a small upward displacement. In the
second placement, the lower end-node is moved 29 m upward to the bridge deck level.
Subsequently, in the third placement the lower end-node is moved 48 m sidewards, such
that the end-point is still within the original distance of 75 m from the top end point.
Finally, the operation load consists of a vertical displacement of 1 m downwards.
Define the placements and operation load
Cable.py
addLoadCase( "Placement1" )
addDeformationLoad( "Placement1", 5, 1, TR, [ 1 ] )
addLoadCase( "Operation" )
addDeformationLoad( "Operation", -1, 2, TR, [ 1 ] )
12.2.2
Boundary conditions
We will create two support sets: one at the top end of the cable and another one at the
lower end of the cable. The first one is permanently active: the cable is pending from
this support. The other one is used in the second load phase which involves prescribed
displacements and thus requires supports at the end that is displaced.
Define the supports
Cable.py
addSupportSet( "Top" )
addSupport( "Top", TR, [ 1, 2 ], [ 21 ] )
addSupportSet( "Bottom" )
addSupport( "Bottom", TR, [ 1, 2 ], [ 1 ] )
12.3
Phased Analysis
A command file is defined in which the different load cases are applied subsequently in
a geometrically nonlinear phased analysis. In the first phase the prestress is applied
without any steps being executed. Next, the dead weigh tof the cable is applied in a
single step. In the second phase the additional supports are activated and the prescribed
displacements are subsequently applied. Note that the stresses in the cable calculated in
the first phase are copied at the start of the second phase. Next, the first placement is
applied in three steps. Then the second placement is applied in 50 increments followed
by the third placement which is applied in five increments. The analysis is concluded
by the application of the cable cover and the operation load. For each analysis step
the displacements, forces in the crosssection of the cable and the reaction forces are
calculated and exported to a FX+ result file.
Analysis commands
cable.dcf
*PHASE
ACTIVE SUPPOR "Top"
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
PHYSIC OFF
168

GEOMET
END TYPE
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
STRESS FORCE
FORCE REACTI
END OUTPUT
EXECUT START INITIA STRESS INPUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 2
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 1.0 /
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
*PHASE
ACTIVE SUPPOR "Top" "Bottom"
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
PHYSIC OFF
GEOMET
END TYPE
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
STRESS FORCE
FORCE REACTI
END OUTPUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=2
STEPS EXPLIC SIZE 1.0
END START
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 4
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.0 1.0 /
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 5
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.02(50) /
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
12.4 Analysis Results
169
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 6
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.2(5) /
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 3
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 7
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON=1.e-6
FORCE TOLCON=1.e-6
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
END ITERAT
END EXECUTE
*END
The above displayed command file can be loaded and run with the following Python
commands.
Load commands and run the analysis
Cable.py
newAnalysis( "Cable" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Cable", "Cable.dcf" )
runSolver( "Cable" )
12.4
Analysis Results
To assess the results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file Cable.dpb.
FX+
Import result files

Open
File Name: Cable.dpb
Post File Import
12.4.1
Add...
Open
Import
Reaction Forces
For the specific stages of the installation we will check the reaction forces at the end
nodes.
170

12.4.1.1
Dead Weight Load
The total reaction force after applying the initial stresses and the dead weight load, load
step 1 of phase 1, in combination with the deformed shape of the mesh is displayed in
[Fig. 12.2].
FX+
Reaction forces
Post Data
Analysis Set Structural Phased Nonlinear

Output Set Load Step 1, Phase 1(1)
Data Filter Reactions
Result Data Type FBXYZ(V)
g Deformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties Deformation
Actual Deformation
True
Apply
The reaction force is 1766 N. This is equal to density * area * length * gravity acceleration
Figure 12.2: Reaction force after applying the dead weight load
(7850 3 104 75 10 = 1766 N).
12.4.1.2
Placement 1
At the end of the first placement, load step 3 of phase 2, the reaction force at the top end
node is slightly less than after the dead weight load. Furthermore, it can be seen that the
reaction force at the lower end node is more or less horizontally oriented [Fig. 12.3].
Reaction forces
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Load Step 3, Phase 2(1)
Apply
171
Figure 12.3: Reaction forces at the end of the first placement

12.4.1.3
Placement 2
During the second placement the cable is pending between the two ends. Please note that
the reaction forces rotated with the end directions of the cable ends, what illustrates the
geometrical nonlinear character of the analysis as can be seen in load step 11 of phase 2
in [Fig. 12.4].
Reaction forces
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Load Step 11, Phase 2(0.16)
Apply
Phase 2, step 53 is the situation at the end of the second placement, where a considerable
Figure 12.4: Reaction forces at an early stage of the second placement
172

part of the cable weight is now carried by the lower end node and therefore the reaction
force at the top end node reaches the minimum value in this situation [Fig. 12.5].
FX+
Reaction forces
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
Figure 12.5: Reaction forces at the end of the second placement
12.4.1.4
Placement 3
In the subsequent 5 load-steps the lower end-node is moved to the installation point.
[Fig. 12.6] shows the reaction forces at the end of the third placement, load step 58 of
phase 2.
Reaction forces
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
12.4.1.5
Applying the Protection Cover
At load step 59 of phase 2 the protection cover is applied, which seems to have only
minimal effect on the shape of the cable but leads to reaction forces that are roughly four
times higher than without the cover applied [Fig. 12.7].
Reaction forces
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
173
Figure 12.6: Reaction forces at the end of the third placement
Figure 12.7: Reaction forces after applying the cover

12.4.1.6
Operation
In the last step, load step 60 of phase 2, the lower installation point is moved downward 1
m which leads to an increase of the lower reaction force from 6269 N to 8201 N [Fig. 12.8].
Reaction forces
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
174
Figure 12.8: Reaction forces at operation
12.4.2
Cable Force Distribution
For the specific stages of the installation we will also check the force distribution in the
cable.
12.4.2.1
Dead Weight
[Fig. 12.9] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution after the dead weight load is
applied, load step 1 of phase 1.
Cable force distribution
FX+
Post Data
Analysis Set Structural Phased Nonlinear

Output Set Load Step 1, Phase 1(1)
Result Data Type Nx
g Deformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Actual Deformation
True
Apply
12.4.2.2
Placement 1
[Fig. 12.10] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution at then end of the first
placement, load step 3 of phase 2.
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
175
Figure 12.9: Cable force distribution after applying the dead weight load
Figure 12.10: Cable force distribution at the end of the first placement
12.4.2.3
Placement 2
[Fig. 12.11] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution at an early stage of the
second placement, load step 11 of phase 2.
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Load Step 11, Phase 2(0.16)
Apply
[Fig. 12.12] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution at the end of the second
FX+
176
Figure 12.11: Cable force distribution at an early stage of the second placement
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
Figure 12.12: Cable force distribution at the end of the second placement
12.4.2.4
Placement 3
[Fig. 12.13] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution at the end of the third
FX+
Post Data

Output Set
177
Apply
Figure 12.13: Cable force distribution at the end of the third placement
12.4.2.5
Applying the Protection Cover
[Fig. 12.14] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution after applying the protection
cover, load step 59 of phase 2.
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
12.4.2.6
Operation
[Fig. 12.15] shows the diagram of the cable force distribution at operation, load step 60
of phase 2.
FX+
Post Data
Output Set
Apply
178
Figure 12.14: Cable force distribution after applying the cover
Figure 12.15: Cable force distribution at operation
Chapter 13
Shear-force Failure of
Reinforced Concrete Beam
Name:
Beam8
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/Beam8
Keywords:

class: large.
constr: suppor.
load: force node.
materi: crack elasti harden hordyk isotro rotati soften thoren totstr.
option: arclen direct groups linese newton normal regula select units update.
result: crack displa green strain total.
In the CEBFIB bulletin 237 written by Kuchma et al. [12] and also in ACI Structural
Journal [6] it is illustrated that traditional design methods are restricted in the assessment
of the shear force strength of longitudinal reinforced concrete beams. In this example one
of the experiments addressed (experiment SE50A45/SE50A45R) in this publication is
used as reference for a failure analysis of a fourpoints bending of reinforced concrete
beam.
Figure 13.1: Dimensions of beam with supports and loading
180
Shear-force Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam

The beam has the dimensions lengthheightthickness of 5000 500 169 mm and has
two loading points at the top and two support points at the bottom, as displayed in
Figure 13.1. There are sixteen reinforcement bars in the beam.
13.1
Finite element model
We open a new project in FX+ and save the project as Beam8.fdb. Furthermore, we
adjust the view point to top, because we will use the default XY work plane.
FX+
Start a new model

File New
File Save
Save As
File Name: Beam8.fdb

Save
View
View Point
Top
Note that in the lowerright corner of the Main Window FX+ shows the units in which
the model is going to be defined. For this example we choose [N,mm].
13.1.1
Beam Geometry
We create six surfaces to model the concrete beam [Fig. 13.2].

FX+
Beam geometry
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
View
Zoom
13.1.2
Location: -1350,50
Location: 200,500
Location: -1150,50
Location: 1150,500
Location: 0,50
Location: 1150,500
Location: 1150,50
Location: 1150,500
Location: 2300,50
Location: 1150,500
Location: 3450,50
Location: 200,500
All
Reinforcement Geometry
Now we will define the lines for the definition of the reinforcement bars. There will be 16
bars in the model, of which 8 at the frontside and 8 at the backside. We will model only
8 bars and double the crosssection value for each bar, because we will use a membrane
element formulation. Of these 8 bars, 4 which will be across the full length of the concrete
beam and 4 will be positioned locally [Fig. 13.1].
13.1 Finite element model
181
Figure 13.2: Geometry: Six surfaces

FX+
Reinforcement Geometry
Geometry
Line
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Line...
-1350,77
5000,0
-1350,105
5000,0
-1350,495
5000,0
-1350,523
5000,0
-500,495
1000,0
-500,523
1000,0
1800,77
1000,0
1800,105
1000,0
We change the color for the last four lines to red [Fig. 13.3].
Figure 13.3: Geometry of reinforcement
13.1.3
Support and Loading Plates Geometry
We have to define the surfaces in which we can create the support and loading plates to
complete the geometry [Fig. 13.4].
Support and loading plates geometry
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
FX+
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
182

Method ABS x,y
Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
Location: -1200,550
Location: 100,50
Location: -50,0
Location: 100,50
Location: 2250,550
Location: 100,50
Location: 3400,0
Location: 100,50
Figure 13.4: Complete geometry
13.1.4
Material Properties
The material specifications of the concrete are fcm = 53N/mm2 with an aggregate size of
10 mm, see Kuchma et al. [12].
The material parameters can be defined using the CEB-FIB Model Code 1990 [4]. We
use the average values for the tensile strength and Youngs modulus to simulate this
experiment:
fcm = fck + f
(13.1)
2
fctm = fctk0,m
fck 3
fck0
(13.2)
fcm 3
Ec = Ec0
fcm0
(13.3)
The crack energy Gf will also be defined using the CEB-FIB Model Code 1990.
Gf = Gf0
fcm 0.7
fcm0
(13.4)
With the material properties as specified in Table 13.1. The value of Gf0 is related to the
maximum aggregate size Dmax [Table 13.2]. The crack bandwidth is mesh dependent and
will be defined automatically when the user does not specify this parameter explicitly.
The required crack bandwidth will be based on half of the element area. In this case the
crack energy Gf should be multiplied with a factor two when using the default value for
the crack bandwidth and the 2 2 integration scheme.
We assume a rotating total strain crack model for the concrete, with the Hordyk [9] model
for tensile strains and the Thorenfeldt [15] model for compressive strains. The parameters
for the rotating total strain crack model are presented in Table 13.3.
If you define the material properties using the Eurocode 2, almost the same values will
be found as can be seen in Table 13.4.
183
Table 13.1: Material parameters

fck
f
fctk0
fctk0,m
Ec0
fcm
45
8
10
1.40
21500
10
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm2
Table 13.2: Maximum aggregate size dependent crack energy

Dmax [mm]
8
16
32
Gf 0 [J/m2 ]
25
30
58
Table 13.3: Material parameters for total strain crack model

Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Tensile strength
Crack-energy
Compressive strength
Ec
fctm
Gf
fcm
37483
0.15
3.82
0.169
53
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm
N/mm2
Table 13.4: Material parameters according to Eurocode 2

Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Tensile strength
Crack-energy
Ec
fctm
Gf
fcm
36000
0.15
3.8
0.169
53
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm
N/mm2
For the steel reinforcement we assume linear elastic material model with Youngs modulus
Ec = 210000 N/mm2 , and Poisson ratio = 0.15.
In FX+ we define the following material definitions for the concrete and steel.
FX+
Materials
Text Input
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
YOUNG 37483
POISON 0.15
TOTCRK ROTATE
TENCRV HORDYK
TENSTR 3.82
GF1 0.169
COMCRV THOREN
COMSTR 53.0
Apply
Isotropic
ID: 2
Name: Steel
Structural
Elastic Modulus: 210.E3
Elastic
184

OK
Close
FX+
Concrete thickness
Property Manager
Create
2D...

2D Plane Stress
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
Data ID: 1 Data Name: DataCon
Regular
Thickness: 169
Apply
2D Plane Stress
ID: 2
Name: Steel
Data ID: 2 Data Name: DataSteel
Regular
Material 2: Steel
Thickness: 169
OK
Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

ID: 3
Reinforcement Bar
Name: Bar
Data ID: 3 Data Name: DataBar

Material 2: Steel
Cross Sectional Area: 400
Apply
ID: 4
Name: Section
Data ID: 4 Data Name: DataSection
Curved Shape
OK Close
13.1.5
Meshing
Using the geometry surfaces we will create the mesh for the concrete beam and for the
steel plates 13.5.
FX+
Meshing
Mesh Map Mesh
Map-Mesh Face
Face...
Select Face(s) Select the 6 concrete surfaces
Element Size
Element Size 25
Property: 1: Concrete
Mesh Set
Name: Concrete beam
Map-Mesh Face
Apply
Select Face(s) Select the 4 steel surfaces
Element Size
Element Size 25
Property: 2: Steel
Mesh Set
Name: Steel plates
OK
Because we want to work with quadratic elements we have the change the element order
from linear to higher order elements.
185
Figure 13.5: Mesh for concrete beam and steel plates

FX+
Quadratic elements
Change
Order
Select all elements
Quadratic
Select Element(s)
OK
Now we will generate the mesh for the reinforcement bars.

FX+
Meshing reinforcement bar sections

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s)
Select the first reinforcement line
Property
4: Section
g Reinforcement
Type Bar in Plane Stress

3: Bar
Mesh Set
Name: Bar 1
Apply
Select Edge(s)
Mesh Set
Select the second reinforcement line
Name: Bar 2
Apply
...
Select Edge(s)
Mesh Set
Select the last reinforcement line
Name: Bar 8
OK
13.1.6
Boundary Conditions
Before we can run the analysis we have to set the Boundary Constraints [Fig. 13.6].
FX+
Define supports
BC Set
Name: Supports
Desc.: Bottom supports
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the bottom node at the right support plate
g T2
Apply
DOF
Select Node(s)
g T1
g T2
DOF
Select the bottom node at the left support plate

OK
186
Via the Constraint and BC Set dialogs we create a new set of boundary constraints.
For the bottom node at the middle of the right support plate we support the vertical
displacement uY (degree of freedom T2). For the bottom node at the middle of the
left support plate we support the horizontal and vertical displacements uX,Y (degrees of
freedom T1 and T2).
13.1.7
Loading
At the top node at the middle of the left loading plate we apply a force of -1000 N in
vertical direction. At the top node at the middle of the right loading plate we apply a
force of -2000 N in vertical direction.
FX+
Define nodal loads

Analysis Load Force
Force Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: Force
Desc.: Nodal loads
Add
Close
Loads
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s)
Select the top node at the left loading plate
Components

Base Function None
F2 -1000
Apply
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the top node at the right loading plate
Components
Base Function None
F2 -2000
OK
The display confirms the correct definition of the loading [Fig. 13.7].
13.2
Nonlinear Analysis
Via the Analysis menu we choose Run Diana with command-file, because the model is
already completely defined in FX+.
13.2 Nonlinear Analysis
187
Figure 13.7: Loading

Run Diana with command-file
Analysis
FX+
Run Diana with command-file
The following Diana commands will be used for running the analysis:
Analysis commands
Beam8.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
STRAIN CRACK GREEN
END OUTPUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
ENERGY CONTIN TOLCON=1.E-4
FORCE OFF
END CONVER
MAXITE 80
LINESE
END ITERAT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 1
BEGIN STEPS
BEGIN EXPLIC
SIZES 5.(10) 1.(110)
BEGIN ARCLEN UPDATE
BEGIN REGULA
BEGIN SET
NODES 4244 4254
TYPE TRANSL
DIRECT 2
ALPHA 1.0
END SET
END REGULA
END ARCLEN
END EXPLIC
END STEPS
END LOAD
END EXECUT
*END
Crack strains and displacements in the nodes will be calculated as FX+ results. In the
188

nonlinear iteration process we use a line search scheme with a more tight convergence
criterion of ENERGY 0.0001 to make sure that the solution is accurate enough. Further
we use the arclength option with respect to the vertical displacement of the two loading
points.
13.3
Results
To assess these results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files.
FX+
File Open...
Open File Name
Beam8.fdb
Open

Post File Import
Post Model File
...
Post Result Files
Open
Add...
File Name
Open
Beam8.dmb
File Name
Open
Beam8.dpb
Open
Import
When the analysis has been run we first make a graph of the loading factor as function
of the vertical displacement in the right loading node. We display these results in Excel
[Fig. 13.8].
Load displacement diagram
FX+

Extract Result
Output Data
Ref. Step Load Step 1 (5)
Data TDtY(V)
User-Defined
Select right loading node
Table Close
Table
Node Select all cells of column
Ctrl
The indicated Experimental failure load is the load reported in the reference papers by
Kuchma et al. [12] and Collins et al. [6]. The failure load equals 68.6 kN in the first test,
and 80.5 kN in the second test.
At three loading points we want to look at the crackpattern. These points are just
after the start of the crack localization (step 29, the first step at which the load factor
decreases), at the maximum loading (step 98) and at the last step (step 120).
Crack pattern
FX+
Post Data

Output Set Load Step 29(61.266)
Data Filter 2D Element Crack Pattern
Result Data Type Eknn
g Deformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties Contour
Max/Min Value On/Off True

Max Value 0.1
Min Value 0.000001
Out Of Range Part Exclude
Number of Levels 3
Apply
13.3 Results
189
Figure 13.8: Load displacement diagram
We set in the contour properties definition the Max/Min Value On/Off to TRUE with a
maximum value of 0.1 and a minimum value of 0.000001 and exclude the out of range part,
such that noncracked elements will not be colored. Furthermore, we set in the contour
properties definition the number of levels to 3 and shift in the legend the intermediate
values to 0.001 and 0.003 [Fig. 13.9].
Figure 13.9: Crack pattern just after the start of the crack localization
The same pictures are generated for load steps 98 [Fig. 13.10] and 120 [Fig. 13.11].
The crack strain pictures for the respective load steps show very nice the initial bending
smeared crack failure, resulting in s slight loss of stiffness, followed by crack localization
around step 29, resulting in a snap back in the stiffness curve. Additional loading can be
carried after initial crack localization with increasing opening of the bending cracks, until
bending cracks transform into shear cracks (diagonally oriented), which lead to a definite
decrease of the load carrying capacity of the beam.
Using the mean tensile strength as described above will give the average value of the
failure load. If the lower bound value of the characteristic tensile strength will be applied,
the lower bound value will be found. The lower bound value of the characteristic tensile
190
Figure 13.10: Crack pattern at maximum loading
Figure 13.11: Crack pattern at end of analysis

strength fctk,min will be used for the tensile strength :
2
fctk,min
fck 3
= fctk0,min
fck0
(13.5)
With: fctk0 = 10N/mm2 and fctk0,min = 0.95N/mm2 . If the tensile strength will be reduced, the crack energy Gf divided by the crack bandwidth h (=area under stress-strain
diagram) should be reduced with the same factor as the tensile strength. So the crack
energy Gf will be reduced to 0.115.
After changing in the Mesh Editor in the Material definition for the concrete the
value of the tensile strength fctk,min (TENSTR=2.59 N/mm2 ) and the crack energy Gf
(GF1=0.115 N/mm) we rerun the analysis. Figure 13.12 displays the loaddisplacement
diagrams for the analysis with the average values and for the analysis with the characteristic values for tensile strength and crack energy. The experimental and calculated
maximum load factor give good agreement. Looking in the output file you can see that
the concrete did not crush under compression. No plasticity occurs in the model.
13.3 Results
191
192
Chapter 14
Geometrically Nonlinear
Analysis of a Cantilever Plate
Name:
GeoNLPlate
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/GeoNLPlate
Keywords:
analys: geomet nonlin.

constr: suppor.
elemen: cq40s curved shell.
load: edge elemen moment.
result: displa total.
Figure 14.1: Cantilever plate with end moment

This example demonstrates a geometrically nonlinear analysis of a cantilever plate which
is clamped at one end and a distributed bending moment load is applied at the other
end, in such a manner that the plate is bent into a circular form as described by Argyris
et al. [2], see Figure 14.1. The applied loading will result in large rotations, but small
strains. The geometric and material properties are as follows:
Geometric data:
Length l = 100 cm
Width b = 20 cm
Thickness or depth t = 0.5 cm
Material data:
Youngs modulus E = 2.1 109 lbf/cm2 (pound force/cm2 )
Poissons ratio = 0.33
194
Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Plate
14.1
FX+
File New
View View Point
Top
We choose a Top view via the View menu to get a viewing direction perpendicular to
the XY plane. Alternatively we could click the corresponding icon in the Tool Bar. The
Work Window now shows an Untitled tab with in-plane X and Y axes. Note that in
the lower-right corner of the Main Window FX+ shows the units in which the model is
going to be defined. For this example we choose [lbf, cm].
14.1.1
Model Geometry
We will first specify and draw the contours of the cantilever plate. Exploiting the symmetry of the problem we will model half of the cantilever plate i.e. the width is considered
10 cm instead of 20 cm. The contours of the cantilever plate can easily be defined by
using the Rectangle dialog, to be launched via the Geometry menu.
FX+
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Method
Method
View
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Zoom
14.1.2
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
Location: 0,0
Location: 100,10
All
Properties
Now we will define material and geometric properties. We launch the Material Manager
dialog and create a new material called IsoMat. We specify the isotropic elastic material
with Youngs modulus E = 2.1 109 lbf/cm2 and Poissons ratio = 0.33.
FX+
Material properties
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: IsoMat
Structural
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Property Manager dialog and create a geometric property GeoPlate for a
regular curved shell model with a flat configuration and a uniform thickness t = 0.5 cm.
We also attach the material IsoMat to this property.
FX+
Geometric properties
Property Manager
Create
2D...

Curved Shell
Data ID: 1
Flat
ID: 1
Name: GeoPlate
Data Name: GeoPlate
195
Regular
Material 1: IsoMat
Thickness: 5.0
OK
Property Manager
14.1.3
Close
Meshing
Now that the geometry and material properties have been defined completely we may
continue with the meshing procedure. We launch the Auto-Mesh Planar Area dialog.
FX+
Auto meshing
Select Edge(s) Select all (4) edges

Element Size: 10
Mesh Size
Property: 1
GeoPlate
Advanced Options
Advanced Options
g Generate Mid-side Nodes
OK

Preview
OK
The dialog requires that we indicate the geometric parts of the model that must be
meshed. In this case we must select the complete model, for instance by dragging a
selection box around it in the Work Plane. Note that a total of four edges are selected
which comprise the complete contour. We set the element size to 10, select the property
GeoPlate. Now we click on Advanced Options and check Generate Mid-Side Nodes so
that quadratic curved shell elements are generated. We leave the other choices as default
and press OK and get back to the previous dialog box. We can click Preview to check
whether the nodes to be created are properly distributed along the edges. Once we agree
with the mesh, we click OK to get the mesh generated.
14.1.4
To define the boundary constraints (supports) we launch the Constraint dialog.

FX+
Supports
Analysis BC
Constraint
Constraint...
BC Set ...
Name: Clamped
Desc.: Clamped end
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select 3 nodes at left end
Fixed
Apply
BC Set ...
Name: Symmetry
Desc.: Symmetry edge
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Symmetry
Node
Plane
Select Node(s) Select all remaining nodes of the top edge
31
Ok
We select the nodes at the left edge of the plate (where it should be clamped) by drawing nets around them, thereby we select 3 nodes. For the selected nodes we specify a
Fixed constraint, i.e., the translation and the rotations in the three XY Z-directions are
196

suppressed. The supports appear as red arrows for the translational constraints and blue
double arrows for the rotational constraints at each of the selected nodes. Next we will
apply the symmetry boundary condition on the remaining 20 nodes of the upper edge
using the symmetry plane 31.
14.1.5
Loading
We apply distributed edge moment -1000 lbf.cm/cm at the free end of the cantilever plate
in the global Y direction so that it deflects the cantilever plate in the positive global Z
direction.
FX+
Define edge moment load

Analysis Load Distributed Moment
Distributed Moment Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: End moment
Desc.: Distributed edge moment
Add
Close
Distributed Moment
Type Edge Distributed Moment
Object Type 2D Element Edge
Select Elements(s) Select edge at right end
g Uniform
M or M1: -1000
OK
View
View Point
Isometric 1
Figure 14.2 confirms the correct definition of the constraints and loading.
Figure 14.2: Constraints and loading
14.2
Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis
Via the Analysis menu we choose Diana to launch the Mesh Editor. The model is
automatically imported by Mesh Editor. Now via the Analysis Setup dialog we choose
14.2 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis
197
for a Structural Nonlinear analysis with the following specifications for the cantilever
plate:
Run nonlinear analysis
Analysis
Status
Mesh Editor
Run...
Diana
Type Structural nonlinear
Label: Cantilever plate with end moment
OK
Diana
Structural nonlinear Edit...
Structural nonlinear Settings
Type
Physically nonlinear
g Geometrically nonlinear
Execut
g new execut block
Load
Steps Settings
Execute load steps
Steps
Load set Load 1

g Execute load steps
User specified sizes 1.5(1000)

Iteration
Convergence norm
Displacement
g Force Settings
Convergence Norm
Convergence tolerance 0.001
OK
OK
Output
Device midas FX+ for DIANA

Properties
Output Device Properties
Basename: CantileverPlate
OK
Result
User
selection
Modify
Result Selection
DISPLA Add
OK
OK
File Save Command File As...

Save Command File As
File name: cantileverplate.dcf

Save
Run
Here we specified a geometrically nonlinear analysis where a distributed edge moment

(1000 1.5 1000 lbf.cm/cm) is applied in 1000 load steps. This is a large displacement
but small strain problem. Therefore, only displacements are selected as the output item.
The saved command file for the cantilever plate reads as:
Nonlinear analysis commands
cantileverplate.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
198

*INPUT
*NONLIN LABEL=Cantilever plate with end moment
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 1.5(1000)
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
FORCE TOLCON 0.001
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "Cantilever_Plate"
END OUTPUT
BEGIN TYPE
GEOMET
PHYSIC OFF
END TYPE
*END
As the analysis runs in the Status window we can watch the progress of the analysis.
14.3
Analysis Results
With the nonlinear analysis performed, we will now present the FX+ output results.
Since we will compare Diana results with the analytical solution, we will use MS-Excel
to plot Diana results and the results of the analytical solution. To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file for the cantilever plate
(cantileverplate.dpb).
FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
cantileverplate.dpb
Open
Import
14.3.1
Deformed shape
We click the Post Data tab in the Tool Bar. There we select the load step 250 (375
1000 lbf.cm/cm), which is a quarter of the total applied load. We select the resulting
displacements u = uX,Y,Z as the result data type. For the deformation data we select the
displacement vector u = uX,Y,Z . Because we are only interested in the deformed shape
we check off both the vector and contour plot selection. Since legend is not relevant
we go to the Post Style tab and check off the Legend selection. In order to show the
actual deformation we go to the property tree, select deformation and then set Actual
Deformation as True. Similarly we generate deformed mesh plots at the steps 500, 750,
and 1000.
Displacements
FX+
Post Data
Output Set Load Step 250(375)
Data Filter Nodal Displacements
Result Data Type TDtXYZ(V)
Mesh Shape
Plot Type Contour Plot Vector Plot

Post Style
Edge
Type
Status
Switch
199
Apply
g Mesh Edge
Legend
Actual Deformation True
Apply
According to analytical solution the cantilever plate should be bent into a circular form
at the final state. The deformed mesh plots at the selected load levels are shown in
Figure 14.3. We see that the plate takes approximately a circular form as predicted by
the analytical solution.
(a) M=375000 lbf.cm/cm
(c) M=1125000 lbf.cm/cm
(b) M=750000 lbf.cm/cm
(d) M=1500000 lbf.cm/cm
Figure 14.3: Deformed mesh at various load levels
14.3.2
Load vs. Displacement Curves
Finally, the applied load factor and the corresponding X and Z displacements are extracted from the results and Load vs. Displacement curves are plotted using MS Excel.
The applied moment load is normalized with respect to its maximum value i.e. the applied
moment at the final state, which is 1500000 lbf.cm/cm. Absolute value of the displacement components U1 and U3 are considered and they are normalized with respect to the
length of the plate, which is 100 cm. The Load vs. Displacement curves are shown in
Figure 14.4. We see that the plate and the analytical results are quite similar.
Load vs. displacement diagram
FX+

Extract Result
Output Data
Ref. Step Load Step 1(1.5)
Data TDtX(V)
200

Step : Data
Select
All
User-Defined
Select top right end node
Table Close
Table
Ctrl
Figure 14.4: Load vs. Displacement curves for cantilever plate with end moment
Chapter 15
Geometrically Nonlinear
Analysis of a Cantilever Beam
Name:
GeoNLBeam
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/GeoNLBeam
Keywords:
analys: geomet nonlin.

constr: suppor.
elemen: beam cl18b class3 rectan.
load: moment node.
result: displa total.
Figure 15.1: Cantilever beam with end moment

This example demonstrates a geometrically nonlinear analysis of a cantilever beam which
is clamped at one end and a distributed bending moment load is applied at the other
end, in such a manner that the beam is bent into a circular form as described by Argyris
et al. [2], see Figure 15.1. The applied loading will result in large rotations, but small
strains. This analysis is the same as described in the previous chapter. In this example,
however, we will model and analyze the problem using three-dimensional curved beam
elements instead of curved shell elements. The geometric and material properties are as
follows:
Geometric data:
Length l = 100 cm
Width b = 20 cm
Thickness or depth t = 0.5 cm
Material data:
202
Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Beam

Youngs modulus E = 2.1 109 lbf/cm2 (pound force/cm2 )
Poissons ratio = 0.33
15.1
FX+
File New
View View Point
Top
We choose a Top view via the View menu to get a viewing direction perpendicular to
the XY plane. Alternatively we could click the corresponding icon in the Tool Bar. The
going to be defined. For this example we choose [lbf, cm].
15.1.1
Model Geometry
Because we will use beam elements, the profile for the cantilever beam is nothing but
a straight line which we can easily define in the Curve dialog, to be launched via the
Geometry menu.
FX+
Single line
Geometry
2D Line
Method
Method
View
Curve
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Zoom
15.1.2
Create on WP
Line...
Location: 0,0
Location: 100,0
All
Properties
Now we will define material and geometric properties for the cantilever beam. We launch
the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called IsoMat. We specify the
isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 2.1 109 lbf/cm2 and Poissons ratio
= 0.33.
FX+
Material properties
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: IsoMat
Structural
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Property Manager dialog and create a geometric property GeoBeam for
a three-dimensional Class-III beam with solid rectangular cross-section. We also attach
the material IsoMat to this property.

FX+
Property Manager
Create
203
1D...

Beam
ID: 1
Name: GeoBeam
Data ID: 1 Data Name: GeoBeam
Class-III
3D
Material 1: IsoMat
Section
Template...
Section Library
Solid Rectangle
H: 20.0
B: 0.5
OK

Property Manager
15.1.3
OK
Close
Meshing
Now that the geometry and material properties have been defined completely we may
continue with the meshing procedure. We launch the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog. The dialog
requires that we indicate the geometric parts of the model that must be meshed. In
this case we must select the complete model, for instance by clicking on the line in the
Work Plane. We set the element size to 10, select the property GeoBeam. Now we click
on Advanced Options and check Generate Mid-Side Nodes so that quadratic beam
elements are generated. We leave the other choices as default and press OK and get back
to the previous dialog box. We can click Preview to check whether the nodes to be
created are properly distributed along the beam. Once we agree with the mesh, we click
OK to get the mesh generated.
FX+
Auto meshing
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the whole beam

Seeding methodInterval length
Interval length: 10
Property: 1 GeoBeam
Advanced Options
Advanced Options
g Generate Mid Side Nodes
OK
Auto Mesh Edge

Preview
OK
FX+
Model view
View View Point

Pre-Works
Property
Isometric 1
1D GeoBeam
Show Section
including the cross-section, in an isometric view. Therefore we right-click on the GeoBeam
clearly shows its dimensions and division in elements [Fig. 15.2].
15.1.4
To define the boundary constraints (supports) we launch the Constraint dialog.

204

FX+
Supports
Analysis BC
Constraint
Constraint...
BC Set ...
Name: Clamped
Desc.: Clamped end
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the node at left end
Fixed
OK
For the node at the left end of the beam we specify a Fixed constraint, i.e., the translation
and the rotations in the three XY Z-directions are suppressed. The supports appear as
red arrows for the translational constraints and blue double arrows for the rotational
constraints at each of the selected nodes.
15.1.5
Loading
We apply a nodal moment load of -20000 lbf.cm at the right end node of the beam, which
is equivalent to -1000 lbf.cm/cm as applied to the cantilever plate of the reference model.
FX+
Define nodal moment load

Analysis Load Moment
Moment Load Set ...
Load Set
Name: End moment
Desc.: Nodal moment load
Add
Close
Force
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the node at right end
Components
M2: -20000
OK
Pre-Works
Property
1D GeoBeam
Hide Section
Figure 15.3 confirms the correct definition of the constraints and loading.
15.2 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis
205
Figure 15.3: Constraints and loading
15.2
Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis
Via the Analysis menu we choose Diana to launch the Mesh Editor. The model is
automatically imported by Mesh Editor. Now via the Analysis Setup dialog we choose
for a Structural Nonlinear analysis with the following specifications for the cantilever
beam:
Run nonlinear analysis
Analysis
Status
Mesh Editor
Run...
Diana
Type Structural nonlinear
Label: Cantilever beam with end moment
OK
Diana
Structural nonlinear Edit...
Structural nonlinear Settings
Type
Physically nonlinear
g Geometrically nonlinear
Execut
g new execut block
Load
Steps Settings
Execute load steps
Steps
Load set Load 1

g Execute load steps
User specified sizes 1.5(1000)

Iteration
Convergence norm
Displacement
g Force Settings
Convergence Norm
Convergence tolerance 0.001
OK
206

OK
Output

Properties
Basename: CantileverBeam
OK
Result
User
selection
Modify
Result Selection
DISPLA Add
OK
OK

File name: cantileverbeam.dcf

Save
Run
Here we specified a geometrically nonlinear analysis where a nodal moment load (20000
1.5 1000 lbf.cm) is applied in 1000 load steps. This is a large displacement but small
strain problem. Therefore, only displacements are selected as the output item. The saved
command file for the cantilever beam reads as:
cantileverbeam.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN LABEL=Cantilever beam with end moment
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 1.5(1000)
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
FORCE TOLCON 0.001
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "Cantilever_Beam"
END OUTPUT
BEGIN TYPE
GEOMET
PHYSIC OFF
END TYPE
*END
As the analysis runs in the Status window we can watch the progress of the analysis.
15.3
Analysis Results
With the nonlinear analysis performed, we will now present both the FX+ output results
and the tabulated output results. Since we will compare Diana results with the analytical
solution, we will use MS-Excel to plot the Diana results and the results of the analytical
solution. To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file
for the cantilever beam (cantileverbeam.dpb).
207
FX+
Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
cantileverbeam.dpb
Open
Import
15.3.1
Deformed shape
We click the Post Data tab in the Tool Bar. There we select the load step 250 (37520000
lbf.cm), which is a quarter of the total applied load. We select the resulting displacements
u = uX,Y,Z as the result data type. For the deformation data we select the displacement
vector u = uX,Y,Z . Because we are only interested in the deformed shape we check off
both the vector and contour plot selection. Since legend is not relevant we go to the Post
Style tab and check off the Legend selection. In order to show the actual deformation
we go to the property tree, select deformation and then set Actual Deformation as True.
Similarly we generate deformed mesh plots at the steps 500, 750, and 1000.
FX+
Displacements
Post Data

Output Set Load Step 250(375)
Mesh Shape
Plot Type Contour Plot Vector Plot
Post Style
Edge
Type
Status
Switch
Apply
g Mesh Edge
Legend
Actual Deformation True
Apply
According to analytical solution the beam should be bent into a circular form at the final
state. The deformed mesh plots at the selected load levels are shown in Figure 15.4.
We see that the beam takes approximately a circular form as predicted by the analytical
solution.
15.3.2
Load vs. Displacement curves
Finally, the applied load factor and the corresponding X and Z displacements are extracted from the results and Load vs. Displacement curves are plotted using MS Excel.
The applied moment load is normalized with respect to its maximum value i.e. the applied
moment at the final state, which is 20000 1500 lbf.cm for the cantilever beam. Absolute
value of the displacement components U1 and U3 are considered and they are normalized
with respect to the length of the beam, which is 100 cm. The Load vs. Displacement
curves are shown in Figure 15.5. We see that the beam results, the plate results of the
previous example and the analytical results are quite similar.
Load vs. displacement diagram
FX+

Extract Result
Output Data
Data TDtX(V)
208
(a) M=375 20000 lbf.cm
(b) M=750 20000 lbf.cm
(c) M=1125 20000 lbf.cm
(d) M=1500 20000 lbf.cm
Figure 15.4: Deformed mesh at various load levels
User-Defined
Select right end node
Table Close
Table
Ctrl
The difference between the shell solution and the beam solution is due to so called Anti-
Figure 15.5: Load vs. Displacement curves for cantilever beam with end moment
209
clastic Bending. Under the applied bending load at end of the cantilever plate the upper
half of the plate is in compression while the lower half is in tension. Now due to the Poisson effect the compressive stress causes a lateral elongation in the upper half of the plate
while the tensile stress in the lower half causes a lateral contraction. This effect brings
in an anticlastic curvature in the cantilever plate (much smaller than the longitudinal
curvature caused by the bending load) and known as Anticlastic Bending. Because beam
elements cannot capture this phenomenon the solution differs to some extent from the
shell element solution. If the same analysis is run using shell elements with zero Poissons
ratio, Anticlastic Bending does not occur and as a result we see in Figure 15.6 that the
beam and the shell solution (with zero Poissons ratio) are almost identical.
Figure 15.6: Load vs. Displacement curves for plate without Poisson effect
210
Chapter 16
Response of Steel Using

Two-Surface Material Model
Name:
TwoSurface
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/TwoSurface
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: beam cl18b class3 pipe.
load: deform.
materi: elasti harden isotro strain twosur.
option: direct groups newton nonsym regula units.
result: cauchy green strain stress total.
This example is prepared to verify the implementation of the two-surface material model
in Diana. The results are compared both with experimental results obtained by Chang
and Lee [5] and numerical predictions obtained by Shen, Mizuno, and Usami [14]. The
test specimens were thin-walled circular tubes made of annealed steel ASTM A-36.
First uniaxial cyclic loading under a constant amplitude axial strain in tension and
compression is applied. Next, an axial strain-shear strain path in 90 out-of-phase is
applied as non-proportional load. This complex loading scheme is elaborated further in
[ 16.1.5 p. 215]. Although the strains change cyclically during the non-proportional loading, the material is always in loading state. The experiment is modeled by a single beam
element by clamping one end and by applying prescribed displacements and rotations
(along the beam axis such that the beam is twisted) at the other end.
Figure 16.1: Beam element under non-proportional loading
16.1
FX+
File New
View View Point
Normal
212
Response of Steel Using Two-Surface Material Model
We choose a Normal view via the View menu to get a viewing direction perpendicular to
the XY plane. Alternatively, we could click the corresponding icon in the Tool Bar. The
going to be defined. For this example we choose [lbf, in] corresponding to the units used
for the experimental results and the numerical predictions.
16.1.1
Model Geometry
The experiment is modeled with a single Class-III, three-node, 3D beam element CL18B
of unit length. Therefore, the profile for the beam is nothing but a straight line which we
can easily define in the Curve dialog, to be launched via the Geometry menu.
FX+
Single line
Geometry
2D Line
Method
Method
View
Curve
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Zoom
16.1.2
Create on WP
Line...
Location: 0,0
Location: 1,0
All
Properties
Now we will define material and geometric properties for the beam element. We launch
the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called IsoMat. We specify the
2
isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 28500000 lbf/in and Poissons ratio
= 0.35.
FX+
Material properties
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: IsoMat
Structural
Elastic
OK
Material Manager
Close
Additional material parameters related to Two-Surface material model are specified in

Table 16.1. The last parameter controlling the number of sub-increments is not specified
(see Volume Material Library). Therefore, the default value of 500 will be used which is
sufficient for the highly non-proportional loading type considered in this example. These
material parameters will be incorporated in the model later using the Mesh Editor.
Next we define the geometric properties of the beam cross-section. A very thin pipe
cross-section with diameter 2.00002 [in] and wall thickness 0.00002 [in] is used. We launch
the Property Manager dialog and create a geometric property GeoBeam for a three-dimensional Class-III beam with pipe cross-section. We also attach the material IsoMat
to this property.
FX+
Property Manager
Create
1D...

Beam
ID: 1
Name: GeoBeam
213
Table 16.1: Two-Surface model parameters for annealed steel A-36

Parameter
y (lbf/in2 )
p
Est
/E
pst
a
b
c
e
f /E
E0p /E
y
0 /y
u /y
2y
M
Data ID: 1
Class-III
Material
Section
Value
30000
0.025
0.016
-0.505
2.17
14.4
0.66
500.0
0.30
0.0175
3.08
1.15
1.81
9.89 104
-0.37
Data Name: GeoBeam
3D
1: IsoMat
Template...
Section Library
Pipe
D: 2.00002
tw: 0.00002
OK

Property Manager
16.1.3
OK
Close
Meshing
Now that the geometry and properties have been defined completely, we may continue
with the meshing procedure. Meshing is very trivial in this case since only a single element
is considered. Nevertheless it has to be meshed. Therefore, we launch the Auto-Mesh
Edge dialog. The dialog requires that we indicate the geometric parts of the model that
should be meshed. In this case we can select the entire model, for instance by clicking
on the line in the Work Plane. We set the element size to 1 and select the property
GeoBeam. Now we click on Advanced Options and check Generate Mid-Side Nodes
so that a quadratic beam element is generated. We leave the other choices as default
and press OK and get back to the previous dialog box. We can click Preview to check
whether the nodes to be created are properly distributed along the beam. Once we agree
with the mesh, we click OK to get the mesh generated.
FX+
Auto meshing
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the line

Seeding methodInterval length
Interval length: 1
Property: 1 GeoBeam
Advanced Options
Advanced Options
g Generate Mid Side Nodes
OK
Auto Mesh Edge

214

Preview
OK
FX+
Model view
View View Point

Pre-Works
Property
Isometric 1
1D GeoBeam
Show Section
A one-dimensional beam model, like this one, is best viewed with its real dimensions, including the cross-section, in an isometric view. Therefore, we right-click on the GeoBeam
clearly shows its dimensions [Fig. 16.2]. We get back to the previous view by choosing
Hide Section. We will prepare the remainder of the model input using Mesh Editor.

Therefore, we launch Mesh Editor from FX+.
Launch Mesh Editor
Analysis
FX+
Note that the model input that we prepared so far is automatically imported in Mesh
Editor.
16.1.4
In total, we will create three support sets. The first one, named Supports, contains the
rigid supports; that is, it contains the degrees of freedom that are fully restrained. Since
our loads will consist of prescribed displacements, we will create two additional support
sets. The second one is named Presc-disp and it contains the translational degrees of
freedom that have a prescribed non-zero value. Similarly, a third set named Presc-rot is
defined which contains prescribed non-zero rotations. For the node at the left end of the
beam we define a fully fixed support, i.e. all translational and rotational degrees of freedom
are restrained. At the two remaining nodes we restrain the translational and rotational
215
degrees of freedom related to the global Y and Z directions. All these suppressed degrees
of freedom are added to the Supports set. The remaining translational and rotational
degrees of freedom will also be imposed, but they will be added to the Presc-disp and
Presc-rot sets, respectively. Hence, none of the degrees of freedom is unknown.
Define boundary conditions
TwoSurface.py
addSupportSet( "Supports" )
addSupport( "Supports", TR, [ 1, 2, 3 ], [ 1 ] )
addSupport( "Supports", RO, [ 1, 2, 3 ], [ 1 ] )
addSupport( "Supports", TR, [ 2, 3 ], [ 2, 3 ] )
addSupport( "Supports", RO, [ 2, 3 ], [ 2, 3 ] )
addSupportSet( "Presc-disp" )
addSupport( "Presc-disp", TR, [ 1 ], [ 2, 3 ] )
addSupportSet( "Presc-rot" )
addSupport( "Presc-rot", RO, [ 1 ], [ 2, 3 ] )
16.1.5
Loading
As mentioned in the previous section, the axial load and twisting moments are applied
by means of prescribed displacements and rotations, respectively, both at the mid node
and the node at the free end. The values of the prescribed displacement and rotation at
the mid node are half of the values at the free end node. We will define two load cases,
one for prescribed displacements and another one for prescribed rotations.
Define load cases
TwoSurface.py
addLoadCase( "Presc-disp" )
addDeformationLoad( "Presc-disp", 0.5E-6, 1, TR, [ 3 ] )
addDeformationLoad( "Presc-disp", 1.0E-6, 1, TR, [ 2 ] )
addLoadCase( "Presc-rot" )
addDeformationLoad( "Presc-rot", 0.5E-6, 1, RO, [ 3 ] )
addDeformationLoad( "Presc-rot", 1.0E-6, 1, RO, [ 2 ] )
Now the load cases have been defined. For non-proportional loading, additionally we
need to construct appropriate load combinations. This will be done in a later section. In
the following we only discuss how we determine the appropriate non-proportional load
combinations as applied in the experiment [5] and numerical predictions [14].
First uniaxial cyclic loading under constant amplitude of 0.8% axial strain in tension
and compression is applied for two load cycles by prescribed displacements at the mid
and the end nodes as mentioned in [ 16.1.5 p. 215]. The amplitude of the applied shear
strain is chosen such that the effective Von Mises strain equals 0.8%. The Von Mises
effective strain in terms of measured engineering stress and strain is defined as:
1/2
e = (2 + 2 /3)
(16.1)
Setting e = 0.8% and = 0.0% in Equation (16.1) gives = 1.3856%.

In Table 16.2 and Table 16.3 axial and shear strain vs. (considered as pseudo time)
are shown.
In Figure 16.3 the corresponding axial strain-shear strain path is plotted. The following relation between the twisting angle per unit length of the beam and the shear strain
can be used:
dt
=
(16.2)
2
where d is the diameter of the beam with pipe cross-section and t is the wall thickness. For
the present case d = 2.00002 [in] and t = 0.00002 [in]. Upon insertion into Equation (16.2)
we have = . In addition, since the length of the beam is unity, prescribing any amount
of rotation at the beam end will produce the same amount of shear strain throughout the
beam element. Because the beam has a pipe cross-section with very thin wall thickness,
resulting shear stresses are distributed uniformly over all integration points.
216
Table 16.2: Applied axial strain

(degree)
90
120
180
210
240
270
300
330
360
390
420
450
= 0.008 sin
0.008
0.006928203
0.0
-0.004
-0.006928203
-0.008
-0.006928203
-0.004
0.0
0.004
0.006928203
0.008
-.0010718
-0.004
-0.004
-.0029282
-.0010718
0.0010718
0.0029282
0.004
0.004
0.0029282
0.0010718
Table 16.3: Applied shear strain

(degree)
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
360
= 0.013856 sin
0
0.006928
0.011999648
0.013856
0.011999648
0.006928
0.0
-0.006928
-0.01199965
-0.013856
-0.01199965
-0.006928
0.0
0.006928
0.00507165
0.00185635
-0.00185635
-0.00507165
-0.006928
-0.006928
-0.00507165
-0.00185635
0.00185635
0.00507165
0.006928
Figure 16.3: Axial strain-shear strain path for non-proportional loading
16.1.6
Additional data
Before running the nonlinear static analysis we need to add the nonlinear material parameters for Two-Surface material model and the definition of the load combinations for
217
the non-proportional loading. Additionally, since we are applying only axial and twisting
loads, the default shear reduction factors are overridden with 1.0.
Add nonlinear material parameters
TwoSurface.py
setMaterialParameter( "IsoMat", "YIELD", ["TWOSUR"]

setMaterialParameter( "IsoMat", "YLDVAL", [30000.0,
14.4, 0.66, 500.0, 0.3, 0.0175, 3.08, 1.15, 1.81,
setMaterialParameter( "IsoMat", "SHEAR", [1.0, 1.0]
)
0.025, 0.016, -0.505, 2.17,
9.89E-4, -0.37] )
)
Now we will define the load combinations for the non-proportional loading as discussed
in [ 16.1.5 p. 215]. Load combination 1 will be used for uniaxial cyclic loading. Load
combinations 2-14 will be used for non-proportional loading as shown in Figure 16.3. The
ratio of Presc-Disp to Presc-Rot of each load combination is obtained from column of
Table 16.2 and Table 16.3 and shown in Figure 16.4.
Figure 16.4: Load combination table

Define load combinations
TwoSurface.py
)
"Presc-disp", 8000.00 )
"Presc-rot", 0.00 )
)
"Presc-disp", -1071.80 )
"Presc-rot", 6928.00 )
)
"Presc-disp", -2928.20 )
"Presc-rot", 5071.65 )
)
"Presc-disp", -4000.00 )
"Presc-rot", 1856.35 )
)
"Presc-disp", -4000.00 )
"Presc-rot", -1856.35 )
)
218

setLoadCaseFactor( "Load combination 6", "Presc-disp", -2928.20 )
setLoadCaseFactor( "Load combination 6", "Presc-rot", -5071.65 )
addLoadCombination( "Load combination 7" )
setLoadCaseFactor( "Load combination 8", "Presc-disp", 1071.80 )
setLoadCaseFactor( "Load combination 11", "Presc-rot", 1856.35 )
16.2
Nonlinear Static Analysis
We will define a structural nonlinear analysis with 14 execute blocks. The first execute
block does the uniaxial cyclic loading so that the material reaches a stabilized state.
Subsequently, 13 execute blocks using the load combinations 2 to 14 are used for the
non-proportional loading. Because these execute blocks (214) are identical apart from
the load combination number, only the first one is shown in the command file below. We
are only interested in the material response. Therefore, only STRESS and STRAIN output
are requested. The shortened command file reads as follows:
twsfbm.dcf
*NONLIN LABEL=Non-proportional loading

BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.01(100) -0.01(200) 0.01(200) -0.01(200) 0.01(200)
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
FORCE TOLCON 1e-06
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 2
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.01(100)
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
FORCE TOLCON 1e-06
END CONVER
END ITERAT
219
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE "twsfbm"
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
Before we start the actual analysis, we first need to load the analysis commands from the
twsfbm.dcf file:
Run the nonlinear analysis
TwoSurface.py
newAnalysis( "twsfbm" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "twsfbm", "twsfbm.dcf" )
runAnalysis( "twsfbm" )
16.3
Analysis Results
With the nonlinear analysis performed, we can now generate the stress-strain plots and
compare with the reference result. We will use MS-Excel to plot the Diana results. To
access the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post Result file (twsfbm.dpb).
FX+
Import Post Result file

Open
File Name
Post File Import
twsfbm.dpb
File Name
Add...
Open
twsfbm.dpb
Import
First we extract axial strain component EXX of node 3 (the mid node) of element 1. Subsequently in the same way we extract axial stress component SXX, shear strain component
GZX and shear stress component SZX.
FX+
Extract stress and strain

Extract Result
Output Data
Data Fiber 1-EXX Nodes
User-Defined
Extraction Position in Element
Node 3
Table Close
Table
Element:1
Select all cells of column
16.3.1
Uniaxial Cyclic Loading
Now we have stress-strain results in the Excel worksheet. First we plot SXX vs. EXX
of first 900 steps and plot the response of the initial uniaxial cyclic loading. In Figure
16.5 the results are compared with the reference results reported by Shen, Mizuno, and
Usami [14]. The dots in the reference result are the experimental data points. The general
agreement is quite good accept for the fact that the end of yield plateau is reached little
bit earlier with Diana than the reference case, which leads to a small difference in the
subsequent response.
220
(a) Reference
(b) Diana
Figure 16.5: Comparision of response (axial stress vs. axial strain) under uniaxial loading
between reference result and Diana
16.3.2
Non-proportional Loading
Now we generate two more plots for non-proportional loading i.e. for steps 901 to 2200 as
shown in Figure 16.6 and Figure 16.7. A good agreement is found between the reference
result and Diana result. The dots in the reference result are the experimental data points.
Some differences between the experimental results and prediction are quite obvious. The
reason of the discrepancy is discussed in [14].
(a) Reference
(b) Diana
Figure 16.6: Comparision of response (axial stress vs. axial strain) under non-proportional
loading between reference result and Diana
221
(a) Reference
(b) Diana
Figure 16.7: Comparision of response (shear stress vs.

proportional loading between reference result and Diana
shear strain) under non-
222
Chapter 17
Eccentrically Loaded
Reinforced Concrete Beam
Name:
Eccent
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/Eccent
Keywords:
analys: stadap.
constr: suppor.
elemen: bar compos l2cmp pstres q8mem reinfo.
load: edge elemen force.
materi: elasti harden hordyk isotro multil soften thoren.
result: cauchy crkwdt displa force green moment strain stress total.
In this example the crack development, inclusive crack width at different loading levels and
force-displacement curves are calculated for an eccentrically loaded reinforced concrete
beam. For this calculation the stiffness adaptation analysis application (*STADAP) is
applied in combination with composed elements. We assume that the plate is made of
concrete with a Youngs modulus E = 37483 MPa and a Poissons ratio = 0.15. The
thickness of the plate is t = 200 mm. The model is defined in mm and N.
17.1
17.1.1
Geometry
In the XY plane a polyline is defined with the following corner coordinates: (0,0); (0,300);
(1500,300); (1500,-200). The closed polyline is used to define a surface [Fig. 17.1].
FX+
Beam geometry
Geometry
Profile
Curve
Create on WP
Profile (Wire)...
Polyline
g Make Face
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
0,0
0,300
1500,0
0,-500
-1500,200
A straight line for a reinforcement bar is defined between the points with coordinates:
(0,260); (1500,260). Another straight line is defined for the composed elements between
the points with coordinates: (0,50); (1500,50) [Fig. 17.2].
224
Eccentrically Loaded Reinforced Concrete Beam
Figure 17.1: Beam geometry

FX+
Two lines
Geometry
2D Line
Method
Method
Method
Method
Curve
Create on WP
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Line...
0,260
1500,0
0,50
1500,0
Figure 17.2: Lines for reinforcement bar and composed elements
17.1.2
17.1.2.1
Beam Properties
We will define material properties and the thickness for the beam model.
FX+
Beam material
Text Input
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
YOUNG 37483
POISON 0.15
TENCRV HORDYK
TENSTR 3.82
GF1 0.169
225
COMCRV THOREN
COMSTR 53.0
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called Concrete.
We use the text input to specify the material properties of the concrete beam: Youngs
modulus E = 37483 MPa and Poissons ratio = 0.15, for compression a Thorenfeldt
curve is chosen with compressive strength of 53.0 MPa and for the tensile regime a Hordyk
curve is defined with tensile strength 3.82 MPa.
FX+
Beam thickness
Property Manager
Create
2D...

2D Plane Stress
ID: 1
Name: Beam
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Beam
Regular
Material: 1: Concrete
Thickness: 200
OK
Property Manager
Close
We launch the Property Manager dialog and create an isotropic property Beam for a
two-dimensional plane stress model with a uniform thickness t = 200 mm. We also attach
the material Concrete to this property.
17.1.2.2
Reinforcement Bar Properties
We must define the properties of the reinforcement bar sections in the Diana model and
the general physical and material properties for the reinforcement bar.
We will define material properties and the cross-section area for the reinforcement bar.
FX+
Reinforcement bar material

Text Input
ID: 2
Name: Steel
YOUNG 210000
POISON 0.20
TENCRV MULTLN
TENPAR 0. 0. 436. 0.00218 700. 0.0535 700. 1000.
COMCRV MULTLN
COMPAR 0. 0. -436. -0.00218 -700. -0.0535 -700. -1000.
OK
Material Manager
Close
We launch the Material Manager dialog and create a new material called Steel. We use
the text input to specify the material properties of the steel reinforcement bar: Youngs
modulus E = 210000 MPa and Poissons ratio = 0.20, multi-linear diagrams in tension
and in compression are defined with yield stress of 436 MPa with linear hardening to 700
MPa at a strain of 0.0535.
We will define the properties of the reinforcement bar sections first.
FX+
Bar sections
Analysis Property
Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

ID: 2
Name: Section
226

Data ID: 2 Data Name: Section
Curved Shape
OK
Via the Property Manager dialog we create a reinforcement property which enforces a
curved shape for bar sections in the Diana model.
FX+
Reinforcement bar
Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

Reinforcement Bar
ID: 3
Name: Bar
Data ID: 3 Data Name: Bar

Material: 2: Steel
Cross-Sectional Area: 400
OK
Property Manager
Close
We define a property Bar made of Steel with a cross-sectional area A = 400 m2 for the
reinforcement bar.
17.1.2.3
Composed Element Properties
We must define the material and geometrical properties for the composed elements.
FX+
Composed element material

Dummy
ID: 3
Name: Dummy
OK
Material Manager
Close
We will define dummy material properties for the composed elements.

Composed element geometrical properties
Analysis Property
Property Manager
FX+
Create
1D...

Composed
ID: 4
Name: Composed
Data ID: 4 Data Name: Composed

Material: 3: Dummy
Thickness: 1000
Orientation Out-of-Plane Dir.(X,Y,Z) 0 0 1
OK
Property Manager
Close
We create a property Composed with a thickness of 1000 mm for the composed elements.
For the composed membrane elements an element z axis, which defines the out-of-plane
direction, needs to be specified.
17.1.3
Mesh
In this model an unstructured mesh is applied and the composed elements have a different
size than the membrane element to demonstrate that this can be handled by the composed
lines implementation in Diana.

17.1.3.1
227
Beam
We would like to build a quadrilateral mesh using a mesh seed with interval length of 12.5
for the entire polyline. For the bottom line, however, this would result in 121 divisions,
where the other edges will have 24, 120, and 40 divisions respectively. Since the sum of
the divisions will then be an odd number, it will be impossible to generate a mesh which
consists of only quadrilaterals. Therefore, for the bottom line explicitly 122 divisions will
be used as mesh seed.
FX+
Edge size
Mesh Size Control
Edge Mesh Size
Along Edge...
Select Edges Select top 3 edges of beam

Seeding Method Interval Length
Interval Length 12.5

Preview
Apply
Select Edges Select bottom edge of beam

Seeding Method Number of Divisions
Number of Divisions 122

Preview
OK
A mesh with linear four-node quadilateral Q8MEM plane stress elements is generated with
Loop Mesher of the Auto-Mesh Face functionality. The element size is set to 12.5, the
Beam property is used, and the new Mesh-set is named Beam [Fig. 17.3].
FX+
Meshing the beam

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Face
Face...
Select Face(s) Select beam

Element Size: 12.5
Mesh Size
Property
1: Beam
Mesh Set
Name: Beam
Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
Mesher
Loop Mesher
Type
Quadrilateral
OK
OK
Figure 17.3: Beam mesh
228

17.1.3.2
Reinforcement Bar
The upper line is meshed as a bar reinforcement with 1 division in Plane stress elements
using the Steel material property, and a cross-section of 400 mm2 .
FX+
Meshing the reinforcement bar

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the upper line

Seeding Method Number of Divisions: 1
Property
2: Section
g Reinforcement
Type Bar in Plane Stress

3: Bar
Mesh Set
Name: Bar
OK
17.1.3.3
Composed Line Elements
The lower line should be meshed as composed line elements. We mesh the lower line
with an interval length of 20 and the property Composed. The nodes for the composed
elements and the reinforcements are displayed with blue-markers in Figure 17.4.
FX+
Meshing the composed elements

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Edge
Edge...
Select Edge(s) Select the lower line

Seeding Method Interval Length
Interval Length 20
Property 4: Composed
Mesh Set
Name: Composed
OK
Figure 17.4: Composed elements and reinforcements meshed
17.1.4
Boundary Conditions
Boundary constraints in both X and Y direction are defined in all nodes at the right edge
of the model.
229
FX+
Supports
BC Set
Name: Supports
Desc.: Right side supports
Add
Close
Constraint
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select the nodes of the right side

g T1
g T2
OK
DOF
Via the Constraint and BC Set dialogs we create a new set of boundary constraints. For
the nodes on the right side we support the horizontal uX (degree of freedom T1) and
vertical displacement uY (degree of freedom T2) [Fig. 17.5].
17.1.5
Loading
At the top edge two pressure line loads with value of 1000 per length unit are defined
over a length of 8 elements (=100) each. The left load is applied at the element edges
between (100,300) and (200,300). The right load is applied at the element edges between
(450,300) and (550,300) [Fig. 17.6].
FX+
Loading
Analysis Load
Pressure
Pressure...
Load Set ...

Load Set Name: Pressure
Desc.: Two pressure loads at top edge
Add
Close
Pressure
Type Edge Pressure
Select Element Edge(s)
Add
Mode
Direction
g Uniform
Select element edges between (100,300) and (200,300)

Apply

Add
Mode
Direction
g Uniform
Select element edges between (450,300) and (550,300)

OK
230
Figure 17.6: Pressure loads
17.1.6
We must add data to the model that cannot be supplied via FX+. In this case the
additional data implies a changed integration scheme for the concrete beam elements and
the reinforcement particles. To add the additional data to the model definition we launch
the Diana Mesh Editor, which brings you in the Mesh Editor of Diana.
FX+
Analysis
17.1.6.1
Adapting the Integration Scheme
For the concrete beam elements the default 22 integration scheme is replaced by a 11
integration scheme in table DATA.
Set integration scheme for beam
Eccent.py
setElementDataParameter( "Beam", "NINTEG", [ "1", "1" ] )
For the reinforcement particles we will use single point integration.

Set integration scheme for reinforcement
Eccent.py
setElementDataParameter( "Bar", "NINTEG", [ "1" ] )
17.2
Stiffness Adaptation Analysis
After renaming the L2TRU truss elements to L2CMP composed elements, the datafile can
be opened in the Mesh Editor again to perform the stiffness adaptation analysis. We
define 1 execute block with an initial load step of 0.0 followed by a step of 0.1 and 25
steps of 0.02, to a maximum load factor of 0.60. The maximum number of iterations per
load increment is set to 5. An output block for FX+ is defined for total displacements,
the maximum stiffness reduction (PARAME STADAP) in the respective elements, the Cauchy
stresses in concrete and reinforcement elements, the crackwidth (STRAIN CRKWDT) in the
concrete elements and the cross-section forces and bending moments (STRESS FORCE and
STRESS MOMENT) in the composed line elements.
17.2 Stiffness Adaptation Analysis
231
Stiffness adaptation analysis commands

*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*STADAP
BEGIN EXECUT
ITERAT MAXITE
LOAD 1
STEPS EXPLIC
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "eccent"
DISPLA TOTAL
PARAME STADAP
STRAIN CRKWDT
STRESS TOTAL
STRESS TOTAL
STRESS TOTAL
END OUTPUT
*END
5
SIZES 0 0.1 0.02(25)
TRANSL
GLOBAL
GREEN GLOBAL
CAUCHY GLOBAL
FORCE LOCAL
MOMENT LOCAL
Run stiffness adaptation analysis

Analysis
Status
eccent.dcf
Mesh Editor
Run...
Diana
Type Stiffness adaptation analysis
Label: Eccentrically loaded beam
OK
Diana
Stiffness adaptation analysis Edit...
Stiffness adaptation analysis Settings
Execut
Add New
Load case Load 1
Maximum number of iterations 5
Sizes of load increments 0.0 0.1 0.02(25)
Output
Add New
Properties
Basename: eccent
OK
Result
User
selection
Modify
Result Selection
DISPLA
Add
PARAME STADAP
Add
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
Add
STRESS TOTAL FORCE
Add
STRESS TOTAL MOMENT
Add
STRAIN CRKWDT
Add
OK
OK

232

File name: eccent.dcf
Save
Run
17.3
Analysis Results
With the stiffness adaptation analysis performed, we will now present both the FX+
output results and the tabulated output results. To assess the analysis results we return
to FX+ and import the Post Result and Post model file for the eccentrically loaded
reinforced concrete beam.
FX+
Post File Import
Post Model File

Post Result Files
...
Open
Add...
File Name
Open
eccent.dmb
File Name
Open
eccent.dpb
Open
Import
17.3.1
Load Displacement Diagram
When the analysis has been run we first make a graph of the vertical displacement in the
upper left node as function of the loading. We display these results in Excel [Fig. 17.7].
Load displacement diagram
FX+

Extract Result
Output Data
Analysis Set Structural Linear Static
Ref. Step Load Case 1, Step 1
Data DtY(V)
User-Defined
Select upper left node
Table Close
Table
Ctrl
17.3.2
Reduced Stiffness Patterns
For load steps 6, 13, 20, and 27 [Fig. 17.8] the reduced stiffness patterns will be produced.
FX+
Reduced stiffness
Post Data
Output Set Load Case 1, Step 6(0.18)
Data Filter 2D Element Misc.
Result Data Type PMsa Nodes
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties
Contour

True
233

Max Value 1.0
Min Value 0.001
Out Of Range Part Fill
Number of Levels 10
Reverse Color True
Apply
The reduced stiffness is defined as the ratio between the actual stiffness and the initial
stiffness. A minimum value of 0.001 for the reduced stiffness is used in Diana. In
subsequent load steps new vertical cracks occur and around step 20 the vertical cracks
turn in diagonal shear failure cracks, followed by loss of integrity when cracks reach the
bottom edge of the eccentric beam. The development of the transverse stiffness reduction
bands can be seen in the stiffness reduction plots. Also around the reinforcement bar a
pull-out area with reduced stiffness can be seen.
17.3.3
Crack Width
For load steps 6, 13, 20, and 27 [Fig. 17.9] the first principal value of the crack width
results will be displayed with a fixed color scale from 0 to 0.5 mm.
Crack width
FX+
Post Data
Data Filter 2D Element Strains
Result Data Type Principal Crackwidth Ecw1 Nodes
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties
Contour
Max/Min Value On/Off True

Max Value 0.5
Min Value 0.0
Out Of Range Part Fill
Number of Levels 10
Reverse Color False
Apply
The crack width results show values close to zero at load levels from 36000 N (step 6) to
64000 N (step 13). For a load level of 92000 N (step 20) crack width results up to 0.4 mm
can be seen. Values over 0.5 mm can be seen for a load level of 120000 N (step 27).
234
(a) step 6 (0.18)
(b) step 13 (0.32)
(c) step 20 (0.46)
(d) step 27 (0.6)
Figure 17.8: Reduced stiffness pattern (top: tension, bottom: compression)
(a) step 6 (0.18)
(b) step 13 (0.32)
(c) step 20 (0.46)
(d) step 24 (0.6)
Figure 17.9: Crack width
17.3.4
Reinforcement Bar Axial Stress
Figure 17.10 displays the axial stress in the reinforcement bar for a load level of 92000 N
(step 20).
Axial stress
FX+
235
Post Data
Data Filter 1D Reinforcement Stresses/Strains
Result Data Type Sxx Nodes
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties
Contour

Number of Levels 10
Reverse Color False
False
Apply
The maximum stress value at this load level is higher than the yield stress of 435N/mm2 ,
which indicates that the reinforcement has started yielding.
Figure 17.10: Axial stress in reinforcement bar at step 20 (0.46)
17.3.5
Composed Element Forces and Moments
[Fig. 17.11a] shows the shear force Qy in the composed elements. This shear force has
been calculated by integration of the stresses over the height of the concrete beam.
FX+
Shear forces
Post Data
Result Data Type Composed Line Qy Nodes
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties
Contour

Number of Levels 10
Reverse Color False
False
Apply
The stresses in the reinforcement bar are also considered in this calculation. The shear
force diagram should show three levels according to the theory: 0 N at the left side
of both loading points; 46000 N between the loading points; and 92000 N between the
right loading point and the clamped end of the beam. The results of the calculated
cross-section forces show very nice agreement with the theoretical cross-section forces.
[Fig. 17.11b] displays the bending moment Mz in the composed elements.
Shear forces
FX+
236
(a) shear force
(b) bending moment
Figure 17.11: Composed element results at step 20 (0.46)
Post Data
Result Data Type Composed Line Mz Nodes
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Properties
Contour

Number of Levels 10
Reverse Color False
False
Apply
The maximum value of 1.081E+8 shows perfect agreement with the value for the maximum bending moment as calculated in (17.1).
Mz = 1350 mm 46000 N + 1000 mm 46000 N = 108100000 Nmm
(17.1)
Chapter 18
Design Example GTB-table

Name:
GtbPlate
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/GtbPlate
Keywords:
analys: design stadap.

constr: suppor.
elemen: cq40s curved grid reinfo shell taper.
materi: consta elasti harden isotro linear soften.
post: binary femvie fxplus.
result: cauchy crkwdt displa green strain stress total.
In this example the application module *DESIGN will be used to define the reinforcement
in a rectangular slab. In the Netherlands there are so called GTB-tables where values for
the reinforcement moments (and so the reinforcement area) are given depending on the
geometry and boundary conditions of the plate. In this example we will model one type
of plate out of this GTB-table and compare the results.
18.1
GTB-table
Rectangular plates under a uniformly distributed load are considered in the GTB-tables.
There are different plate types with different boundary conditions, e.g. rigid supports,
or fully clamped supports. The values in these GTB-tables are calculated using the
linear theory of elasticity with Poissons ratio equal to zero. The reinforcement moments
mxx and myy are summarized in these tables. We will model plate type III-1 out of the
GTB-table where the slab will be supported only in the four corners. The reinforcement
moments for this type are summarized in Figure 18.1. The GTB-table divides the plate
into a central strip with a width of 0.5 lx respectively 0.5 ly and edge strips with a width
of 0.25 lx and 0.25 ly . The average of the reinforcement moments, calculated over the
corresponding width of the strip will be given in this GTB-table.
238
Figure 18.1: GTB-table type III-1: Reinforcement moments
18.2
239
Plate type III-1 out of the GTB-table will be modeled. The slab will be only vertically
supported in the four corners [Fig. 18.2]. The slab is four meters square, i.e. lx = ly =
4000 mm, has a thickness h of 200 mm, and will be loaded with a pressure load. The
Youngs modulus E equals 30000 N/mm2 and the Poissons ratio is 0.0. Because of the
square shape of the slab, the reinforcement moments m*xx and m*yy are equal in the
GTB-table [Fig. 18.1].
Figure 18.2: Slab geometry
18.2.1
Geometry
We open a new project in FX+ and save the project as GTB.fdb. Furthermore, we adjust
the view point to top, because we will use the default XY work plane.
FX+
Start a new model

File New
File Save
Save As
File Name: GTB.fdb

Save
View
View Point
Top
the model is going to be defined. For this example we choose [N,mm].
We create one rectangle to model the quarter of the plate that will be analyzed
[Fig. 18.2].
FX+
Slab geometry
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method
Method
View
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Zoom
Location: 0,0
Location: 2000,2000
All
240
18.2.2
Reinforcement
To model this GTB-table example and compare the required reinforcement area we have
to use the application module *DESIGN. Therefore, we have to define a reinforcement
grid with DESIGN properties. Because the slab will be loaded by an uniform (downward)
pressure we are only interested in the reinforcement area at the bottom, where tension
occurs in the concrete. Conform the GTB approach 3 strips (2 edge strips of 0.25lx and
1 mid strip of 0.5lx width) will be modeled. But the reinforcement bars in X and Y
direction are in practice on top of each other. So there is a difference in Z coordinate
equal to the diameter of the bars between the bars in X and Y direction [Fig. 18.3]. In
thin constructions (like this slab) a difference of 10 mm compare to the total thickness
h of 200 mm of the slab can make a difference. That is why we will model separate
reinforcement grids for bars in X and Y direction. This means that because of the
quarter of the model two grids with bars only in X direction are modeled and two grids
with only bars in Y direction. (Another option is to model one grid with bars in X
and Y direction with an averaged Z coordinate). The coverage c is 25 mm. The two
Figure 18.3: Slab cross-section with reinforcements [mm]

reinforcement grids with bars in X directions will be copied, translated and rotated to
become new grids for the reinforcement grids with bars in Y direction.
FX+
Reinforcement in X direction
Geometry Work Plane
Move Work Plane
Move...
Ref. Plane

Offset: -70
Select XY -plane
OK
Geometry Curve
Rectangle
Create on WP
Rectangle (Wire)...
g Make Face
Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location: 0,0
Location: 2000,1000
Method ABS x,y

Method REL dx,dy
g Make Face
Location: 0,1000
Location: 2000,1000
Apply
FX+
Reinforcement in Y direction
Geometry
Translate
Transform
Translate...
Direction & Distance
Select Object Shape(s) Select 2 reinforcement X rectangles

Select Direction
Direction
Select global Z-axis
Uniform
Copy
Distance: 10
Number of Times
241
OK
Geometry
Translate
Transform
Rotate...
Translate
Select Object Shape(s)
Revolution Axis
Select
Select 2 reinforcement Y rectangles
Revolution Axis Select global Z-axis

2000,2000,0
g Define Location
Move
Angle: 10
OK
18.2.3
Properties
The next step is to define the properties for both the concrete slab and the steel reinforcement. We will use the GTB-table to calculate the amount of reinforcement. We
assume a diameter of 10 mm in both directions. We will calculate the spacing using
the GTB-table. We will focus on myy because the grid with only bars in Y direction is
placed more upwards than the grid with bars in X direction [Fig. 18.3]. So, the bars in
Y direction are in this case more normative. We will focus on location (b), at the mid
of the edge strip, and (e), at the mid of the mid strip [Fig. 18.1]. At these locations the
highest amount of reinforcement are required. The design load Pd can be calculated as:
Pd = 1.2 g h + 1.2 ppermanent + 1.5 pvariable = 2.18e2 N/mm2
(18.1)
Where the permanent load ppermanent is 1 kN/mm2 , the variable load pvariable is 10 kN/mm2 ,
the concrete density is 2400 kg/m3 , the slab thickness h is 200 mm, and the acceleration of gravity g is 9.8 m/s2 . Now the reinforcement moment myy can be calculated for
location (b) on the edge strip using the GTB-table [Fig. 18.1]:
myy = 151 0.001 Pd lx2 = 52.78e3 Nmm/mm
(18.2)
Where the length of the slab in X direction lx equals 4000 mm. The required area of
reinforcement (ASREQ) on location (b) is:
ASREQ = myy /(fyd zd ) = 0.843 mm2 /mm
(18.3)
Where the design yield stress of the reinforcement steel fyd is 435 N/mm2 , and the internal
arm zd equals:
zd = 0.9(h c 1.5) = 144 mm
(18.4)
This gives a maximum spacing at location (b) of:
spacing = Abar /ASREQ = 93.2 mm
(18.5)
Where Abar is the area of a reinforcement bar, which equals 78.5 mm2 . For the edge strip
a spacing of 90 mm will be used.
For location (e) on the mid strip the following reinforcement can be calculated:
myy = 112 0.001 Pd lx2 = 39.15e3 Nmm/mm
(18.6)
The required area of reinforcement on this location is:

ASREQ = myy /(fyd zd ) = 0.625 mm2 /mm
(18.7)
This gives a maximum spacing at location (e) of:

spacing = Abar /ASREQ = 126 mm
(18.8)
For the mid strip a spacing of 120 mm will be used. For the reinforcement grids in X
direction the same dimensions will be used.
The following material properties will be used for the concrete and steel. We will use
a Poissons ratio equal to 0, because this is conform the GTB approach.
242

FX+
Material properties
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Concrete
Structural
Poissons Ratio: 0.0
Elastic
Elastic
Apply
Isotropic
ID: 2
Name: Steel
Structural
Poissons Ratio: 0.0
OK
Close
The following properties are defined for the concrete slab.

FX+
Slab properties
Property Manager
Create
2D...

Curved Shell
ID: 1
Name: Slab
Data ID: 1 Data Name:

Flat
Regular
Slab
Thickness: 200
OK
Four properties have to be defined for the reinforcement grids: One for the reinforcement grid in X direction for the edge strip; one for the reinforcement grid in X direction
for the mid strip; one for the reinforcement grid in Y direction for the edge strip; one for
the reinforcement grid in Y direction for the mid strip. Note that the equivalent thickness
X and Y should be entered in FX+ for the reinforcement grid properties. The equivalent
thickness equals the area of a reinforcement bar (Abar ) divided by the spacing between
the bars. These are general input items for reinforcement grids, but will be extended by
others parameters in module *DESIGN [ 18.3.1 p. 246].
Reinforcement grid properties
Property Manager
Create
FX+
Reinforcement...

Reinforcement Grid
ID: 2
Name: GridEX
Data ID: 2 Data Name: GridEX

Material 2: Steel
Equivalent Thickness X: 0.872
Equivalent Thickness Y: 0.
X Component Axis: 1
Y Component Axis: 0
Z Component Axis: 0
Apply
Reinforcement Grid
ID: 3
Name: GridMX
Data ID: 3 Data Name: GridMX

Material 2: Steel
Equivalent Thickness X: 0.654
243
Equivalent Thickness Y: 0.
X Component Axis: 1
Y Component Axis: 0
Z Component Axis: 0
Apply
Reinforcement Grid
ID: 4
Name: GridEY
Data ID: 4 Data Name: GridEY

Material 2: Steel
Equivalent Thickness X: 0.
Equivalent Thickness Y: 0.872
X Component Axis: 1
Y Component Axis: 0
Z Component Axis: 0
Apply
Reinforcement Grid
ID: 5
Name: GridMY
Data ID: 5 Data Name: GridMY

Material 2: Steel
Equivalent Thickness X: 0.
Equivalent Thickness Y: 0.654
X Component Axis: 1
Y Component Axis: 0
Z Component Axis: 0
OK
For meshing reinforcements not only the properties of the reinforcement grid should
be defined, but also properties of reinforcement sections. Note the different tab form
name between the reinforcement grid section and the reinforcement grid.
FX+
Grid sections
Property Manager
Create
Reinforcement...

Reinforcement Grid Section (2D)
Data ID: 6
ID: 6
Name: ReGridSec
Data Name: ReGridSec
OK
Property Manager
18.2.4
Close
Meshing
Now we can mesh the model. We will use a regular mesh with quadratic curved shell
(CQ40S) elements for the slab. For the slab we will use elements with a length of 50 mm.
iMeshing the concrete slab
Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Face
FX+
Face...
Select Face(s) Select the slab

Element Size: 50
Mesh Size
Property: 1
Mesh Set
Name: Slab
OK
Also the Auto-Mesh Face will be used for meshing the 4 reinforcement grids. For the
reinforcement grids a division of 1 will be used so that there will be only one reinforcement
section per grid.
244

FX+
Meshing the reinforcement grids

Mesh Auto Mesh
Auto-Mesh Face
Face...
Select Face(s) Select reinforcement grid X in the edge strip

Division: 1
Mesh Size
Property
6: ReGridSec
g Reinforcement
Type Grid in Curved Shell

2: GridEX
Mesh Set Name: GridEX
Apply
Auto-Mesh Face
Select Face(s) Select reinforcement grid X in the mid strip

Division: 1
Mesh Size
Property
6: ReGridSec
g Reinforcement

3: GridMX
Mesh Set Name: GridMX
Apply
Auto-Mesh Face
Select Face(s) Select reinforcement grid Y in the edge strip

Division: 1
Mesh Size
Property
6: ReGridSec
g Reinforcement

4: GridEY
Mesh Set Name: GridEY
Apply
Auto-Mesh Face
Select Face(s) Select reinforcement grid Y in the mid strip

Division: 1
Mesh Size
Property
6: ReGridSec
g Reinforcement

5: GridMY
Mesh Set Name: GridMY
OK
We use the following commands to make quadratic elements:

Quadratic elements
FX+

Change
Order
Select Element(s)
Select all elements of the slab Apply
Quadratic
18.2.5
Boundary Conditions
Only the four corners are supported [Fig. 18.2]. A quarter of the model has been modeled
so only the bottom-left node will be supported. The nodes on the symmetry planes XZ
and Y Z should be supported to fulfill symmetry conditions.
Boundary condition sets
Analysis
BC Set
BC
Name: SymXZ
Name: SymYZ
Name: Corner
FX+
Set...
Add
Add
Add
Symmetry XZ cross-section
Analysis BC
Constraint
245
FX+
Constraint...
BC Set SymXZ
Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
Select nodes on the top edge
Symmetry Plane 31
Apply
Symmetry YZ cross-section
Analysis BC
Constraint
FX+
Constraint...
BC Set SymYZ
Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
Select nodes on the right hand edge
Symmetry Plane 23
Apply
FX+
Corner
Analysis BC
Constraint
Constraint...
BC Set Corner
Object Type Node
Select Node(s)
g T3
DOF
Select bottom-left node
OK
18.2.6
Loading
The loading comprises the self weight and two pressure loads on the beam: A permament
pressure load of 1 kN/m2 in negative Z direction and a variable load of 10 kN/m2 in
negative Z direction. The permanent and variable pressure load will be applied on the
whole slab. Both loads can be entered the same, only the name and the value is different.
FX+
Loading sets
Analysis Load
Load Set
Set...
Name: Self weight

Name: Permanent
Name: Variable
Add
Add
Add
FX+
Self weight
Analysis Load
Body Force
Body Force...
Load Set Self weight

Type Gravity
Gravity G1: 0 G2: 0 G3: -9800
OK
246

FX+
Permanent pressure load

Pressure Load Set Permanent
Object
Type
Type
Face Pressure
2D Element
Select Element(s)
Add
Mode
Select concrete slab elements

g Uniform

Apply
FX+
Variable pressure load

Pressure Load Set Variable
Object
Type
Type
Face Pressure
2D Element
Select Element(s)
Add
Mode
Select concrete slab elements

g Uniform

Apply
18.3
Design Analysis
We will first run the reinforcement grid design application.
18.3.1
Parameters for Design Analysis
In this paragraph the special parameters for using the module *DESIGN are described.
The required area of reinforcement will be calculate using the module *DESIGN when the
parameter DESIGN is specified for the reinforcement grid in table GEOMET. The reinforcement grid will only contribute to the stiffness of the slab (like in a regular *LINSTA
or *NONLIN analysis) when the parameter DESIGN is omitted. To check the maximum
spacing and diameter of the reinforcement, we have to define the diameter of the reinforcement (PHI) and the spacing (SPACIN). The diameter of the reinforcement in both
X and Y direction is 10 mm, the spacing 90 mm for the edge strip and 120 mm for the
mid strip [ 18.2.3]. In the GTB-table the results have been defined as the average values
over the width of the strip. This is also possible in the design module by using the result
ASREQ AVERAGE. This result will be calculated by averaging the nodal required area of
reinforcement (ASREQ NODES) over a distance of the parameter SPREAD s in perpendicular
direction of the result, keeping the actual node in the middle [Fig. 18.4]. Only results
within the reinforcement are being used. The spread parameter s should be larger than
or equal to 2 times the width of the reinforcement to get one constant value for ASREQ
AVERAGE over the width of the reinforcement. So, in this case s is equal to 2 m. All these
parameters should be defined in table GEOMET of the reinforcement grids.
Design analysis parameters GridEX
Model
Geometries GridEX
Mesh Editor
Properties...
GridEX Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
PHI
Value: 10 0
SPACIN Value: 90 0
SPREADValue: 2000
DESIGN OK
18.3 Design Analysis
247
Figure 18.4: Calculation of average required area of reinforcement

Design analysis parameters GridMX
Model
Geometries GridMX
Mesh Editor
Properties...
GridMX Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
PHI
Value: 10 0
SPACIN Value: 120 0
Spread
Value: 2000
DESIGN OK
Design analysis parameters GridEY

Model
Geometries GridEY
Mesh Editor
Properties...
GridEY Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
PHI
Value: 0 10
SPACIN Value: 0 90
Spread
Value: 2000
DESIGN OK
Design analysis parameters GridMY

Model
Geometries GridMY
Mesh Editor
Properties...
GridMY Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
PHI
Value: 0 10
SPACIN Value: 0 120
Spread
Value: 2000
DESIGN OK
The local x axes for all grids are in global X direction (XAXIS 1 0 0). When a value of
PHI or SPACIN is equal to zero, all results in corresponding direction will be set equal to
zero, except the required area of reinforcement (ASREQ).
For the design reinforcement grid the yield stress (YLDSTR) must be defined as material
property.
Reinforcement steel parameters
Model
Materials Steel
Mesh Editor
Properties...
Steel Properties
Property
YLDSTR
Value: 435
OK
For the concrete the tensile strength (FCTM) and crack width class (CRACKW) must be
defined as material properties.
248

Concrete parameters
Model
Materials Concrete
Mesh Editor
Properties...
Concrete Properties
Property
Property
FCTM
Value: 3.2
CRACKW Value: MEDIUM
OK
18.3.2
Commands
Two combinations of load cases with different load cases will be generation: one for the Ultimate Limit State (ULS) and one for the Serviceability Limit State (SLS). The minimum
(UCMIN) and maximum (UCMAX) amount of reinforcement, required area of reinforcement (ASREQ), applied area of reinforcement (ASAPL), and the ratio of required and
applied area of reinforcement (ASRAT) will be checked in ULS. The maximum diameter
(UCPHI) and maximum spacing (UCSPA) will be checked in SLS.
For each combination two output blocks will be defined: one for the nodal results and
one for the averaged results over the width of the grid.
Design analysis
design.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*DESIGN
EXECUT
BEGIN COMBIN
NAME
SLS1
CASES
1
2
3 /
FACTOR 1.0 1.0 1.0 /
TYPE
SLS
END COMBIN
BEGIN COMBIN
NAME
ULS1
CASES
1
2
3 /
FACTOR 1.2 1.2 1.5 /
TYPE
ULS
END COMBIN
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="ULS-nodes"
BEGIN SELECT
TYPE ULS
END SELECT
ASREQ NODES
ASAPL
UCMIN
ASRAT NODES
UCMAX
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="ULS-average"
BEGIN SELECT
TYPE ULS
END SELECT
ASREQ AVERAGE
ASRAT AVERAGE
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="SLS-nodes"
BEGIN SELECT
TYPE SLS
END SELECT
UCPHI NODES
UCSPA NODES
249
ASRAT NODES
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="SLS-average"
BEGIN SELECT
TYPE SLS
END SELECT
UCPHI AVERAGE
UCSPA AVERAGE
ASRAT AVERAGE
END OUTPUT
*END
250
18.3.3
Results
After running the analysis, the results can be imported in FX+. Select the four dpb and
dmb files. Select only the reinforcement in the Pre-Works and Hide the slab elements,
because we are only interested in the results in the reinforcement grids.
18.3.3.1
Applied Area of Reinforcement
First we will check if the applied steel area (ASAPL) is correct. The diameter is 10 mm
and the spacing between the bars is 90 mm for the edge strip and 120 mm for the mid
strip. This means that the applied area of reinforcement in both directions for the edge
reinforcement grid should be:
102
ASAPL =
/90 = 0.872mm2 /mm
(18.9)
4
For the mid reinforcement grid the applied area of reinforcement in both directions should
be:
102
/120 = 0.654mm2 /mm
ASAPL =
(18.10)
4
The applied reinforcement area in reinforcement grid in x direction and y direction are
given in Figure 18.5 and Figure 18.6.
(a) x direction
(b) y direction
Figure 18.5: ASAPL for the reinforcement grids in X direction
(a) x direction
(b) y direction
Figure 18.6: ASAPL for the reinforcement grids in Y direction

18.3.3.2
251
Required Area of Reinforcement
The required area of reinforcement (ASREQ) will be calculated out of the reinforcement
forces and moment. We asked for the required area of reinforcement in the nodes. This
means that in every node the ASREQ will be calculated. For every reinforcement grid the
required area of reinforcement will be calculated without taken other reinforcement grids
into account. Every reinforcement grid has a result of ASREQ in both direction x and
y when two values are specified for PHI and SPACIN, even when a value has been defined
equal to zero. When only one value has been defined for PHI and SPACIN, i.e. only bars in
local x direction, like in this example GridEX and GridMX, only ASREQ in x direction
has values not equal to zero. These results are visualized in Figure 18.7 and Figure 18.8.
Because of symmetry the results of ASREQ in x and y direction in the reinforcement
(a) x direction
(b) y direction
Figure 18.7: ASREQ for the reinforcement grids in X direction
(a) x direction
(b) y direction
Figure 18.8: ASREQ for the reinforcement grids in Y direction

grid in Y direction are mirrored Figure 18.8. Note the small difference when comparing
Figure 18.7a and Figure 18.8a. ASREQ in x direction in the reinforcement grid in Y
direction is slightly higher than in the reinforcement in X direction. This is caused by
the difference in Z coordinate of those two reinforcement grids. From now on we will
focus on checking only the results in the reinforcement grids in Y direction, because these
grids are normative.
The required area of reinforcement at location (b) and (e) was already calculated conform the GTB-table [ 18.2.3]: 0.843 mm2 /mm for location (b) and 0.625 mm2 /mm for
location (e). To compare these results with the Diana results, we will tag the ASREQ results at the location (b) and (e) via the Post menu and selecting Probe Result [Fig. 18.9]a.
Activate Nodal average in the Post Style tab to tag these results. We will do the same
for the average results (ASREQ AVERAGE) where ASREQ will be averaged over the width of
the strip, like in the GTB-table. These results are given in Figure 18.9b. The maximum
252
(a) nodal result
(b) average result
Figure 18.9: ASREQ for the reinforcement grids in Y direction

value is given in the legend. For the edge strip the maximum ASREQ AVERAGE is equal to
0.847, for the mid strip 0.627. The Diana results are almost equal to the GTB results
[Table 18.1].
Table 18.1: Required area of reinforcement (ASREQ)
Result
GTB ASREQ
ASREQ NODES
ASREQ AVERAGE (at node)
ASREQ AVERAGE (maximum)
18.3.3.3
Location (b)
0.842
0.777
0.784
0.847
Location (e)
0.625
0.586
0.618
0.627
Ratio of Required over Applied Area of Reinforcement
The ratio of required area over the applied area of reinforcement (ASRAT) gives information if there is enough reinforcement in the structure. More reinforcement should be
applied when ASRAT is larger than 1.0, because in that case te required area is larger
than the applied area of reinforcement. The optimum situation is that the value of ASRAT is close to 1.0. Low values indicate that there is an overcapacity of reinforcement.
Figure 18.10a shows the ASRAT in the nodes for the reinforcement grid in Y direction.
(a) nodal result
(b) average result
Figure 18.10: ASRAT for the reinforcement grids in Y direction

Note that the nodal average option of FX+ has been turned off. The maximum value
for ASRAT is equal to 1.62 due to the stress peak value at the support. But also in the
field values larger than 1.0 are found (yellow areas). This means that more reinforcement
253
should be applied. The diameter should be increased or the spacing decreased. But
in the GTB table the required area of reinforcement is calculated by averaging over the
width of the reinforcement strip. This is possible by using the average results (given by
the value of the SPREAD parameter) instead of the results in the nodes. This result is
shown in Figure 18.10b. Now all values are lower than 1.0 so the amount of reinforcement
applied fulfills. The maximum value of 0.97 is close to 1.0, so this is already an optimal
design. A more optimal design can be obtained for example when not using strips of
reinforcement grids of 0.25l and 0.5l.
18.3.3.4
Maximum and Minimum Area of Reinforcement
Based on the result ASRAT the amount of reinforcement applied fulfills. But the values
of unity checks on maximum and minimum area of reinforcement should be lower as 1.0
as well. These results are shown in Figure 18.11. All values are lower than 1.0 so they
are OK.
(a) maximum area
(b) minimum area
Figure 18.11: Maximum and minimum area of reinforcement Y direction
18.3.3.5
Maximum Diameter and Spacing
The required area of reinforcement is calculated in the Ultimate Limit State. But you also
have to check if the chosen diameter [Fig. 18.12] and spacing [Fig. 18.13] fulfill the checks
on crack control and limitation in the Serviceability Limit State. The nodal values are
higher than 1.0 but this is only locally at the support. Looking at the averaged results,
all values are equal or lower than 1.0.
(a) nodal results
(b) averaged results
Figure 18.12: Maximum diameter of reinforcement Y direction
254
(a) nodal results
(b) averaged results
Figure 18.13: Maximum spacing of reinforcement Y direction
18.4
With the reinforcement grid design module the required area of reinforcement is calculated
and compared with the applied area of reinforcement. The diameter and spacing are
checked on crack control and limitation in the Serviceability Limit State by choosing an
acceptable maximum crack width, but the real crack width in the slab is not calculated.
With a stiffness adaptation analysis (*STADAP) or nonlinear analysis (*NONLIN) the crack
width, crack pattern, and onset of yielding of the reinforcement can be calculated. In
this way we can really check if the chosen area of reinforcement fulfills by calculating the
crack width and checking if yielding occurs in the reinforcement or not. In this paragraph
the stiffness adaptation module will be used.
18.4.1
Workflow
The workflow of optimizing the design on the amount of reinforcement is given in Figure
18.14. The first steps with the reinforcement grid design module are already done. We
will continue with the stiffness adaptation module to check the design more in detail.
18.4.2
Stiffness Adaptation Parameters
To use the stiffness adaptation module (*STADAP) some modifications to the model are
required. First, the DESIGN parameter has to be removed from the geometry properties
of the reinforcement grids. So that the reinforcement grids contribute to the stiffness.
Second, the specific material properties for the reinforcement grid design analysis have to
be removed, i.e. YLDSTR, FCTM, and CRACKW.
For the concrete the crack model parameters must be defined as material properties
in the stiffness adaptation analysis. Note that the Poissons ratio is modified to 0.2.
Concrete parameters
Model
Materials Concrete
Mesh Editor
Properties...
Concrete Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
POISON
TENCRV
TENSTR
GF1
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
0.2
LINEAR
3.2
0.1
OK
For the steel the tension and compression parameters must be defined as material
properties in the stiffness adaptation analysis. Note that the Poissons ratio is modified
to 0.3.
255
Figure 18.14: Workflow for optimizing the reinforcement area

Steel parameters
Model
Mesh Editor
Materials Steel
Properties...
Steel Properties
Property
Property
Property
Property
Property
POISON
TENCRV
TENSTR
COMCRV
COMSTR
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
Value:
0.3
CONSTA
435
CONSTA
435
OK
For the stiffness adaptation analysis load combinations will be created to get a good
load history.
Load combinations
Model
Mesh Editor
Loads Load Combinations
Properties...
Load Combinations
Load
Load
Load
Load
Combination
Combination
Combination
Combination
1
2
3
4
Load
Load
Load
Load
case
case
case
case
1:
2:
3:
1:
1
1
1
0.2
Load case 2: 0.2
Load case 3: 0.5
More integration points over the thickness are required to get more accuracy.
Integration scheme
Model
Element Data Slab
Mesh Editor
Properties...
Slab Properties
Property
NINTEG
Value: 2
OK
256
18.4.3
Commands
In the stiffness adaptation analysis the crack width and yielding in the reinforcement will
be checked. Therefore, the output results STRAIN CRKWDT and STRESS TOTAL have been
selected. The stiffness reduction factor (PARAME STADAP) gives information on how much
the stiffness is reduced. In this stiffness adaptation calculation the maximum number of
iterations is set to 10. This is good enough for the first estimation, but for more accurate
results you can set this maximum to 300 iterations. But then of course the calculation
time is increasing.
Design analysis
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*STADAP
MODEL
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
PARAME STADAP
STRAIN CRKWDT
STRESS TOTAL
STRAIN TOTAL
DISPLA
END OUTPUT
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD 1
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES
ITERATE MAXITE 10
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD 2
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES
ITERATE MAXITE 10
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD 3
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES
ITERATE MAXITE 10
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD 4
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES
ITERATE MAXITE 10
END EXECUT
*END
18.4.4
stadap.dcf
1.0(1)
1.(1)
0.2(5)
.2(5)
Results (10 Iterations)
The crack width and stiffness reduction factor will be checked in the Serviceability Limit
State, the yielding in the reinforcement in Ultimate Limit state.
18.4.4.1
Crack Width
First, we will focus on the cracking in the slab. We only show the slab elements in the
model tree, and hide the reinforcements. Step 7 is the Serviceability Limit State. The
bottom side of the slab is layer 1. Select step 7 and the output item Layer1-Principal
Crackwidth Ecw1 Nodes. In Figure 18.15a we can see that the whole slab is cracking at
the bottom. The crack pattern is very diffuse. The maximum crack width is equal to
0.44 mm locally at the support. This is larger than what is permitted in the Eurocode
(0.3 mm). But normally at the supports (columns) extra reinforcement is applied. This
is, however, not done in this example. Here we focus on the field area. In Figure 18.15b
257
the legend has been changed so that the crack area at the middle part of the plate is more
visible. The crack width is less than 0.1 mm in the middle part.
(a) Eurocode (0.3 mm)
(b) modified legend (0.02 mm)
18.4.4.2
Stiffness Reduction Factor
At the bottom side, the whole slab has a reduced stiffness. This is visualized in Figure
18.16, where output item Stiffness reduction factor (PMst) is displayed. You can see that
the middle is heavily cracked because the stiffness is reduced more (blue / green area)
compared to the surrounding (red/orange area).
Figure 18.16: Tension stiffness reduction factor
18.4.4.3
Yield Stress
In Figure 18.17 the stress in the reinforcement is shown in Ultimate Limit State. The
yield stress is equal to 435 N/mm2 and is not yet reached in the Ultimate Limit State
258

(step 12), only local at the support. The reinforcement is not yet yielding so the slab is
well designed.
Figure 18.17: Reinforcement stress
18.4.5
Results (300 Iterations)
The crack width and stiffness reduction factor will be checked in the Serviceability Limit
State, the yielding in the reinforcement in Ultimate Limit state.
18.4.5.1
Crack Width
First, we will focus on the cracking in the slab. We only show the slab elements in the
model tree, and hide the reinforcements. Step 7 is the Serviceability Limit State. The
bottom side of the slab is layer 1. Select step 7 and the output item Layer1-Principal
Crackwidth Ecw1 Nodes. In Figure 18.18a we can see that the whole slab is cracking at
the bottom. The crack pattern is very diffuse. The maximum crack width is equal to
0.88 mm locally at the support. This is larger than what is permitted in the Eurocode
(0.3 mm). But normally at the supports (columns) extra reinforcement is applied. This
is, however, not done in this example. Here we focus on the field area. In Figure 18.18b
the legend has been changed so that the crack area at the middle part of the plate is more
visible. The crack width is less than 0.1 mm in the middle part.
18.4.5.2
At the bottom side, the whole slab has a reduced stiffness. This is visualized in Figure
18.19, where output item Stiffness reduction factor (PMst) is displayed. You can see that
the middle is heavily cracked because the stiffness is reduced more (blue / green area)
compared to the surrounding (red/orange area).
(a) Eurocode (0.3 mm)
259
(b) modified legend (0.02 mm)
Figure 18.19: Tension stiffness reduction factor

18.4.5.3
Yield Stress
In Figure 18.20 the stress in the reinforcement is shown in Ultimate Limit State. The yield
stress is equal to 435 N/mm2 and is not yet reached in the Ultimate Limit State (step
12), only local at the support. The reinforcement is not yet yielding so the slab is well
designed. Compared to the results of the stiffness adaptation analysis with a maximum
of 10 iterations [Fig. 18.17], the highest stresses are now completely concentrated near the
support.
260
Figure 18.20: Reinforcement stress
Chapter 19

Name:
CompLine
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/CompLine
Keywords:
analys: nonlin physic stadap.

class: large.
constr: suppor.
elemen: compos grid hx24l interf l2cmp q24if reinfo solid struct taper.
load: elemen face force.
materi: elasti harden hordyk isotro multil nonlin soften thoren.
result: cauchy crkwdt displa force green moment strain stress total tracti.
In this example, composed line elements are defined in a solid bridge model and the
application of composed line elements is demonstrated. The main application of composed
elements is in postprocessing of analysis results.
The mesh of the solid elements may be unstructured and there are no topological
constraints with the composed line elements. The local forces and bending moments are
calculated and presented with reference to the composed line elements. The primary
Cauchy stresses or internal forces in the solid elements are integrated over the cross
section plane normal to the reference line. All types of regular elements and embedded
reinforcements contribute to the crosssection forces and bending moments in a composed
line element. Selection can be made to determine which composed elements, regular
elements and reinforcements will contribute to the composed element results.
The bridge is subjected to local pressure loads [Fig. 19.1]. Plane shaped reinforcement
grids are embedded in solid [Fig. 19.3]. Surface interface elements are used between the
girder and the pier. Nonlinear analysis and stiffness adaptation analysis are performed
and their results are compared.
262
Figure 19.1: Plan and elevation
Figure 19.2: Crosssection
Figure 19.3: Embedded grid reinforcements
19.1
19.1.1
Geometry
263
For this example choose the units [kN,m].

19.1.1.1
Surface
Import a predefined geometry file [Fig. 19.5]. Via the Advanced Geometry STEP, open
Geometry.stp [Fig. 19.4]. The imported surface geometry will be used for creating a
bridge and reinforcements.
Figure 19.4: Import option
Figure 19.5: Imported geometry
264

19.1.1.2
Line
Via the 2D Line dialog, create a line geometry for composed line elements [Fig. 19.6]. The
begin and end coordinates of the line are (0,0) and (47,0).
Figure 19.6: Line geometry for composed line elements
19.1.2
Properties
Elastic material properties will be applied to the girder, pier and reinforcements. Nonlinear behavior will be applied only for the interface elements.
19.1.2.1
Girder
Via the Material Manager dialog, define a material property Girder with a Youngs
modulus E = 3.3282 107 kPa and Poissons ratio 0.2. Via the Property Manager dialog,
specify a regular solid element.
19.1.2.2
Pier
Via the Material Manager dialog, define a material property Pier with a Youngs modulus
E = 3.1938 107 kPa and Poissons ratio 0.2. Via the Property Manager dialog, specify
a regular solid element.
19.1.2.3
Reinforcement
Define the shape of the grid sections in the Diana model and the material and geometrical properties for the reinforcement. Define a material property Steel with a Youngs
modulus E = 1.95 108 kPa and Poissons ratio 0.3. The equivalent thicknesses of the
reinforcements are 15 mm in the longitudinal direction and 5 mm in the transverse direction. For the convenience of modeling, the local x axis of the reinforcement grid is set to
the global Y axis.

19.1.2.4
265
Composed Element
For the composed element, create a dummy material property. Composed elements do
not have mechanical properties such as stiffness or mass. Therefore, these elements do
not influence the behavior of the finite element model. Specify the radial thickness of
the composed line elements. Only the element nodes positioned within the thickness in
radial direction will be included in the calculation of forces and moments in composed
line elements. If the thickness is not specified, Diana assumes that the composed line
element may extend to infinity in radial direction. It is compulsory to define a local z
axis to define a unique element plane.
19.1.2.5
Surface Interface Element
Define nonlinear elasticity for interfaces with a large stiffness for compression and zero
stiffness for tension by setting a multilinear relation between normal traction and perpendicular relative displacement [Fig. 19.7]. For linear structural analysis specify the linear
stiffness (normal and shear stiffness) for interface elements. For stiffness adaptation analysis only the linear material behavior of surface interface elements will be taken into
account.
Figure 19.7: Nonlinear elastic model

Materi
MATERI
1 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
2 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
3 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
4 NAME
5 NAME
DSTIF
SIGDIS
CompLineNon.dat
"Girder"
3.32820E+007
2.00000E-001
"Pier"
3.19380E+007
2.00000E-001
"Steel"
1.95000E+008
3.00000E-001
"Composed"
"SurInt"
1.00000E+009 1.00000E+006
-1.00000E+012 -1.00000E+003
0.00000E+000 1.00000E+003
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
266

Geomet
GEOMET
1 NAME
XAXIS
2 NAME
THICK
ZAXIS
3 NAME
4 NAME
5 NAME
THICK
XAXIS
CompLineNon.dat
"SurInt"
1.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
"Composed_Line"
7.00000E+001
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
"Girder"
"Pier"
"Rebar"
5.00000E-003 1.50000E-002
0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000
19.1.3
Meshing
19.1.3.1
Girder
0.00000E+000
1.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
Hide the top surface and show the bottom surface only. Define the mesh sizes along the
transverse edges of the bottom surface. Select the six edges and specify the number of
divisions of eleven along each edge [Fig. 19.8]. Via the Auto-Mesh Face dialog, specify
an element size of 0.3 m [Fig. 19.9]. Show the top surface [Fig. 19.10]. Via the Project
Mesh dialog, project the bottom face meshes to the top surface [Fig. 19.11]. Once the
solid mesh is created, delete the bottom face meshes.
Figure 19.8: Size control
19.1.3.2
Pier
Change the View Point to Bottom. Via the Extrude Mesh dialog, extrude the forty four
element faces at the bottom of the solid mesh by 0.1 m to the negative (-) Z direction
[Fig. 19.12] [Fig. 19.13].
19.1.3.3
Reinforcement
Hide all the mesh sets. Show the top surface only. Via the Translate dialog, move the
top surface by 0.06 m downwards as the cover thickness is 6 cm. Via the Auto-Mesh Face
267
Figure 19.9: Bottom face mesh
Figure 19.10: Project mesh

dialog, create a top reinforcement mesh by specifying a division of one and selecting Grid
in Solid for reinforcement option [Fig. 19.14].
Hide the top reinforcement mesh and show the bottom surface only. Via the Explode
dialog, explode the bottom surface to the lower level shapes (i.e., faces). Then hide the side
faces remaining the bottom faces only [Fig. 19.15]. Similarly create bottom reinforcement
mesh sets. Via the Translate Mesh dialog, move the bottom reinforcement mesh sets by
0.06 m upwards as the cover thickness is 6 cm [Fig. 19.16].
19.1.3.4
Composed Line
Via the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog, create composed line elements by specifying an interval
length of 0.3 m [Fig. 19.17].
268
Figure 19.11: Solid mesh
Figure 19.12: Extrude mesh
Figure 19.13: Pier mesh (green)

19.1.3.5
Surface Interface
Via the Create Interface Element dialog, create surface interface elements between the
Girder and the Pier mesh sets.
269
Figure 19.14: Top reinforcement mesh
Figure 19.15: Exploded bottom faces
19.1.4
Boundary Conditions
Via the Constraint dialog, create a new set of boundary constraints. At the pier and the
abutments, support all translational displacements uX , uY and uZ (degrees of freedom
T1, T2 and T3). The display confirms the correct definition of the supports [Fig. 19.18].
19.1.5
Loading
In this example, unrealistically high loads are applied to cause damage to the bridge.
Via the Pressure dialog, apply local pressure loads with the magnitude of 300 kN/m2
[Fig. 19.19].
270
Figure 19.16: Bottom reinforcement mesh sets
Figure 19.17: Composed line elements
271
Figure 19.19: Pressure loads
272
19.2
Nonlinear Analysis
19.2.1
Analysis Settings
We set three output blocks. In the first output block, we select all regular elements and
all composed elements but no reinforcements. In the second output block, we select all
composed elements and all reinforcements, but no regular elements. In the third output
block, we select all regular elements, composed elements and reinforcements. In doing so,
it is possible to distinguish between contributions from elements only, from reinforcements
only, and from both elements and reinforcements.
Composed element results will be calculated and output only for the selected Composed Elements. Only the selected Regular Elements will contribute to the composed
element results. Only the Reinforcements located in the selected regular elements will
contribute to the composed element results. When reinforcements NONE is specified, reinforcements will not contribute to the composed element results. The available composed
line element results are local forces and moments.
Nonlin
CompLineNon.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 1
ITERAT MAXITE 20
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO NONE
END SELECT
STRESS TOTAL FORCE LOCAL
STRESS TOTAL MOMENT LOCAL
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI LOCAL INTPNT
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN NONE
REINFO
END SELECT
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI LOCAL INTPNT
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO
END SELECT

STRESS TOTAL
STRESS TOTAL
END OUTPUT
*END
19.2.2
TRACTI
CAUCHY
273
LOCAL INTPNT
GLOBAL
Analysis Results
To assess the results, return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files: CompLineNon.dpb
and CompLineNon.dmb. Three Structural Nonlinear analysis cases are displayed in the
Results tree. First one is the case with element contribution only, the second one is with
the reinforcement contribution only, and the third case is the contribution of both the
elements and the reinforcements.
19.2.2.1
Deformation
Display the deformed shape by selecting the displacement TDtZ(V) [Fig. 19.20]. Due to
the pressure loads, the surface interface between girder and pier, which is supposed to
take compression only, is open.
Figure 19.20: Deformation
274

19.2.2.2
Normal stresses at interfaces
Display the interface elements only. Select STx Intpnt/Nodes to view the normal stresses
at interfaces. The support transfers compressive stresses at the corner, and at the rest
where the interface is open the normal stresses are zero [Fig. 19.21].
Figure 19.21: Normal stresses at interfaces

19.2.2.3
275
Axial forces
Select Composed Line Nx Nodes. Compare the axial forces among the three cases
[Fig. 19.22]. We can see how much the concrete and the reinforcements contribute to the
total result.
Figure 19.22: Axial forces (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both )
276

19.2.2.4
Shear forces
Select Composed Line Qz Nodes. Compare the shear forces among the three cases
total results.
Figure 19.23: Shear forces (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both)

19.2.2.5
277
Bending moments
Select Composed Line My Nodes. Compare the bending moments among the three cases
total results.
Figure 19.24: Bending moments (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both)
278
19.3
19.3.1
To add stiffness adaptation material properties to Girder, Pier and Steel, launch the
Mesh Editor from FX+.
Set material
CompLine.py
setMaterialParameter( "Girder", "TENCRV", [ "HORDYK" ] )

setMaterialParameter( "Girder", "TENSTR", [ "3.82E+3" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Girder", "GF1", [ "100" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Girder", "COMCRV", [ "THOREN" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Girder", "COMSTR", [ "61700" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pier", "TENCRV", [ "HORDYK" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pier", "TENSTR", [ "3.82E+3" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pier", "GF1", [ "100" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pier", "COMCRV", [ "THOREN" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pier", "COMSTR", [ "61700" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "TENCRV", [ "MULTLN" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "TENPAR", [ "0.00000E+000", "0.00000E+000",
"5.00000E+005", "2.50000E-003", "5.00000E+005", "2.50000E-002",
"7.00000E+005", "2.50000E-001" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "COMCRV", [ "MULTLN" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Steel", "COMPAR", [ "0.00000E+000", "0.00000E+000",
"-5.00000E+005", "-2.50000E-003", "-5.00000E+005", "-2.50000E-002",
"-7.00000E+005", "-2.50000E-001" ] )
Materi
ComplineSta.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
TENCRV
TENSTR
GF1
COMCRV
COMSTR
2 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
TENCRV
TENSTR
GF1
COMCRV
COMSTR
3 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
TENCRV
TENPAR
"Girder"
3.32820E+007
2.00000E-001
HORDYK
3.82000E+003
100.
THOREN
6.17000E+004
"Pier"
3.19380E+007
2.00000E-001
HORDYK
3.82000E+003
100.
THOREN
6.17000E+004
"Steel"
1.95000E+008
3.00000E-001
MULTLN
0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 5.00000E+005 2.50000E-003
5.00000E+005 2.50000E-002 7.00000E+005 2.50000E-001
COMCRV MULTLN
COMPAR 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 -5.00000E+005 -2.50000E-003
-5.00000E+005 -2.50000E-002 -7.00000E+005 -2.50000E-001
4 NAME
"Composed"
5 NAME
"SurInt"
DSTIF
1.00000E+009 1.00000E+006
SIGDIS -1.00000E+012 -1.00000E+003 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000 1.00000E+003
19.3.2
279
Stiffness Adaptation Analysis Settings
Define stiffness adaptation analysis settings. Like nonlinear analysis settings, set three
output blocks.
Stadap
CompLineSta.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*STADAP
BEGIN EXECUT
ITERAT MAXITE 10
LOAD 1
END EXECUT
SOLVE PARDIS
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO NONE
END SELECT
PARAME STADAP INTPNT
STRAIN CRKWDT INTPNT
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN NONE
REINFO
END SELECT
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompLineSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO
END SELECT
END OUTPUT
*END
19.3.3
Analysis Results
To assess the results, return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files: CompLineSta.dpb
and CompLineSta.dmb.
280

19.3.3.1
Crack Width at the Last Step
Display the Girder mesh. Select Principal Crackwidth Ecw1 Intpnt at the last step to
view the crack width result [Fig. 19.25].
Figure 19.25: Crack width at the last step
19.3.3.2
Stiffness Reduction Factor in Concrete at the Last Step
Select PMst Intpnt/Nodes and PMsc Intpnt/Nodes under 3D Element Misc to view
the stiffness reduction factor for the concrete in tension [Fig. 19.26] and compression
[Fig. 19.27], respectively.
19.3.3.3
Stresses in the Reinforcements at the Last Step
Hide the Girder mesh and display the Post reinforcement mesh sets. Select Sxx Nodes
and Syy Nodes under 2D Reinforcement Stresses/Strains at the last step to view the
stresses in the reinforcements [Fig. 19.28] [Fig. 19.29].
19.3.3.4
Stiffness Reduction Factor in Reinforcements at the Last Step
Select PMst Intpnt/Nodes and PMsc Intpnt/Nodes under 2D Reinforcement Stresses/Strains

to view the stiffness reduction factor for the reinforcements in tension and compression,
respectively. The steel does not reach the yield stress at the last step and therefore the
stiffness of the reinforcements is not reduced [Fig. 19.30].
281
Figure 19.26: Tension stiffness reduction factor in concrete at the last step
282
Figure 19.27: Compression stiffness reduction factor in concrete at the last step
283
Figure 19.28: Stresses in reinforcements in global Y direction at the last step (top: top
reinforcements, bottom: bottom reinforcements)
284
Figure 19.29: Stresses in reinforcements in global X direction at the last step (top: top
reinforcements, bottom: bottom reinforcements)
285
Figure 19.30: Tension and compression stiffness reduction factor in reinforcements at the
last step
286
19.4
Comparison of Nonlinear Analysis with Stiffness

Adaptation Analysis
Bending moments from nonlinear analysis and stiffness adaptation analysis are compared
in [Fig. 19.31]. When looking at the element contribution, the absolute value of the
minimum bending moment (sagging moment) from *STADAP is smaller than that from
*NONLIN. For the reinforcement contribution, however, the absolute value of the minimum
bending moment (sagging moment) from *STADAP is larger than that from *NONLIN,
because only in *STADAP the concrete is cracked while in *NONLIN the concrete was linear
elastic. Due to the cracking, the stiffness in the concrete is reduced and the stresses in the
reinforcements are increased in *STADAP. Therefore, the contribution of the reinforcements
to the bending moments in *STADAP is larger than in *NONLIN.
Figure 19.31: Comparison of bending moments in nonlinear analysis and stiffness adaptation analysis
Chapter 20
Composed Surface Elements

Name:
CompSurf
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/CompSurf
Keywords:
analys: nonlin physic stadap.

class: large.
constr: suppor.
elemen: compos grid hx24l interf l2cmp q24if reinfo solid struct taper.
load: elemen face force.
materi: elasti harden hordyk isotro multil nonlin soften thoren.
result: cauchy crkwdt displa force green moment strain stress total tracti.
In this example, the application of composed surface elements is demonstrated. We will

use the same bridge model that we used for the Composed Line Elements example
[Ch. 19]. We recommend that you have a look at the Composed Line Elements example
first.
In composed surface elements, the available results are distributed forces and bending moments. The distributed forces and bending moments along a line normal to a
reference surface is calculated from the primary Cauchy stresses in solid elements and
reinforcements located in solid elements that are intersected by the normal line.
As in the Composed Line Elements example, nonlinear analysis and stiffness adaptation analysis will be performed and their results will be compared. Nonlinear property
is defined only for interface elements used for support blocks and concrete is kept linear
elastic.
20.1
Model Modification
We will delete the composed line elements and will create composed surface elements. We
open CompLine.fdb and save as CompSurf.fdb. For this example we choose the units
[kN,m].
20.1.1
Property
We delete the Composed Line mesh set first and the Composed Line property that
we used for the composed line elements. We define a property Composed Surface for
composed surface elements. For a composed surface element a local X axis may be defined,
similar as for a curved shell element. Diana applies the shape of the composed surface
element to determine the direction in which the thickness is measured, by setting up a
normal vector in each node of the base element. The shape and thickness of a composed
surface element determine which solid elements become part of the composed elements:
a solid element will only contribute to a composed surface element if all of its nodes
are positioned within the thickness of the composed surface element. For this algorithm
Diana will assume that the thickness spans symmetrically along the two sides of the
base element, i.e., half the thickness at each side. If we do not specify the thickness then
288

Diana assumes that the composed surface element may extend to infinity at both sides
of the base element. We specify the thickness (THICK) and the shape in FX+ and will
specify XAXIS in the Mesh Editor [ 20.1.3 p. 289].
Geomet
2 NAME
THICK
FLAT
XAXIS
20.1.2
CompSurfNon.dat
"Composed Surface"
1.80000E+000
1.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
Geometry and Mesh
Via the Translate dialog, we move the surface Geometry.stp:Face2, which was used for
creating the top grid reinforcement, by 0.06 m so that the surface will be located at the
top of the bridge [Fig. 20.1]. Via the Auto-Mesh Face dialog, we create a composed surface
element mesh set specifying an element size 0.3 m [Fig. 20.2].
Figure 20.1: Surface
Figure 20.2: Composed surface element mesh
20.1 Model Modification
20.1.3
289
Mesh Editor
To complete the model modification, launch the Mesh Editor from FX+. We define a
local X axis for composed surface elements.
Set geometry
CompSurf.py
setGeometryParameter( "CompSurf", "XAXIS", [ "1", "0", "0" ] )
290
20.2
Nonlinear Analysis
20.2.1
Analysis Settings
We will create a command file by making slight modifications to CompLineNon.dcf of

Composed Line Elements example [Ch. 19]. We change output from local forces and
bending moments to distributed forces and bending moments (i.e., from STRESS TOTAL
FORCE LOCAL and STRESS TOTAL MOMENT LOCAL to STRESS TOTAL DISFOR LOCAL and
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM LOCAL).
Nonlin
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 1
ITERAT MAXITE 20
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO NONE
END SELECT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISFOR
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN NONE
REINFO
END SELECT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISFOR
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfNon"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO
END SELECT
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRESS TOTAL DISFOR
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
CompSurfNon.dcf
GLOBAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL INTPNT
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL INTPNT
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL INTPNT
GLOBAL
20.2.2
291
Analysis Results
We return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files: CompSurfNon.dpb and CompSurfNon.dmb.
Three Structural Nonlinear analysis cases are displayed in the Results tree. First one is the
case with element contribution only, the second one is with the reinforcement contribution
only, and the third case is the contribution of both the elements and the reinforcements.
20.2.2.1
Deformation
The same deformation as in Composed Line Elements example [Ch. 19] occurs, because
the composed surface and line elements will not contribute to the stiffness.
20.2.2.2
Normal stresses at interfaces
Same as Composed Line Elements example [Ch. 19].

20.2.2.3
Axial forces
Select Nxx Nodes. Compare the axial forces among the three cases [Fig. 20.3]. We can
see how much the concrete and the reinforcements contribute to the total result.
Figure 20.3: Axial forces (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both)
292

20.2.2.4
Shear forces
Select Qxz Nodes. Compare the shear forces among the three cases [Fig. 20.4]. We can
see how much the concrete and the reinforcements contribute to the total result.
Figure 20.4: Shear forces (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both)

20.2.2.5
293
Bending moments
Select Mxx Nodes. Compare the bending moments among the three cases [Fig. 20.5].
We can see how much the concrete and the reinforcements contribute to the total result.
Figure 20.5: Bending moments (top: elements, middle: reinforcements, bottom: both)
294
20.3
20.3.1
We apply the same stiffness adaptation material properties as those of Composed Line
Elements example [Ch. 19].
20.3.2
Stiffness Adaptation Analysis Settings
Like for the nonlinear analysis settings, we change CompLineSta.dcf slightly from STRESS
TOTAL FORCE LOCAL and STRESS TOTAL MOMENT LOCAL to STRESS TOTAL DISFOR LOCAL
and STRESS TOTAL DISMOM LOCAL.
Stadap
CompSurfSta.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*STADAP
BEGIN EXECUT
ITERAT MAXITE 10
LOAD 1
END EXECUT
SOLVE PARDIS
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO NONE
END SELECT
STRESS TOTAL DISFOR LOCAL
STRESS TOTAL DISMOM LOCAL
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN NONE
REINFO
END SELECT
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "CompSurfSta"
BEGIN SELECT
ELEMEN
REINFO
END SELECT
END OUTPUT
295
*END
20.3.3
Analysis Results
We return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files: CompSurfSta.dpb and CompSurfSta.dmb.
Crack widths, stiffness reduction factors, stresses in reinforcements are the same as
those of Composed Line Elements example [Ch. 19].
20.3.3.1
Comparison of Nonlinear Analysis with Stiffness Adaptation Analysis
Bending moments from nonlinear analysis and stiffness adaptation analysis are compared
in [Fig. 20.6]. Note that in nonlinear analysis the concrete was kept linear elastic.
We can see that the reinforcements carry a larger load in *STADAP than in *NONLIN.
Only in *STADAP the concrete cracked. In *NONLIN the concrete was kept linear elastic.
Because of the cracking, the stiffness in the concrete is reduced in *STADAP and the stresses
in the reinforcements increase. Therefore, the contribution of the reinforcements to the
bending moments in *STADAP is larger than in *NONLIN.
Figure 20.6: Bending moments in nonlinear and stiffness adaptation analysis
296
Chapter 21
3D Reinforced Concrete Slab

with Design Checks and
Material Failure
Name:
PlateDesign
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/PlateDesign
Keywords:
analys: design linear stadap static.

constr: suppor.
elemen: compos grid hx24l q4cmp reinfo solid taper.
materi: elasti harden isotro linear multil soften.
result: cauchy crkwdt displa extern force green moment reacti strain
stress total.
In this example the application module *DESIGN will be used to do the design checks to
Eurocode 2 EN 1992-1-1 and the stiffness adaptation module *STADAP will be used to
check the crack widths.
A quarter symmetry model of a reinforced concrete slab subjected to self weight and
localized pressure on top will be considered [Fig. 21.1]. The concrete slab will be modeled
with solid elements while for modeling grid reinforcement we will use Dianas unique
embedded grid reinforcement technique. To obtain crosssection forces and bending moments from solid elements, we will use composed surface elements.
Figure 21.1: Model of reinforced concrete slab
298
3D Reinforced Concrete Slab with Design Checks and Material Failure
21.1
For this example we choose the units [N,m].
21.1.1
Geometry
Via the Rectangle (Wire) dialog, we create a rectangle in XY plane with leftbottom
coordinate (0,0) and top-right coordinate (4,4). This surface will be used as a reference
face for modeling a solid slab and composed elements. Via the Translate dialog, we copy
the surface to the location of reinforcement grid at Y = 0.085r m [Fig. 21.2].
Figure 21.2: Surfaces
21.1.2
Material Properties
We will define material properties for concrete slab, steel reinforcement and composed
element.
21.1.2.1
Concrete
To use the stiffness adaptation module *STADAP, the crack model parameters must be
defined for the concrete as material properties [Table 21.1].
Table 21.1: Material parameters for concrete
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Density
Tensile strength
Crack energy
Concrete
MATERI
1 NAME
30
0.2
2400
3.2
150
GPa
kg/m3
MPa
N/m
linsta.dat
"Concrete"
299
YOUNG
3.00000E+10
POISON
2.00000E-01
DENSIT
2.40000E+03
TENCRV LINEAR
TENSTR
3.20000E+06
GF1
1.50000E+02
21.1.2.2
Steel
To use the stiffness adaptation module *STADAP, the tension and compression parameters
must be defined for the steel as material properties [Fig. 21.3]. To use the module *DESIGN,
the yield stress (YLDSTR) must be defined for the design reinforcement grid as material
property [Table 21.2].
Table 21.2: Material parameters for steel
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Density
Yield-stress
200
0.2
7800
435
GPa
kg/m3
MPa
Figure 21.3: Multi-linear curve in tension and compression for steel

Steel
linsta.dat
MATERI
2 NAME
"Steel"
YOUNG
2.00000E+11
POISON
2.00000E-01
DENSIT
7.80000E+03
YLDSTR
4.35000E+08
COMCRV MULTLN
COMPAR
0.00000E+00
-4.35000E+08
TENCRV MULTLN
TENPAR
0.00000E+00
4.35000E+08
0.00000E+00
-1.00000E+03
-4.35000E+08
-2.17500E-03
0.00000E+00
1.00000E+03
4.35000E+08
2.17500E-03
300

21.1.2.3
Composed Element
To use the module *DESIGN, the tensile strength (FCTM) and compressive strength (FCK)
must be defined for the composed element as material properties [Table 21.3]. The default
environmental class (ENVIRO XC4) signifies the maximum crack width 0.3 mm.
Table 21.3: Material parameters for composed element
Design tensile strength
Design compressive strength
3.2
30
MPa
MPa
Composed element
linsta.dat
MATERI
3 NAME
FCTM
FCK
"Composed"
3.20000E+06
3.00000E+07
21.1.3
Geometrical Properties
21.1.3.1
Concrete
We specify a regular solid element.

21.1.3.2
Steel
We will define the shape of the reinforcement grid section and the geometrical properties
for the reinforcement grid. The special parameters for using the module *DESIGN should
be defined. Equivalent thickness x and y should be entered in FX+. Other parameters will
be entered in Mesh Editor [ 21.3.1 p. 305]. Equivalent thickness (THICK) is 0.005655 m
in x direction and 0.003927 m in y direction [Table 21.4].
Table 21.4: Design parameters for reinforcement grid
PHI (diameter)
SPACIN (spacing)
THICK (equivalent thickness)
X direction
0.024 m
0.090 m
0.005655 m
Y direction
0.020 m
0.090 m
0.003927 m
THICK = 0.25 PHI2 /SPACIN

21.1.3.3
Composed Element
We define the thickness 0.2 m.

Geometrical properties
GEOMET
1 NAME
THICK
FLAT
2 NAME
3 NAME
THICK
XAXIS
linsta.dat
"Composed"
2.00000E-01
"Concrete"
GRID
5.65500E-03
1.00000E+00
3.92700E-03
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
21.1.4
Meshing
21.1.4.1
Composed Surface Element
301
Via the Map-Mesh Face dialog we generate composed surface elements. We specify 20 divisions [Fig. 21.4].
Figure 21.4: Composed surface elements
21.1.4.2
Solid Element
We extrude the composed surface two-dimensional elements into three-dimensional mesh

in two directions via the Extrude Mesh dialog. Extrusion length is 0.1 m and the number
of divisions is 2. The same mesh is created into Z direction and Z direction [Fig. 21.5].
Figure 21.5: Solid elements
21.1.4.3
Reinforcement Grid
We hide all mesh sets and show the surface for reinforcement grid. Via the Auto-Mesh
Face dialog, we generate a reinforcement grid in the surface with one division [Fig. 21.6].
302
Figure 21.6: Reinforcement grid mesh
21.1.5
Boundary Conditions
Via the Constraint dialog, we constrain Z displacements at X = 0 and Y = 0 edges and

assign normal supports at symmetry planes [Fig. 21.7].
21.1.6
Loading
We define a surface pressure load at four element faces of the concrete mesh via the
Pressure dialog with the magnitude of load 1 107 N/m2 [Fig. 21.8]. Via the Body Force
dialog, we define a dead weight load.
Loads
linsta.dat
21.2 Linear Analysis
303
Figure 21.8: Pressure load

LOADS
CASE 1
ELEMEN
3591 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
3590 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
3630 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
3631 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
CASE 2
WEIGHT
21.2
ZETA2
-1.00000E+07
NORMAL
ZETA2
-1.00000E+07
NORMAL
ZETA2
-1.00000E+07
NORMAL
ZETA2
-1.00000E+07
NORMAL
Linear Analysis
We first run a linear elastic analysis to demonstrate how crosssection forces and bending
moments can be calculated from solid elements.
21.2.1
Analysis Settings
We launch Mesh Editor from FX+ to run linear elastic analysis.

Linear static analysis
linsta.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*LINSTA
OUTPUT FXPLUS
304

*END
21.2.2
Analysis Results
To access the results we return to FX+ and import result files: linsta.dpb and linsta.dmb.
The Results tree in FX+ is now populated with linear static results (two load cases).
21.2.2.1
Shear Force
We select the shear force Qxz for load case 1 [Fig. 21.9].
Figure 21.9: Shear force for load case 1
21.2.2.2
Bending Moment
We select the bending moment Myy for load case 1 [Fig. 21.10].
Figure 21.10: Bending moment for load case 1
21.3 Design Checks
21.3
Design Checks
21.3.1
Mesh Editor
305
We defined THICK before. For a design check the reinforcement grid should be defined
in terms of PHI (diameter of bar) and SPACIN (distance between bars). We need to add
these parameters to the geometric properties of the reinforcement grid. Next to PHI and
SPACIN we shall also define the DESIGN parameter for the reinforcement, to make sure
that it is considered in the design analysis.
Set geometrical properties
design.py
setGeometryParameter( "GRID", "DESIGN", [] )

setGeometryParameter( "GRID", "PHI", [ "2.40000E-002", "2.00000E-002" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "GRID", "SPACIN", [ "8.00000E-002", "8.00000E-002" ] )
21.3.2
Checking Design Settings
We define a SLS (Serviceability Limit State) type load combination of 1Load 2 (weight
load) and 0.5Load 1 (pressure load) and name the combination SLS1. We also define an
ULS (Ultimate Limit State) type load combination of 1Load 1 + 1Load 2. We define
two output blocks, one for SLS checks and one for ULS. For the SLS check we select the
unity checks for spacing between bars and unity checks for bar diameter. For ULS we
select the required area per length (equivalent thickness) and unity checks for minimum
and maximum amount of reinforcement in the grid.
Design
design.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*DESIGN
EXECUT MODEL EVALUA
BEGIN COMBIN
CASES 1 2
FACTOR 0.5 1.
NAME SLS1
TYPE SLS
END COMBIN
BEGIN COMBIN
CASES 1 2
FACTOR 1. 1.
NAME ULS1
TYPE ULS
END COMBIN
ENVELO
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
SELECT TYPE SLS
BEGIN STRESS
DISFOR
DISMOM
END STRESS
UCPHI
UCSPA
END OUTPUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
SELECT TYPE ULS
BEGIN STRESS
DISFOR
DISMOM
END STRESS
ASREQ
306

ASAPL
ASRAT
UCMIN
UCMAX
END OUTPUT
*END
21.3.3
Design Check Results
To access the results we return to FX+ and import result files: design.dpb and design.dmb.
The Results tree in FX+ is now populated with design check results for load combinations
SLS1 and ULS1.
21.3.3.1
SLS Checks
We select the results for Unity Checks in SLS for both directions and for both diameter
[Fig. 21.11] and spacing [Fig. 21.12]. All unity check results are between 0 and 1 and thus
in agreement with design code for SLS.
Figure 21.11: Unity checks diameter in SLS (left: X direction, right: Y direction)
Figure 21.12: Unity checks spacing in SLS (left: X direction, right: Y direction)
21.3.3.2
ULS Checks
We select the results for required/applied reinforcement [Fig. 21.13] and unity checks for
maximum [Fig. 21.14] and minimum reinforcements [Fig. 21.15] in ULS for both directions.
All unity check results are between 0 and 1 and thus in agreement with design code for
ULS.
21.3 Design Checks
307
Figure 21.13: Required/applied area in ULS (left: X direction, right: Y direction)
Figure 21.14: Unity checks max. area in ULS (left: X direction, right: Y direction)
Figure 21.15: Unity checks min. area in ULS (left: X direction, right: Y direction)
308
21.4
21.4.1
Mesh Editor
We change the integration point scheme for the 8-node hexahedrons from default 222
to 111. We also switch off the constant shear option for these elements. We reduce
the integration scheme for the concrete elements, in order to reduce analysis time and
avoid stress oscillations.
Set element data
stadap.py
setElementDataParameter( "Concrete", "NINTEG", [ "1", "1", "1" ] )

setElementDataParameter( "Concrete", "NOCSHE", [] )
21.4.2
Analysis Settings
We define two execute blocks: First one is for application of weight load (load 2) in 1 load
increment and maximum of 3 iterations. Second one is for application of local pressure
load (load 1) in 100.1 load increments and maximum of 3 iterations.
Stiffness adaptation analysis
stadap.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*STADAP
EXECUT LOAD 2
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD 1
ITERAT MAXITE=3
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
PARAME STADAP CENTER
STRAIN CRKWDT CENTER
STRESS CAUCHY CENTER
END OUTPUT
*END
If more precise results are required the same analysis can be run with more load
increments and higher number of maximum iterations.
21.4.3
Analysis Results
To access the results we return to FX+ and import result files: stadap.dpb and stadap.dmb.
The Results tree in FX+ is now populated with Stiffness Adaptation (Structural Linear
Static) results for load case 2 (1 step) and load case 1 (10 steps).
21.4.3.1
We go to step 6 (load case 1 with factor 0.5). This case corresponds with the SLS design
case. We select in the 3D Element Miscellaneous branch the PMst result. This result is
the reduction factor of the tension stiffness [Fig. 21.16].
309
Figure 21.16: Stiffness reduction factor for step 6
Figure 21.17: First principal crack width strain for step 6

21.4.3.2
Principal Crack Width Strain
We select the first principal crack width strain in the 3D Element Strains branch of the
same load step (step 6). The crack width in the central area of bottom face is 0.1 and
0.17 mm, which agrees very well with the chosen environment class in the design analysis
(0.3 mm) [Fig. 21.17] [ 21.1.2.3 p. 300].
For step 11 (load case 1 with factor 1.0), which corresponds with the ULS design case,
we also look at the calculated crack width results. At the top surface of the plate we can
see a serious crack in the corner that is supported in vertical direction. The crack width
at this location is circa 0.5 mm [Fig. 21.18]. In the central area at the bottom surface the
crack width is circa 0.3 mm [Fig. 21.19].
310
Figure 21.18: First principal crack width strain for step 11 at top surface
Figure 21.19: First principal crack width strain for step 11 at bottom surface
Chapter 22
Bond-slip of Reinforcements in
2D Elements
Name:
Bondslip
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/Bondslip
Keywords:

constr: suppor tying.
elemen: bar enhanc interf l4tru pstres q12if q8mem reinfo struct truss.
load: edge elemen force node weight.
materi: concre crack elasti isotro mc1990 slip.
result: cauchy displa strain stress total tracti.
This example deals with the slip of steel reinforcement in concrete [Fig. 22.1]. Bondslip
reinforcements are modeled as embedded truss elements in plane stress elements. Bond
slip reinforcements are used to describe the pullout of an anchor of a bar reinforcement.
In Diana, the relationship between the normal traction and the normal relative displacement is assumed to be linear elastic whereas the relationship between the shear traction
and the slip is assumed as a nonlinear function. Diana offers three predefined curves for
the relationships between shear traction and slip, a Cubic function according to Dorr, a
Power Law relation proposed by Noakowski and a function according to Shima et al., and
a user-defined multi-linear curve [Vol. Material Library]. The posttensioning procedure
is described by phased analysis:
Phase 1 Weak bonding is defined between tendon and concrete. Tendon is prestressed
by two nodal forces at the ends of tendon. Reaction forces at anchor locations are
defined at the ends of beam.
Phase 2 Step 1 Tendon is grouted by changing weak bond material properties into stiff
elastic properties. Prestress loads are removed and tyings are applied at the end of
tendon.
Phase 2 Step 2 A local load is applied.
22.1
Note that in the lowerright corner of the Main Window, FX+ shows the units in which
the model is going to be defined. For this example, choose [N,m].
22.1.1
Beam
22.1.1.1
Geometry
First define one half of the beam model [Fig. 22.2] and define the other half by mirroring
[Fig. 22.3]. Via the Rectangle (Wire) dialog, create three rectangle faces. The coordinates
312
Bond-slip of Reinforcements in 2D Elements
Figure 22.1: Post-tensioned beam (the unit of cross-section: mm)

of the two diagonal corners of the first rectangle are (0,0) and (30,0.25). The corner
coordinates of the second rectangle are (0,0.25) and (30,0.85). The corner coordinates
of the third rectangle are (0,1.1) and (30,0.3). Mirror the generated half of the beam to
create the other half by selecting the right edges as the Mirror Reference.
Figure 22.2: Half beam
Figure 22.3: Entire beam
22.1.1.2
Properties
Specify grade C55 concrete according to CEB-FIP Model Code 1990.

Materi
Bondslip.dat
313
MATERI
1 NAME
"Concrete"
CONCRE MC1990
GRADE C55
Specify the thicknesses as indicated in [Fig. 22.1].

Geomet
GEOMET
1 NAME
THICK
2 NAME
THICK
3 NAME
THICK
22.1.1.3
Bondslip.dat
"Topflange"
5.00000E-001
"Web"
2.00000E-001
"Bottomflange"
8.00000E-001
Meshing
Define the mesh sizes along the vertical edges. Select the six vertical edges in the top and
the bottom flanges, and specify the number of divisions of two along each edge [Fig. 22.4].
Select the three vertical edges in the web, and specify the number of divisions of six along
each edge [Fig. 22.5]. In the Auto-Mesh Face dialog, specify the Element Size of 0.15 m. A
two-dimensional plane stress model, like this one, is best viewed with its real dimensions,
including the thickness, in an isometric view [Fig. 22.6].
Figure 22.4: Size control on the flange edges
Figure 22.5: Size control on the web edges
314
22.1.2
Tendon
22.1.2.1
Geometry
315
To define the geometry of the tendon, specify some points along its trajectory [Table
22.1]. Then define a B-spline curve through these points. Via the Point Coordinate Table
dialog, read the file with point coordinates. When the meshes are hidden, the points are
visible just above the X axis [Fig. 22.7]. Revert to an isometric view of the model and
launch the B-Spline dialog. Select all seven points [Fig. 22.8] and click Apply to create
the B-spline curve [Fig. 22.9].
Table 22.1: Points along tendon (Points.txt)
X
0.0
11.65
29.1
30.0
30.9
48.35
60.0
Y
0.7
0.2
1.3217
1.38
1.3217
0.2
0.7
Z
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Figure 22.7: Top view
316
Figure 22.8: Selected points
Figure 22.9: B-spline through points

22.1.2.2
317
Properties
Define the shape of the bar sections in the Diana model and the material and geometrical
properties for the tendon.
Define a property Tendon made of Steel with a Youngs modulus E = 2.1 1011 Pa.
Add the bondslip parameters to the material Steel. Define the bondslip models for
interfaces between concrete and tendon. The bondslip models set a nonlinear relation
between shear traction and shear slip. BONDSL 1 indicates the polynomial relation between shear traction and slip proposed by Dorr (cubic function). The relation between
normal traction and normal relative displacement is kept linear and defined by DSTIF. In
Phase 1, MATERI 2 is activated. In Phase 2, MATERI is redefined to 4.
Materi
Bondslip.dat
MATERI
2 NAME
"Steel"
YOUNG
2.10000E+011
POISON 0.00000E+000
DENSIT 7.85000E+003
DSTIF
1.00000E+012
BONDSL 1
SLPVAL 2.00000E+001
4 NAME
"Steel"
YOUNG
2.10000E+011
POISON 0.00000E+000
DENSIT 7.85000E+003
DSTIF
1.00000E+012
2.00000E+006
1.00000E-001
2.00000E+010
Via the Property Manager dialog, create a reinforcement property which enforces a
curved shape for bar sections in the Diana model. Give the property Tendon a crosssectional area A = 0.002886 m2 .
Geomet
Bondslip.dat
GEOMET
5 NAME
"Tendon"
CROSSE 2.88600E-003
22.1.2.3
Meshing
In the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog, select the B-spline and indicate a division into twenty
sections [Fig. 22.10]. For an accurate approximation of the tendon trajectory, choose
quadratic sections, i.e. curved with mid-nodes on the geometry of the B-spline. Via the
Change Element Parameters dialog, change the elements order to quadratic.
22.1.3
Boundary Conditions
22.1.3.1
Supports
Create the support plates via the Translate Mesh dialog [Fig. 22.11]. Via the Constraint
dialog, create a new set of boundary constraints. For the two outer supports, support
the vertical displacement uY (degree of freedom T2). For the middle support, support
the axial and vertical displacements uX , uY (degrees of freedom T1 and T2). The display
confirms the correct definition of the supports [Fig. 22.12].
318
Figure 22.10: Tendon mesh
Figure 22.11: Support plates

22.1.3.2
Tyings
The tendon is grouted in the duct. Hence, the tendon is bonded to the beam. This is
modeled by tying the tendon nodes to the beam nodes. Define a Tying property via
the Rigid Link dialog of Property Manager. Via the Create Link Element dialog, tie the
tendon to the beam.
Tyings
Bondslip.dat
TYINGS
NAME SET_1
EQUAL TR 1 TR 2
1412 4412
EQUAL TR 1 TR 2
2413 4432
319
22.1.4
Loading
Phase 1 Dead weight, prestress loads, and reaction forces at the anchors
Phase 2 Step 1 Prestress loads are removed (Dead weight only)
Phase 2 Step 2 Local load
22.1.4.1
Dead Weight
Specify the dead weight load via the Body Force dialog: an acceleration of gravity
g = 9.81 m/s2 in the second global direction. So the gravity works downward (in the
Y direction).
22.1.4.2
Prestress Loads
Via the Distance/Angle dialog, check the direction vector of the tendon by selecting the
first two nodes of the tendon, which is (-1.49560365,0.169975904,0) [Fig. 22.13]. Specify
the prestress load on the left via the Force dialog by entering the direction vector and the
prestress value of 4.4106 N. Changing the direction vector to (1.49560365,0.169975904,0),
specify the prestress load on the right [Fig. 22.14].
Figure 22.13: Direction vector
22.1.4.3
Reaction Forces at the Anchor Locations
Via the Pressure dialog, apply reaction forces to the edges of the two-dimensional membrane elements at the anchor locations. The reaction force is calculated by dividing the
prestress load by the cross section area of the beam, which is 1.185 107 N/m [Fig. 22.15].
320
Figure 22.14: Prestress loads
Figure 22.15: Reaction forces at the anchor locations

22.1.4.4
Local Load
Via the Force dialog, apply a vertical nodal load with the magnitude of 1.0 107 N
[Fig. 22.16].
Figure 22.16: Local load
22.1.5
Mesh Editor
To complete additional parameters, launch the Mesh Editor from FX+.

22.2 Phase Analysis

22.1.5.1
321
Geometries
For the line-plane connection interface elements, the perimeter of the reinforcement bar
PERIME should be specified.
Set geometry
Bondslip.py
setGeometryParameter( "Tendon", "PERIME", [ "1.90438E-001" ] )
Geomet
Bondslip.dat
GEOMET
5 NAME
"Tendon"
CROSSE 2.88600E-003
PERIME
22.1.5.2
1.90438E-001
Element Data
In this example, the reinforcement bar is internally modeled as truss elements which are
connected to the mother elements by connection interface elements.
Set element data
Bondslip.py
setElementDataParameter( "Tendon", "INTERF", [ "TRUSS" ] )

setElementDataParameter( "Tendon", "BEGINN", [ "4412" ] )
Data
Bondslip.dat
DATA
5 NAME
"Tendon"
INTERF TRUSS
BEGINN 4412
22.1.5.3
Save the Current Model
Save the model in Mesh Editor.

Save project
saveProject(
Bondslip.py
)
22.2
Phase Analysis
22.2.1
Phase 1
In the Phased Settings dialog, specify all elements and all reinforcements as active elements of the model. Select none of tyings and select all supports. Then choose Structural
Nonlinear Analysis and specify some output of displacements, stresses and relative displacements in the batch commands:
322

Phase 1
Bondslip.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN ALL
REINFO ALL
TYINGS NONE
SUPPORT ALL
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
: dead weight, prestress loads and reactions forces at the anchors
LOADNR 1
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 1.0
END LOAD
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRAIN TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
22.2.2
Phase 2
Activate all tyings. Change the tendon material to MATERI 4.

22.2.2.1
Step 1
Remove the prestress loads.

22.2.2.2
Step 2
Apply the local load.

Phase 2
Bondslip.dcf
*PHASE
RENEW
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN ALL
BEGIN REINFO ALL
: tendon material is redefined
MATERI 4
END REINFO
: tyings are activated
TYINGS ALL
SUPPORT ALL
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
: step 1 - prestress loads are removed (dead weight only)
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=2
STEPS EXPLIC SIZES=1.
END START
END EXECUT
:
22.3 Phase Analysis Results
323
: step 2 - local load is applied

BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 3
END LOAD
END EXECUT
:
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
STRAIN TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL TRACTI
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
22.3
Phase Analysis Results
To assess the results, return to FX+ and import the Post Result Files. First open the
FX+ database Bondslip.fdb. Then import the Post-Neutral files: Bondslip.dpb and
Bondslip.dmb. Change the units to [N,mm].
22.3.1
Displacement
In the Results Tree, select the displacement TDtXYZ(V). The deformed mesh plots at
each step are shown in [Fig. 22.17].
22.3.2
Stress in the Tendon
Select the 1D Reinforcement Stresses Sxx and display these as contours in the deformed
model [Fig. 22.18].
22.3.3
Slip (Relative Displacement) Along the Tendon
Select the strain component PTx to display the relative displacement along the tendon
[Fig. 22.19].
22.3.4
Shear Stress in the TendonConcrete Interface/Bond
Select the stress component STx to display the shear stress in the tendonconcrete
interface [Fig. 22.20].
324
Figure 22.17: Displacement at each step
325
Figure 22.18: Stress in the tendon at each step
326
Figure 22.19: Slip along the tendon at each step
327
Figure 22.20: Shear stress in the tendon-concrete interface at each step
328
Chapter 23
Shear Failure of Reinforced

Concrete Beam Subjected to
Prescribed Displacement
Name:
RCBeam2
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/RCBeam2
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
load: deform.
materi: crack elasti harden isotro linear plasti rotati soften strain thoren
totstr vonmis.
option: arclen bfgs direct groups normal secant units update.
result: cauchy crack crkwdt displa force green reacti strain stress total.
This example illustrates a failure analysis of a reinforced concrete beam subjected to a

prescribed displacement from top plates. The beam has the length of 4 m and height of
0.45 m and has two loading points at the top and two support points at the bottom, as
displayed in Figure 23.1. There is one reinforcement bar in the beam. Due to symmetry
of the model, only half of the beam is modeled. However, using Dianas postprocessing
tools, the results will be presented for the full scale model.
Figure 23.1: Model of reinforced concrete beam
23.1
For this example we choose the units [N,m].
330
Shear Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam Subjected to Prescribed Displacement
23.1.1
Geometry
Via the Rectangle (Wire) dialog, we create a rectangle in XY plane with leftbottom
coordinate (0,0) and top-right coordinate (2,0.45) [Fig. 23.2]. Via the 2D Line dialog, we
add a line for reinforcement at Y = 0.03 m [Fig. 23.3].
Figure 23.2: Rectangle
Figure 23.3: Line
23.1.2
Properties
23.1.2.1
Concrete
We will define material properties and the thickness for the concrete beam. We assume a
rotating total strain crack model for the concrete, with the linear model for tensile strains
and the Thorenfeldt model for compressive strains. The parameters for the rotating total
strain crack model are presented in [Table 23.1]. In the Property Manager dialog we
choose 2D Plane Stress with a thickness 0.2 m.
Table 23.1: Material parameters for total strain crack model
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Tensile strength
Crack-energy
23.1.2.2
28
0.2
2.5
100
25
GPa
MPa
N/m
MPa
Steel
We will define the shape of the reinforcement bar section and the material and geometrical
properties for the reinforcement bar. For the steel reinforcement we assume von Mises
331
plasticity model [Table 23.2]. Via the Property Manager dialog, we define properties for
reinforcement bar with a cross-sectional area 622 mm2 .
Table 23.2: Material parameters of steel
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Yield-stress
23.1.2.3
210
0.2
440
GPa
MPa
Plate
For support and loading plates we use the same material model as the reinforcement steel,
and in the Property Manager dialog we specify 2D Plane Stress with a thickness 0.2 m.
Materi
RCBeam2.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
TOTCRK
TENCRV
TENSTR
GF1
COMCRV
COMSTR
3 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
YIELD
YLDVAL
"Concrete"
2.80000E+010
2.00000E-001
ROTATE
LINEAR
2.50000E+006
1.00000E+002
THOREN
2.50000E+007
"Steel"
2.10000E+011
2.00000E-002
VMISES
4.40000E+008
Geomet
RCBeam2.dat
GEOMET
1 NAME
"Concrete"
THICK
2.00000E-001
2 NAME
"Plate"
THICK
2.00000E-001
3 NAME
"Steel"
CROSSE 6.22000E-004
23.1.3
Meshing
Via the Edge Mesh Size dialog we define mesh sizes along edges. We specify 7 divisions
along vertical edges [Fig. 23.4] and 20 divisions along horizontal edges [Fig. 23.5]. We
create mesh in quadrilateral surface via the Map-Mesh Face dialog [Fig. 23.6]. We create
mesh for support and loading plates via the Extrude Mesh dialog with an extrusion length
0.06 m [Fig. 23.7]. We change linear elements of Concrete and Plates into quadratic
elements via the Change Element Parameters dialog [Fig. 23.8].
We create mesh for reinforcement bar via the Auto-Mesh Edge dialog with one division
[Fig. 23.9].
332
Figure 23.4: Mesh size along vertical edges
Figure 23.5: Mesh size along horizontal edges
Figure 23.6: Mesh in quadrilateral surface
Figure 23.7: Mesh for support and loading plates (green)
333
Figure 23.8: Quadratic elements
Figure 23.9: Mesh for reinforcement bar
334
23.1.4
Boundary Conditions
Via the Constraint dialog, we constrain X displacements in symmetry plane and Y direction at support [Fig. 23.10].
23.1.5
Loading
Via the Displacement dialog we define vertical prescribed displacement 0.001 m downwards at top plate [Fig. 23.11].
Figure 23.11: Prescribed displacement load
23.1.6
Mesh Editor
We launch the Mesh Editor from FX+ to change the integration scheme. For concrete
elements we define integration scheme of 3 3 (default is 2 2).
Set element data
RCBeam2.py
setElementDataParameter( "Concrete", "NINTEG", [ "3", "3" ] )
335
23.2
Nonlinear Analysis
23.2.1
Analysis Settings
We define user-specified load step sizes 0.1(125) and use the arc-length control. Secant
iteration method is defined with the maximum number of iterations 20. For output items,
we select total displacements, reaction forces, crack strains, crack width and Cauchy
stresses.
Nonlin
RCBeam2.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 1
BEGIN STEPS
BEGIN EXPLIC
ARCLEN
SIZES 0.1(125)
END EXPLIC
END STEPS
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA CONTIN
FORCE CONTIN
END CONVER
MAXITE 20
METHOD SECANT
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
DISPLA TOTAL TRANSL
FORCE
REACTI TRANSL
STRAIN CRACK GREEN
STRAIN CRKWDT GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
23.2.2
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
INTPNT
INTPNT
Analysis Results
To access the results we return to FX+ and import result files: RCBeam2.dpb and RCBeam2.dmb.
The Results tree in FX+ is now populated with nonlinear results (125 steps).
23.2.2.1
Crack Strain
We select the normal crack strain Eknn for step 100. Cracks are displayed as small discs.
The color of the discs corresponds with the crack strain [Fig. 23.12].
23.2.2.2
Axial Stress in Reinforcement
Next we select the axial stress in the reinforcement (Sxx) for step 100. Stress is displayed
as a diagram along the reinforcement line [Fig. 23.13].
336
Figure 23.12: Normal crack strain Eknn for step 100
Figure 23.13: Axial stress in the reinforcement for step 100

23.2.2.3
Crack Patterns at Different Load Levels
We view crack patterns at different load levels for the full beam by selecting Eknn for step
12, 27, 50, 75, 100 and 125 [Fig. 23.14]. In the top figure the bending cracks at the lower
edge of the beam (tensile stresses) are displayed. In the second figure the cracks start
to localize beyond the reinforcement bar. In the third figure the localization of cracks
becomes more apparent. In the fourth figure additional cracks around the reinforcement
bar appear and first onset of shear failure (diagonal cracks) appear. In the fifth figure
these shear cracks are opening more and in the sixth figure large diagonal cracks run
through the full height of the beam.
23.2.2.4
Load Displacement Diagram
In the Extract Result dialog, we select reaction force FBY(V), all steps and node 490
in which displacements are prescribed [Fig. 23.15] [Fig. 23.16]. In the table, we select the
Step Value and Node: 490 columns and select Graph with right mouse click [Fig. 23.17].
337
Figure 23.14: Crack patterns at different load levels for the full beam
The forcedisplacement diagram is plotted as displayed in Figure 23.18.
338
Figure 23.15: Extract result
Figure 23.16: Selection of the node with prescribed displacement
339
Figure 23.17: Plotting a graph
Figure 23.18: Force displacement diagram
340
Part III
Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA (III)
Chapter 24
Tunnel in a Hoek-Brown Rock

Medium
Name:
HBTunnel
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/HBTunnel
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: cq16e pstrai.
load: edge elemen force prestr.
materi: elasti harden hoekbr isotro plasti strain.
result: cauchy displa green plasti strain stress total vonmis.
Figure 24.1: Circular tunnel in rock [m]

This example aims at setting up and verifying a plane strain finite element model based on
Hoek-Brown rock plasticity material. It consists of a circular tunnel in a rock subjected
to a constant in-situ compression stress field [Fig. 24.1]. The results provided by Diana
are compared with a closed form solution.
24.1
Initiate new model
FX+
File New
ViewView PointTop
344
Tunnel in a Hoek-Brown Rock Medium
As this is a two-dimensional model we choose a Top view via the View menu to get a
viewing direction perpendicular to the XY -plane. Note that in the lower-right corner of
the Main Window FX+ shows the units in which the model is going to be defined. For
this example we choose [N, m].
24.1.1
Geometry
Since the geometry of the tunnel is symmetric, we can define just a half part of the
geometry. To define the right part of the geometry we draw two semi-arcs using the
(absolute) coordinates and then we connect them with two lines [Fig. 24.2a].
FX+
Geometry
GeometryCurveCreate on WP
2D Arc
Arc...
First semi-arc
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
Location: 0,0
Location: 3,0
Location: 0,3
Second semi-arc
Method
Method
Method
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
ABS x,y
Location: 0,0
Location: 30,0
Location: 0,30
GeometryCurveCreate on WP
2D Line
Line...
First line segment

Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
Location: 3,0
Location: 27,0
Second line segment

Method
Method
ABS x,y
REL dx,dy
ViewZoomAll
Location: 0,3
Location: 0,27
(a) geometry
(b) mesh
Figure 24.2: Geometry and mesh
24.1.2
We will define material properties and plane strain conditions for the circular tunnel in
rock. We launch the Material Manager and create a new material called Rock. We
specify an isotropic elastic material with Youngs modulus E = 2.109 N/m2 and a Poissons ratio = 0.25. The nonlinear material properties required for the Hoek-Brown rock
plasticity model will be specified later in the Mesh Editor.
345
FX+
Material properties
Isotropic
ID: 1
Name: Rock
Structural
Elastic
OK
Close
For the analysis properties of the two-dimensional model we choose 2D Plane Strain.
FX+
Physical properties
Property Manager
Create
2D...

2D Plane Strain
ID: 1
Name: Tunnel
Data ID: 1 Data Name: Tunnel
Regular
Material 1: Rock
OK Close
24.1.3
Meshing
We may now create a finite element mesh on the defined geometry. Before generating
the mesh, we have to specify the element size. Due to the radial configuration of the
geometry, mapped mesh will be used to properly define the element sizes. Thus, we will
explicitly specify divisions for the contour of the model. For the two lines we specify 50
divisions with a linear grading of 10; for the semiarcs we also specify 50 divisions but
without grading seeding.
FX+
Edge size
Mesh Size Control
Edge Mesh Size
Along Edge...
Select Edges Select the two semi-arcs

Seeding Method Number of Divisions
Number of Divisions: 50
Preview Apply
Select Edges Select the two lines

Seeding Method Linear Grading (Ratio)
Ratio (End/Start): 10
Div: 50
Preview OK
The Map-Mesh k-Edge Area can automatically generate two-dimensional mapped meshes
on geometries defined by lines. We generate a quadratic mesh and display it in the default
shading style. Note that the specified mapped mesh leads to a radial mesh [Fig. 24.2b].
FX+
Mapped meshing
Auto
Map
Property:
Select Object Edges
Select all edges
1: Tunnel
Mesh Set: Tunnel

Advanced
Option...
Advanced Option
346

OK
OK
24.1.4
We place supports on the nodes of the horizontal line in Y direction and on the nodes of
the vertical line in X direction. The supported degrees of freedom show up as red spikes
[Fig. 24.3].
FX+
Define supports
Analysis
BC Set
BC
Set...
Name: Supports
Desc.: Boundary constraints
Add
Close
Constraint BC Set: Supports
Object
Type
Node
Select Node(s) Select nodes on the horizontal line

g T2
Apply
DOF
Select Node(s)
g T1
DOF
Select nodes on the vertical line
OK
Figure 24.3: Constraints
24.1.5
Loading
The first load corresponds to constant insitu compression stresses in the rock mass. This
load is displayed by a yellow square for each element and pressure loads on the inner and
outer arc [Fig. 24.4a].
Load sets
FX+

Analysis Load
Load Set
347
Set...
Name: Prestress
Desc.: In-situ compression
Add
Close
Analysis Load
Prestress
Prestress...
Load Set Prestress

Plane Strain / Axisymmetric
Element Type
Object
Type
Element
Select Element(s)
Prestress
Sxx:
-20e6
Syy:
Select all elements

-20e6
Szz:
-20e6
Sxy:
OK
Analysis Load
Pressure
Pressure...
Load Set Prestress

Type Edge Pressure
Direction: Normal
P or P1: -20e6
Select edges on inner and outer arc
OK
In the second load only the pressure load on the inner arc is defined [Fig. 24.4b]. During
the analysis this load will stepwise be applied in opposite direction to represent the tunnel.
At the end of the analysis no resulting load on the inner arc remains.
FX+
Load sets
Analysis Load
Load Set
Name: Tunnel
Set...
Desc.: Inner arc pressure
Add
Close
Analysis Load
Pressure
Pressure...
Load Set Tunnel

Type Edge Pressure
Direction: Normal
P or P1: -20e6
Select edges on inner arc
OK
24.1.6
Mesh Editor
To add the nonlinear material parameters to the model we launch the Mesh Editor
from FX+, which brings you in the Mesh Editor of Diana.
Analysis
FX+
We will add a nonlinear material model for the tunnel choosing the Hoek-Brown yield
criterion. The material parameters of the Hoek-Brown yield criterion are the unconfined compressive strength of the rock mass ci = 5.0E7N/m2 , HoekBrown constants
mb = 1.677 and s = 0.00387. We set these material parameters using the Command
console:
348
(a) in-situ compression
(b) inner edge pressure
Figure 24.4: Load cases

Set parameters of the Hoek-Brown plasticity model
HBTunnel.py
setMaterialParameter( "Rock", "YIELD", "HOEKBR" )

setMaterialParameter( "Rock", "YLDVAL", [ 5.0E+7, 1.677, 0.00387 ] )
24.2
Nonlinear Analysis
For the structural nonlinear analysis we will use the following commands:
tunnel.dcf
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
INITIA STRESS INPUT
END START
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
FORCE TOLCON 0.000001
DISPLA OFF
END CONVER
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
STEPS EXPLIC SIZE -0.5 -0.1(3) -0.02(5) -0.01(10)
LOADNR=2
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA TOLCON 0.000001
FORCE TOLCON 0.000001
END CONVER
MAXITE 25
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
SELECT STEPS LAST
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
We could either create this command sequence by hand using the GUI (see Volume
24.3 Analysis results
349
Getting Started for hints and instructions) or we could load these commands from a
previously prepared command file. The following Python commands show the latter
manner including a command to run the analysis:
Load commands and run the analysis
HBTunnel.py
newAnalysis( "tunnel" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "tunnel", "HBTunnel.dcf" )
runSolver( "tunnel" )
24.3
Analysis results
With the nonlinear analysis performed, we will now present both the FX+ output results
and the tabulated output results. Since we will compare Diana results with the analytical
solution, we will use MS-Excel to plot the tabulated Diana results and the results of the
analytical solution. To assess the analysis results we return to FX+ and import the Post
Result file.
FX+

Post File Import
Post Result Files
Add...
Open
File Name
tunnel.dpb
Open
Import
24.3.1
Displacements
We click the Post Data tab in the Tool Bar. There we select the resulting displacements
u = uX,Y,Z as the result data type. For the deformation data we select the displacement
vector u = uX,Y,Z . We set the plot type to contour plot and apply all the settings. The
deformed mesh appears with contours for the value of the resulting displacement[Fig. 24.5].
Displacements
FX+
Post Data

Output Set Load Step 20(-1)
g Deformed
Mesh Shape
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Post Style
Contour
Edge
Type
Type
24.3.2
g Gradient
g Feature Edge
Principal Cauchy Stresses
We will display the principal stresses for the last step. In the Post Data tab we click
Data Filter and select the element stresses for the last step. As result data type we select
the principal stress S1(V) [Fig. 24.6a] and S3(V) [Fig. 24.6b]. We display the stresses as
contours in the undeformed model.
350
Figure 24.5: Displacement field (last step)

FX+
Principal Cauchy stresses
Post Data
Data Filter 2D Element Stresses
Result Data Type Principal Stress S1(V)
Mesh Shape Undeformed
g Contour Plot
Plot Type
Apply
Post Style
Contour
Edge
Type
Type
g Gradient
g Feature Edge
Post Data
Result Data Type
Principal Stress S3(V)
Apply
(a) P1
(b) P3
Figure 24.6: Principal Cauchy stresses
24.3 Analysis results
24.3.3
351
Stress Distribution along a Radial Line
We will now plot the radial and tangential stresses along a radial line of the model. To
collect the radial stresses as function of the radius, we need to select the stress component
SYY along the radial line. We launch the On-Curve Diagram dialog where we specify the
coordinates of the two end-points of the radial line: respectively at the bottom and top
end of the vertical edge of the model. We call the diagram SYY and add it to the list of
diagrams. Finally we activate the diagram in the list and click the Table button to get
the values of the diagram in a table.
Radial stresses
FX+
Post Data
Result Data Type SYY
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
Plot Type all
Apply

On-Curve Diagram
Define Curve
2-Point Line: 0,3,0

0,30,0
+X-Dir
Diagram Direction
Name: SYY
Division: 100
Add
g SYY
Table
Close
To collect the tangential stresses as function of the radius, we need the stress component SXX along the radial line. We launch the On-Curve Diagram dialog where we
specify the coordinates of the two end-points of the radial line: respectively at the bottom
and top end of the vertical edge of the model. We call the diagram SXX and add it
to the list of diagrams. Finally we activate the diagram in the list and click the Table
button to get the values of the diagram in a table.
Tangential stresses
FX+
Post Data
Result Data Type SXX
g Undeformed
Mesh Shape
Plot Type all
Apply

On-Curve Diagram
Define Curve
2-Point Line: 0,3,0

0,30,0
+X-Dir
Diagram Direction
Name: SXX
Division: 100
Add
g SXX
Table
Close
To plot the radial and tangential stresses as function of the radius, we choose the stress
components SYY and SXX, respectively, and for the radius, the values of coordinate Y.
352

In addition to the Diana result plots, the results of the closed-form solution for this
problem provided by Carranza-Torres and Labuz [3] are plotted for comparison purposes.
The Diana results are in good agreement with the analytical solution [Fig. 24.7].
Figure 24.7: Radial and tangential stresses
Chapter 25
Pit Excavation in 3D Layered

Soil
Name:
ExcaSand
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/ExcaSand
Keywords:

constr: suppor tying.
elemen: flat interf l2tru shell solid struct t15sf t18if te12l truss.
materi: coulom elasti fricti harden isotro mohrco plasti soil strain.
option: direct groups iterat newton nonsym regula units.
result: cauchy displa extern force green moment reacti strain stress total
tracti.
25.1
Model
The objective of this example is to develop a model to simulate the process of stage wise
excavation of a pit in a three-dimensional layered soil domain along with insertion of sheet
pile walls. The interface elements are used to account for the wallsoil interaction.
The three-dimensional model with its dimensions are shown in Figure 25.1 and the
front view of the model (in XZ plane) is shown in Figure 25.2. Figure 25.3 shows the
layers of the soil, the position of the water table and the location of the sheet pile walls
and the struts. The 4 layers - viz. inner sand layer, inner clay 1 layer, inner clay 2 layer
and the inner deep sand layer - are excavated (the exacavated area is centrally located
in the three-dimensional soil domain) and the vertical sheet pile walls are inserted to
prevent the failure of the cut. The struts are placed in two layers horizontally between
two pairs of opposite sheet pile walls above the soil surface so as to bring in more stiffness
and hence to prevent the walls from collapse. These struts are shown in Figure 25.4.
The sheet pile walls have interfaces on both sides so that these could well represent the
soilwall interaction on the soil side (i.e. to capture the interaction between the sheet pile
walls and the layers viz. outer sand, outer clay 1, outer clay 2 and outer deep sand as
shown in Figure 25.3).
Since the interface elements are not inserted in Phase 1 (for stress initialization) as
the walls are not inserted yet, the rigid links (called tyings) are used to close up the gap
created in the mesh for modeling interfaces in FX+. In order to maintain continuity in
the model (multiple virtual nodes are generated at the same positions during the time of
creation of interfaces), rigid links (fixed translational degrees of freedom) are introduced
(as connection mesh set, which is denoted as Tyings in the .dat file) to close up the
virtual gaps between the node pairs at same locations.
A surface load of 50 kN/m2 is applied vertically over an area of 5 m 5 m on the top of
the upper layer of the soil at a distance of 3 m from the sheet pile wall (as shown in Figure
25.3). The kN-m unit system has been chosen for defining, analysing and processing the
results. The soil layers in the model have been meshed with four-node isoparametric solid
354
Pit Excavation in 3D Layered Soil
Figure 25.1: Model geometry - 3D view

pyramid elements (TE12L) whereas the sheet pile walls has been meshed with three-node
triangular isoparametric flat shell elements (T15SF). The interface between the soil and
the sheet pile wall has been meshed with interface elements (T18IF). The strut mesh is
assigned 2-node truss elements (L2TRU).
The mesh of the soil model is shown in Figure 25.5 and the mesh of the wall surrounding the excavation zone is shown in Figure 25.6.
25.1.1
Material Properties
25.1.1.1
Soil Properties
The ground presented in this example consists of three different kinds of soil - sand, clay
and deep sand. All three soil types are assumed to follow Mohr-Coulomb constitutive
model. The material properties for each type of soil are provided in the Table 25.1 below.
The reduced density is obtained by subtracting the density of water from the density of
the soil material. For layers situated below the phreatic level, saturated density is used.
Table 25.1: Material and physical properties of soil layers
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density
Saturated Density
Reduced Density
Cohesion
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy angle,
Stress ratio, K0
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
kN/m3 /g
kN/m3 /g
kN/m2
Sand
16000
0.30
1.631
1.835
0.835
20.00
30
0
0.50
Clay
10000
0.30
1.835
2.040
1.040
75.00
30
0
0.50
Deep Sand
20000
0.30
1.733
1.835
0.835
20.00
35
5
0.43
25.1 Model
355
Figure 25.2: Model geometry - front view
Figure 25.3: Model - layers and loading

25.1.1.2
Sheet Pile Wall, Strut and Interface Properties
The properties of the interface elements (for clay layer and sand layer) and the sheet piles
and the struts are given in Table 25.2, Table 25.3 respectively. The properties of the
interfaces are defined as Coulomb friction parameters and the structural elements (sheet
pile walls and struts) are defined as linear elastic parameters.
Table 25.2: Material and physical properties of sheet pile wall-soil interface
Model parameters
Normal Stiffness Modulus, Kn
Shear Stiffness Modulus, Kt
Coheson
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy angle,
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m2
kN/m2
Interface in Sand
2000000
200000
15.00
19.50
0.0
Interface in Clay
2000000
200000
50.00
19.50
0.0
356
Figure 25.4: Model - struts

Table 25.3: Material and physical properties of structural elements
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Mass Density
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
Sheet Pile Wall / Strut

210000000
0.20
7.85
Additionally, the strut is assumed to be a circular hollow three-dimensional truss

element having a diameter of 0.4 m and a thickness of 0.025 m. So, the crosssectional
area may be calculated to be 0.02945 m2 . The average thickness of the corrugated sheet
pile wall is assumed as 0.15 m. The material properties of different soil layers and the
structural elements are recorded in the .dat file and the corresponding content of the file
are shown below separately.
ExcaSand.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
K0
2 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
DENSRE
K0
3 NAME
YOUNG
SAND
1.60000E+004
3.00000E-001
1.63100E+000
MOHRCO
2.00000E+001
5.00000E-001
CLAY
1.00000E+004
3.00000E-001
2.04000E+000
MOHRCO
7.50000E+001
1.04000E+000
5.00000E-001
DEEP_SAND
2.00000E+004
5.00000E-001
0.00000E+000
5.00000E-001
0.00000E+000
25.1 Model
357
Figure 25.5: Mesh of the soil layers

POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
DENSRE
K0
4 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
5 NAME
FRICTI
DSTIF
FRCVAL
6 NAME
FRICTI
DSTIF
FRCVAL
3.00000E-001
1.83500E+000
MOHRCO
2.00000E+001 5.73576E-001
8.35000E-001
4.30000E-001
"Steel"
2.10000E+008
2.00000E-001
7.85000E+000
"Interface_-_Sand"
2.00000E+006 2.00000E+005
1.50000E+001 3.54119E-001
"Interface_-_Clay"
2.00000E+006
5.00000E+001
2.00000E+005
3.54119E-001
8.71557E-002
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
The .dat file, besides information regarding coordinates, axes system, nodes and
elements, material properties etc. also contains information about the element groups as
shown below.
ExcaSand.dat
GROUPS
ELEMEN
158 "Inner Sand" / 1-1018 /
160 "Inner Clay 1" / 4455-7224 /
161 "Outer Clay 1" / 7225-16230 /
162 "Inner Clay 2" / 16231-19695 /
163 "Outer Clay 2" / 19696-31771 /
164 "Inner Deep Sand" / 31772-33406 /
165 "Outer Deep Sand" / 33407-42329 /
166 "Sheet pile" / 42330-42537 50116 50117 50119 50120
50129-50133(2) 50134 50138 50139 50141 50142 50145
50155-50157 50161-50165(2) 50166 50169 50171-50175
50183-50186 50189 50192-50194 50196-50200(2) 50201
50122 50125-50127
50147-50149 50152
50177 50178
50205-50207 50209
358
Figure 25.6: Mesh of the sheet pile walls
185
187
188
189
191
13
14
15
16
50213-50215 50217 50218 50222-50224 50226 50230-50232 50236

50239-50242 50246 50248 50249 50253 50254 50256 50257 50259 50262
50264 50265 50268 50270-50272 50275-50277 50279 50280 50284
50285-50289(2) 50292 50294 50295 50299-50303(2) 50304 50307 50309
50310 50312 50555-51490 /
"Outer Sand" / 46516-50114 /
"Inner interface" / 51703 51706 51720-51727 51729 51731 51732
51751-51759 51767-51769 51773-51775 51778 51780-51782 51799
51801-51803 51806 51810 51817 51818-51822(2) 51825 51826 51828
51836-51839 51841-51843 51846 51863 51875-51877 51879 51882-51885
51889 51891 51892 51894 51908-51910 51927-51941 51959 51963-51965
51968-51972 51978 51980-51982 51986-51989 52003-52005 52007-52018
52023-52530 /
"Outer interface" / 52531-53570 /
"Inner interface exca" / 51491-51702 51704 51705 51707-51719 51728
51730 51733-51750 51760-51766 51770-51772 51776 51777 51779
51783-51798 51800 51804 51805 51807-51809 51811-51816 51819-51823(2)
51824 51827 51829-51835 51840 51844 51845 51847-51862 51864-51874
51878 51880 51881 51886-51888 51890 51893 51895-51907 51911-51926
51942-51958 51960-51962 51966 51967 51973-51977 51979 51983-51985
51990-52002 52006 52019-52022 /
"Struts" / 54091-54101 /
"Initialization" / "Inner Sand" "Inner Clay 1" "Outer Clay 1"
"Inner Clay 2" "Outer Clay 2" "Inner Deep Sand" "Outer Deep Sand"
"Outer Sand" /
"Installing sheet piles" / "Initialization" "Sheet pile"
"Inner interface" "Outer interface" "Inner interface exca" /
"Excavation" / "Outer Clay 1" "Inner Clay 2" "Outer Clay 2"
"Inner Deep Sand" "Outer Deep Sand" "Sheet pile" "Outer Sand"
"Inner interface" "Outer interface" "Struts" /
"Imposing uniform load" / "Excavation" /
25.2 Boundary Conditions
25.2
359
Boundary Conditions
The two lateral boundaries on XZ plane are restrained against motions in horizontal Y
direction whereas the nodes on boundaries in Y Z plane are kept fixed along horizontal X
direction. The lower boundary (XY plane) is prevented against any vertical movements.
The boundary conditions are recorded in the .dat file as shown below.
ExcaSand.dat
SUPPOR
NAME SET_1
/ 9155-9149(-1) 9162-9156(-1) 955-968 4312 4443 4513-4524 6629-6642
6839-6908 2081 2160 2202-2213 4308-4311 4444-4447 4525-4572 2079 2080
2161 2162 2214-2237 9163 9187-9177(-1) 9189 9188 969-997(14) 998-1008
4303 4378 4383-4394 6656-6669 6909-6913 6979-7043 2076 2121 2124-2135
4304-4307 4379-4382 4395-4442 2077 2078 2122 2123 2136-2159 / TR 1
/ 6629-6838 / TR 3
/ 9171-9164(-1) 9176-9172(-1) 9202 9201 955 969-982 4303 4312-4325 6629
6669-6682 6844-6848 6979-6983 7044-7108 2076 2081-2094 4304-4311
4326-4377 2077-2080 2095-2120 9200-9190(-1) 956 983-996 4378 4443
4448-4460 6642-6656 6839-6843 6909-6978 2121 2160 2163-2175 4379-4382
4444-4447 4461-4512 2122 2123 2161 2162 2176-2201 / TR 2
TYINGS
NAME SET_1
EQUAL TR 1 TR 2 TR 3
9788 9787
9786 9785
9804 9803
...
EQUAL TR 1 TR
10817 10818
EQUAL TR 1 TR
10815 10816
EQUAL TR 1 TR
10813 10814
EQUAL TR 1 TR
10811 10812
UNITS
FORCE KN
LENGTH M
END
25.3
2 TR 3
2 TR 3
2 TR 3
2 TR 3
Loading
In addition to the self weight, the other loads specified in the model are as follows: The
water table stands at a depth of -1 m which is the interface between the top sand layer
and the clay layer underneath. The excavation would be done upto a depth of 7 m from
the top surface of the soil (i.e. 1 m of the top sand layer, inner sand and the next 6 m
depth in the first clay layer, inner clay layer 1 would be digged out - refer Figure 25.3).
Immediately after excavation, the excavated area must be experiencing the hydrostatic
pressure (because in this example the water table is assumed to remain fixed at its original
level all through). Due to this, a load case has been defined with a spatial function which
is kept varying from height -7 m to -1 m and the magnitude is kept varying from 58.84
kN/m2 (=gh, where = 1000 kg/m3 , g = 9.80665 m/s2 and h = 6 m) to 0.0 kN/m2 .
This hydrostatic pressure acts normal to the base and the surrounding sides. A uniform
square load has been applied on one side of the top surface on an area of size 5 m 5 m
360

at a distance of 3 m from the excavation edge (or sheet pile wall). The magnitude of this
vertical load is 50 kN/m2 (refer Figure 25.3). These loads can be found in .dat file as
follows.
ExcaSand.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
WEIGHT
CASE 2
ELEMEN
50566 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
50565 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
50564 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
-1.96133E+001 -0.00000E+000 -1.96133E+001

Z
-0.00000E+000 -0.00000E+000 -1.96133E+001
Z
-0.00000E+000 -1.96133E+001 -1.96133E+001
Z
...
CASE 3
ELEMEN
47493 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
48192 FACE
FORCE
DIRELM
L2
-5.00000E+001
NORMAL
L4
-5.00000E+001
NORMAL
...
47979 FACE L2
FORCE -5.00000E+001
DIRELM NORMAL
COMBIN
1 1 1.00000E+000
2 2 1.00000E+000
3 3 1.00000E+000
4 1 1.00000E+000 2 1.00000E+000
25.4
Analysis
The analysis has been performed in four phases as described below.

In the first phase, the soil mesh sets along with the tyings were used along with
selfweight and ground supports. This phase performs stress initialization. The stresses
obtained from the analysis of this phase has been brought forward to the next phase but
not the displacements. In the next phase, the tyings are deactivated, sheet pile walls and
interfaces are placed and again only selfweight has been considered. Thereafter comes
the third phase where the excavation of the inner sand layer and the top part of the
inner clay layer is done and simultaneously the water pressure load case is applied for
counterbalancing the suddenly excavated load while maintaining the selfweight. The
last phase is used to apply only the vertical uniform load with no other alterations to the
model.
In all the phases, the results were obtained in form of displacements, stresses and strains
which were the default outputs. The analysis instructions are written in a command
(.dcf) file the content of which is shown below in four different parts.
25.4 Analysis
361
ExcaSand.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Initialization" /
REINFO
TYINGS ALL
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 1
END CALCUL
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
BEGIN PHYSIC
LIQUEF OFF
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
SOLVE ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase1"
END OUTPUT
ExcaSand.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Installing sheet pil" /
REINFO
TYINGS NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 1
END CALCUL
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
ITERAT CONVER DISPLA OFF
BEGIN PHYSIC
LIQUEF OFF
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
SOLVE ITERAT
362

END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase2"
END OUTPUT
ExcaSand.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Excavation" /
REINFO
TYINGS NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=4
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN INPUT
LOAD 4
END INPUT
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
SOLVE ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase3"
END OUTPUT
ExcaSand.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Imposing uniform loa" /
REINFO
TYINGS NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=4
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN INPUT
LOAD 4
END INPUT
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
SOLVE ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
LOAD LOADNR 3
SOLVE ITERAT
END EXECUT
25.5 Results
363
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase4"
END OUTPUT
*END
25.5
Results
The results from the nonlinear phased analysis have been obtained in terms of displacements, stresses and strains of the three-dimensional soil elements, two-dimensional plate
elements (sheet pile wall and interface) and the one-dimensional truss elements (the
struts). Some of these results are shown and described below in appropriate subsections.
25.5.1
Deformations
Figure 25.7 shows the averaged displacements of the three-dimensional soil domain in
Phase 3 (after excavation) and Phase 4 (the truck load is applied in this phase). Both
the figures show smooth changes in deformation contours around the sheet pile walls at
the middle of the domain. In Phase 3 the deformations are maximum at the base level
of the excavation. In Phase 4 the values of the deformations are higher at the position
where the vertical surface load has been applied.
(a) Phase 3
(b) Phase 4
Figure 25.7: Deformations in the model at the end of Phase 3 and Phase 4
25.5.2
Stresses
Figure 25.8 shows the vertical stresses, Szz in the soil domain at the end of Phase 1 and
Phase 2 and Figure 25.9 demonstrates the same at the end of Phases 3 and Phase 4.
Both figures confirm an increase in stress with depth. The stresses generated due to the
uniform surface load are also seen on the soil surface in Phase 4.
25.5.3
Responses of the Sheet Pile Wall
Figure 25.10 shows the axial forces (Nxx ) developed in the two-dimensional elements of
the sheet pile walls at the end of Phases 3 and 4. Figure 25.11 shows the moments (about
Y axis), Myy developed on the sheet pile walls in Phases 3 and 4. The walls are pushed
inwards due to the oncoming pressure from the surrounding soil in the postexcavation
phases. Figure 25.11 demonstrates that the bending moments are maximum at the upper
corner edges and on the upper middle parts of the walls.
364
(a) Phase 1
(b) Phase 2
Figure 25.8: Vertical stresses in the model at the end of Phase 1 and Phase 2
(a) Phase 3
(b) Phase 4
Figure 25.9: Vertical stresses in the model at the end of Phase 3 and Phase 4
(a) Phase 3
(b) Phase 4
Figure 25.10: Axial forces on sheet pile walls in Phases 3 and 4
25.5.4
Responses of the Struts
Figure 25.12 shows the axial forces (Nx ) developed in the struts (modelled with truss
elememts). The truss in the middle along global X axis suffers maximum force in it. The
struts on the perimeter experience the minimum force.
25.5.5
Responses of the Interfaces
Figure 25.13 shows the relative displacements, P Tz of the interfaces and the traction, STz
developed in the interfaces at the end of Phase 4 - both along the Z axis.
25.5 Results
365
(a) Phase 3
(b) Phase 4
Figure 25.11: Moments on sheet pile walls in Phases 3 and 4
(a) Phase 3
(b) Phase 4
Figure 25.12: Axial forces in the struts in Phases 3 and 4
(a) Relative displacement
(b) Traction
Figure 25.13: Displacement and traction of the interfaces at the end of Phase 4
366
Chapter 26
Settlement of a Strip Footing Nonlinear Drained Analysis

Name:
FootDrain
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/FootDrain
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: ct12e pstrai.
load: edge elemen force weight.
materi: elasti harden isotro mohrco plasti soil strain.
option: direct filos groups newton nonsym regula save units.
result: cauchy displa green plasti strain stress total vonmis.
Figure 26.1: Model

A two-dimensional (2D) soil domain supporting a concrete strip footing at the top surface
is analyzed. A vertical pressure load is applied on the top of the footing [Fig. 26.1]. The
soil follows the MohrCoulomb constitutive law and the footing behaves in a linear elastic
manner. The objective of this example is to perform a nonlinear drained analysis and
obtain the settlement of the footing.
368
Settlement of a Strip Footing - Nonlinear Drained Analysis
26.1
The model is meshed with six-node isoparametric triangular plane strain elements (CT12E)
[Fig. 26.2]. The [kN, m] unit system is used for defining, analysing, and postprocessing.
Figure 26.2: Mesh
26.1.1
Material Properties
The properties of the soil and the footing are given in Table 26.1. Note that the mass
density is calculated from the unit saturated weight, :
=
18
=
= 1.835
g
9.81
(26.1)
The unit of the mass density should be kN/m3 /g. The groundwater table is at a height of
5 m which means that the water level is flushing with the top surface of the soil domain.
Due to the presence of water, a submerged density red is assigned to the soil:
red = 1.835 1.000 = 0.835 kN/m3 /g
(26.2)
The parameter K0 has been calculated according:

K0 = 1 sin
(26.3)
Table 26.1: Properties of soil and footing

Model parameters
Elastic modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Unit weight,
Unit weight (saturated)
Cohesion, c
Angle of friction,
Dilatancy,
Stress ratio, K0
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3
kN/m3
kN/m2
Soil
10000
0.33
16
18
10
25
0
0.577
Concrete
35 106
0.15
24
-
The material properties of the concrete footing and the supporting soil entered through
FX+ are recorded in the data file:
369
footdr.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"SoilM"
YOUNG
1.00000E+004
POISON 3.30000E-001
DENSIT 1.63165E+000
YIELD MOHRCO
YLDVAL 1.00000E+001
K0
5.77000E-001
DENSRE 8.35000E-001
2 NAME
"ConcMat"
YOUNG
3.50000E+007
POISON 1.50000E-001
DENSIT 2.44748E+000
26.1.2
4.22618E-001
0.00000E+000
Boundary Conditions
The two lateral boundaries on the two vertical sides of the model are restrained against
motions in horizontal direction, whereas the lower boundary is prevented against any
movements in both horizontal and vertical direction. The left vertical face of the footing
is assigned lateral fixities.
26.1.3
Loading
In addition to the selfweight, a uniformly distributed pressure load of 40 kPa is applied

along the top edge of the footing in downward direction. The loading entered through
FX+ would be recorded in the .dat as follows:
footdr.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
WEIGHT
CASE 2
ELEMEN
683 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
681 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
703 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
701 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
719 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
711 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
705 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
704 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
733 EDGE
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L3
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L2
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
370
738
FORCE
DIRELM
EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
26.2
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
Nonlinear Analysis
The analysis is performed in two stages.
26.2.1
Phase 1: Initial State of the Soil
In the first stage, the soil is activated along with the self weight. A nonlinear analysis is
performed to carry out the stress initialization using a K0 procedure.
footdr.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Ground" /
REINFO
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
ITERAT CONVER FORCE OFF
PHYSIC SUPPRE
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
26.2.2
Phase 2: Footing
In the next stage, the footing with self weight is activated besides the soil. The pressure
load also becomes active in this stage. The stresses obtained from the first phase are
transferred to the current phase. Note that the displacements obtained in the first phase
are being suppressed and hence not considered in the second phase. Thereafter, a nonlinear analysis is performed to obtain the deformations, stresses, and strains. The pressure
load is applied gradually in 10 steps to avoid creating huge out-of-balance forces in the
system, which might result in premature divergence. The displacement norm is used as
the convergence criterion.
footdr.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
26.3 Results
371

END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 2
BEGIN STEPS
EXPLIC SIZES 0.1(10)
SAVE
END STEPS
END LOAD
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
END OUTPUT
*END
26.3
Results
The results are obtained in terms of displacements, Cauchy stresses, strains and plastic
strains.
26.3.1
Stresses and Strains
(a) initial stage
(b) at the end of final stage
Figure 26.3: Effective vertical stresss in soil-footing System

Figure 26.3 shows the initial and final effective vertical stresses in the system. The
initial effective stress, Y0 Y may be calculated by subtracting the hydrostatic stress, gh
from the vertical soil stress, SYv Y :
SYi Y = SYv Y hg = 5 1.835 9.81 5 1.0 9.81 = 40.96 kN/m2
(26.4)
This value of 40.96 kN/m2 can be seen in [Fig. 26.3a] corresponding to the initial effective
vertical stress. The final vertical stress is maximized directly beneath the right edge of
the footing [Fig. 26.3b]. The plastic strain also reaches a maximum value in the same
region (see Figure 26.4).
26.3.2
Displacements
The maximum vertical displacements is directly beneath the footing on which the loading
was applied [Fig. 26.5]. The Probe Result option of the Post menu is used to have a closer
372
Figure 26.4: Plastic strain in final stage

look at the nodal deformations underneath the footing [Fig. 26.6]. This functionality
enables to see the results for selected nodes as demonstrated in Figure 26.7. From Figure
26.7, you see that the maximum vertical displacement is 0.0092 m, whereas the theoretical
solution for the linear elastic analysis for the same model has a settlement of 0.00792 m
using the following equation as proposed by Giroud [7]:
=
P B
pH
E0
(26.5)
In Equation (26.5), , P , B, E , and F denote the settlement of the footing, normal

pressure on the footing, breadth of the footing, and the Youngs modulus, respectively.
H
The term PH is a function of 0.5B
. The corresponding values are: P = 40 kN/m2 , B =
0
2
2 m, E = 10 kN/m and PH = 0.99 when the Poissons ratio = 0.33.
26.3 Results
373
Figure 26.5: Vertical displacement (final stage)
Figure 26.6: Probe result option
374
Figure 26.7: Vertical displacement beneath footing in final stage
Chapter 27
Nonlinear Undrained Drained

Settlement Analysis
Name:
FootUndr
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/FootUndr
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
load: edge elemen force weight.
materi: elasti harden isotro mohrco plasti porosi soil strain undrai.
option: bfgs direct groups newton nonsym penal regula secant units.
result: cauchy displa green plasti pressu strain stress total vonmis.
Figure 27.1: Model

manner. The objective of this example is to perform a nonlinear analysis in which the load
is applied under undrained conditions and then the footing is calculated under drained
conditions (estimate of long term settlement).
376
Nonlinear Undrained Drained Settlement Analysis
27.1
The model is meshed with six-noded isoparametric triangular plane strain elements (CT12E)
The geometry of this model remains the same as in Settlement of a Strip Footing Nonlinear Drained Analysis example Chapter 26 except that the drainage condition is
changed and a third construction stage is added in the present case.
Figure 27.2: Mesh
27.1.1
Material Properties
The properties of the soil and the footing are given in Table 27.1. It may be noted here
that the mass density of the material, should be provided as input to Diana which may
be calculated from the unit saturated weight, as shown below.
=
18
=
= 1.835
g
9.81
(27.1)
The unit of the mass density thus calculated should be kN/m3 /g. The ground water table
is assumed to be at a height of 5 m which means that the water level is flushing with
the top surface of the soil domain. Due to the presence of water the two-dimensional soil
mesh set should also be assigned a submerged density, red (parameter DENSRE indicating
reduced mass density) which may be calculated as shown below.
red = 1.835 1.000 = 0.835 kN/m3 /g
(27.2)
The parameter, K0 has been calculated from the following relation.

K0 = 1 sin
(27.3)
FX+ are recorded in a data file which looks like the following.
footdr.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
SOILM
YOUNG
1.00000E+004
POISON 3.30000E-001
DENSIT 1.63165E+000
377

Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Unit Weight,
Unit Weight (saturated)
Cohesion, c
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy,
Stress ratio, K0
YIELD MOHRCO
YLDVAL 1.00000E+001
K0
5.77000E-001
DENSRE 8.35000E-001
UNDRAI
2 NAME
CONCMAT
YOUNG
3.50000E+007
POISON 1.50000E-001
DENSIT 2.44748E+000
27.1.2
4.22618E-001
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3
kN/m3
kN/m2
Soil
10000
0.33
16
18
10
25
0
0.577
Concrete
35 106
0.15
24
-
0.00000E+000
Boundary Conditions
The two lateral boundaries on two vertical sides of the model have been restrained against
motions in horizontal direction whereas the lower boundary has been prevented against
any movements in both horizontal and vertical directions. The left vertical face of the
footing has also been assigned lateral fixities.
27.1.3
Loading
In addition to the selfweight of the model being considered, uniformly distributed pressure
load of 40 kPa has been applied along the top horizontal edge of the footing in vertically
downward direction. The loading entered through FX+ would be recorded in the .dat
file as follows.
footdr.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
ELEMEN
683 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
681 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
703 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
701 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
719 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
711 EDGE
FORCE
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L3
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
378

DIRELM
EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
704 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
733 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
738 EDGE
FORCE
DIRELM
CASE 2
WEIGHT
705
NORMAL
L2
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
L1
-4.00000E+001
NORMAL
Prior to the analysis we will specify the load combinations. We must first export the
model as footundr.fxd. Then we import the model in Mesh Editor.
Import model
FootUndr.py
importModel( "C:/FootUndr/footundr.fxd" )
Load combinations
FootUndr.py
)
"Self-weight", 1 )
)
"PressureLoad", 1 )
)
"PressureLoad", 1 )
"Self-weight", 1 )
Note that we define load combinations equal to each of the two load cases. We define an
additional load combination which comprises Self-weight plus PressureLoad.
27.2
Analysis
The analysis has been performed in three phases.
27.2.1
In the first phase, the soil mesh set is activated along with the selfweight and ground supports. The analysis is performed for drained condition. A nonlinear analysis is performed
to initialize the stresses.
footundr.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Ground" /
REINFO
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
BEGIN PHYSIC
27.2 Analysis
379
DRAINE
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY NODES
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY INTPNT
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY CENTER
END OUTPUT
27.2.2
Phase 2: Footing under Undrained Conditions
In the second phase, the footing with selfweight is activated. The pressure load also
becomes active in this stage in addition to the self-weight. The stresses obtained from
first phase are transferred to the current phase. However, it may be noted here that the
displacements obtained in the previous phase are suppressed and hence not considered in
the current phase. Thereafter, a nonlinear analysis with undrained conditions is performed
for this phase to obtain the deformations, stresses, strains etc. The pressure load is applied
gradually in 10 steps so as to avoid creating large out-of-balance forces in the system which
might result in pre-mature divergence.
footundr.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 2
END LOAD
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
PRESSU TOTAL NODES
PRESSU TOTAL CENTER
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY NODES
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY INTPNT
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY CENTER
END OUTPUT
27.2.3
Phase 3: Footing under Drained Conditions
The third phase performs the analysis with drained condition (without any other changes
in terms of material properties, mesh sets, boundary conditions or loads) in order to dissipate the excess pore pressure. The displacement norm has been used as the convergence
criterion.
380

footundr.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR 3
END START
BEGIN ITERAT
CONVER FORCE OFF
METHOD SECANT
END ITERAT
PHYSIC DRAINE
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY nodes
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY intpnt
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY center
END OUTPUT
*END
27.3
Results
The results for all the three phases have been obtained in terms of displacements, cauchy
stresses and strains and plastic strains. In addition, the excess pore pressures at both
nodes and centres of the elements have been computed for the second stage in the analysis
as this stage corresponds to undrained analysis.
27.3.1
Stress and Strain Responses
Figure 27.3 shows the initial effective vertical stress at all nodes in the soil at the end of
the analysis in Phase 1. The initial effective stress, SYi Y may be calculated by subtracting
the hydrostatic stress, hg from the vertical soil stress, SYv Y as shown below.
SYi Y = SYv Y hg = 5 1.835 9.81 5 1.0 9.81 = 40.96 kN/m2
(27.4)
This value of 40.96 kN/m2 can be seen in the figure corresponding to the initial effective
vertical stress.
Figure 27.4 shows the effective vertical stresses (at centre of elements) in the soilfooting system at the end of Phases 2 (undrained condition) and 3 (drained condition)
respectively. It is seen from this figure that most of the soil medium is subjected to higher
stresses at the end of Phase 3.
Figure 27.5 depicts the equivalent plastic strains (at nodes) in the soil medium at the
end of Phase 3. This figure clearly shows maximum strain concentration immediately
under the right corner of the footing.
27.3.2
Excess Pore Pressure
Figure 27.6 shows the excess pore pressure has built up (at the element centres) during
the analysis in Phase 2 from the beginning till the end due to undrained condition with
actively increasing pressure load (in steps).
27.3 Results
381
Figure 27.3: Initial effective vertical stress - Phase 1
(a) End of Phase 2
(b) End of Phase 3
Figure 27.4: Effective vertical stresses at the end of Phase 2 and Phase 3
27.3.3
Displacement Response
Figure 27.7 demonstrates the deformed shape of the model in vertical direction at the
end of Phase 2 (undrained condition) and at the end of Phase 3 (drained condition).
Thus, due to different drainage conditions, the figure on the left corresponds to short term
displacements and the figure on the right represents long term displacements which appear
to be obviously higher than the short term displacements. The vertical displacement
obtained from the analysis immediately beneath the footing has an average value of
7.5 mm at the end Phase 2 (undrained condition) and 12.12 mm (drained condition) at
the end of Phase 3.
382
Figure 27.5: Equivalent plastic strain at the end of Phase 3
(a) Start of Phase 2
(b) End of Phase 2
Figure 27.6: Excess pore pressure of Phase 2 during undrained condition
(a) End of Phase 2
(b) End of Phase 3
Figure 27.7: Vertical deformations at the end of Phase 2 and Phase 3
Chapter 28
Nonlinear Effective Stress

Undrained Analysis
Name:
FootEffS
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/FootEffS
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
load: deform edge elemen force weight.
materi: elasti harden isotro mohrco plasti porosi soil strain undrai.
option: direct groups newton nonsym penal regula units.
result: cauchy displa effect extern force green plasti pressu reacti strain
stress total vonmis.
Figure 28.1: Model

manner. The objective of this example is to assess the short term stability of a footing.
384
Nonlinear Effective Stress Undrained Analysis

A nonlinear effective drained analysis is done to determine the bearing capacity of the
system and subsequently the short term stability of the footing will be estimated.
28.1
Model
Figure 28.2: Mesh
28.1.1
Material Properties
The properties of the soil and the footing are given in Table 28.1. It may be noted here
that the mass density of the material, should be provided as input to Diana which may
be calculated from the unit saturated weight, :
=
18
=
= 1.835
g
9.81
(28.1)
The unit of the mass density thus calculated should be kN/m3 /g. The ground water table
is assumed to be at a height of 5 m which means that the water level is flushing with
the top surface of the soil domain. Due to the presence of water the two-dimensional soil
mesh set should also be assigned a submerged density, red (parameter DENSRE indicating
reduced mass density) which may be calculated as shown below.
red = 1.835 1.000 = 0.835 kN/m3 /g
(28.2)
The parameter, K0 has been calculated from the following relation.

K0 = 1 sin
(28.3)
FX+ are recorded in a data file as follows:
FootEffS.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"SoilM"
YOUNG
1.00000E+004
POISON 3.30000E-001
28.2 Analysis
385

Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Unit Weight,
Cohesion, c
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy,
Stress ratio, K0
DENSIT 1.63165E+000
YIELD MOHRCO
YLDVAL 1.00000E+001
K0
5.77000E-001
DENSRE 8.35000E-001
UNDRAI
2 NAME
"ConcMat"
YOUNG
3.50000E+007
POISON 1.50000E-001
DENSIT 2.44748E+000
28.1.2
4.22618E-001
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3
kN/m3
kN/m2
Soil
10000
0.33
16
18
10
25
0
0.577
Concrete
35 106
0.15
24
-
0.00000E+000
Boundary Conditions
The two lateral boundaries on two vertical sides of the model is restrained against motions
in horizontal direction whereas the lower boundary is prevented against any movements
in both horizontal and vertical directions. The left vertical face of the footing has also
been assigned lateral fixities.
28.1.3
Loading
In addition to the self weight of the model being considered, uniformly distributed vertically downward load in form of prescribed displacement of 0.10 m has been applied along
the top horizontal edge of the footing.
28.2
Analysis
The analysis is performed in two phases.
28.2.1
In the first phase, only the soil mesh set is activated along with the self weight and ground
supports. The analysis is performed for drained conditions with stress initialization in
the first phase.
FootEffS.dcf
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Ground" /
REINFO
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=2
386

BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 2
END CALCUL
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
ITERAT CONVER DISPLA
BEGIN PHYSIC
DRAINE
LIQUEF OFF
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
END EXECUT
OUTPUT FXPLUS
28.2.2
OFF
Phase 2: Footing
In the second phase, both the footing and the soil is activated with their self weights.
The prescribed displacement load also becomes active in this phase in addition to the
self weight. The stresses obtained from first phase is transferred to the current phase.
However, it may be noted here that the displacements obtained in previous phase are
suppressed and hence not considered in the second phase. Thereafter, a nonlinear analysis is performed in the second phase to obtain the deformations, cauchy stressses, plastic
strains and excess pore pressure. The prescribed displacement is applied gradually in 25
steps so as to capture the failure as closely as possible. The force convergence norm has
been used in the analysis.
FootEffS.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR 2
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 3
END LOAD
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
PRESSU TOTAL CENTER
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN GLOBAL
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN GLOBAL
STRESS EFFECT CAUCHY GLOBAL CENTER
STRESS EFFECT CAUCHY GLOBAL
END OUTPUT
*END
28.3 Results
28.3
387
Results
The results from the nonlinear effective undrained analysis have been obtained in terms
of Cauchy stresses and strains, plastic strains and excess pore pressure.
28.3.1
Figure 28.3 shows the initial effective vertical stress at different nodes in the soil mesh at
the end of the analysis in Phase 1. The initial effective stress, SYi Y may be calculated by
subtracting the hydrostatic stress, hg from the vertical soil stress, SYv Y :
SYi Y = SYv Y hg = 5 1.835 9.81 5 1.0 9.81 = 40.96 kN/m2
(28.4)
This value of 40.96 kN/m2 can be seen in the figure corresponding to the initial effective
vertical stress.
Figure 28.3: Initial effective vertical stress - Phase 1

Figure 28.4 shows the effective vertical stresses in different elements in the soil-footing
mesh sets at the end of Phase 2 (undrained condition).
The total vertical stress may be calculated by algebraic summation of effective vertical
stress, excess pore pressure and hydrostatic pore pressure. For example, let an element
(Element 144) be considered inside the soil just beneath the footing (Figure 28.5). For
this element, one may get the effective vertical stress at the end of Phase 2 at its centre
as 9.37 kN/m2 . Similarly the excess pore pressure at the centre of the same element is
obtained as 41.10 kN/m2 . The centre of this element is almost 0.039 m below the soil
surface which happens to be at the same level as that of the ground water table. So,
the value of the hydrostatic pressure may be computed as about 0.38 kN/m2 (=gh).
Thus, combining these three values, the total vertical stress at the centre of element 144
may be obtained as 50.85 kPa. This is quite close to the analytical solution of 50.28 kPa
as obtained for the same model [ 28.3.3 p. 388]. The variation of total vertical stress in
different elements (shown in Figure 28.5) immediately beneath the footing at the end of
Phase 2 is shown in Figure 28.6.
Figure 28.7 depicts the equivalent plastic strains at nodes in the soil medium at the
end of Phase 2. This figure clearly shows maximum strain concentration immediately
beneath the right corner of the footing at the soil surface. The strains are quite small in
other areas.
388
Figure 28.4: Final effective vertical stress - Phase 2
Figure 28.5: Elements in the soil domain beneath the footing
28.3.2
Excess Pore Pressure
Figure 28.8 shows the excess pore pressure at the end of Phase 2 resulted from the
undrained analysis in this phase with gradual increment in the prescribed displacement.
28.3.3
Analytical Solution
The analytical solution for bearing capacity, Qf of an infinitely long (strip or continuous)
smooth rigid footing on a finite undrained soil with varying cohesion may be written as
(Giroud [7])
0
Qf = C0 Ncz
+ D
(28.5)
In the above equation, the value of the undrained cohesion, C0 at the ground surface may
be computed as follows.
0
C0 = c cos = 10 cos(250 ) = 9.06kPa
(28.6)
0
The calculation of the bearing capacity, Qf also depends on a factor Ncz
which in turn
C2
depends on C
(which
is
equal
to
1.0
in
this
case
due
to
constant
cohesion)
and the ratio
0
H
H to B (i.e. B ) which in this case is equal to 2.5 (H = 5.0 m and B = 2.0 m). Thus, the
0
parameter, Ncz
would have a value of 5.55 (Giroud [7]). In this example, the embedment
28.3 Results
389
Figure 28.6: Total vertical stress beneath the footing at the end of Phase 2
depth, D is zero and is the unit weight of the soil. Substituting these values in (28.5),
we obtain the value of the bearing capacity for the soil as 50.28 kPa.
390
Figure 28.8: Excess pore pressure at the end of Phase 2
Chapter 29
Nonlinear Total Stress

Undrained Analysis
Name:
FootTotS
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/FootTotS
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
load: deform edge elemen force weight.
materi: elasti gradie harden isotro mohrco plasti soil strain.
result: cauchy displa extern force green plasti reacti strain stress total
vonmis.
Figure 29.1: Model

manner.
392
Nonlinear Total Stress Undrained Analysis

The objective of this example is to assess the short term stability of a footing. A
nonlinear total stress undrained analysis is performed to determine the bearing capacity
of the system. Subsequently, the short term stability of the footing will be estimated.
29.1
The total stress concept is assumed for this mode, hence no water table is considered and
the undrained parameters of the soil are used here. The calculation of the undrained soil
parameters is described in 29.5.3.
Figure 29.2: Mesh
29.1.1
Material Properties
The undrained soil parameters and the footing properties are given in Table 29.1. The
mass density of the material, is provided as input to Diana which has been calculated
from the unit saturated weight, as shown below. The cohesion of the soil is assumed to
increase with increase in soil depth at a rate of 2.66 kN/m2 . The calculation of this value
of increment of cohesion is described in 29.5.3. In Table 29.1, the terms REFPOS and
COHGRD refer to the reference position and gradient respectively for calculation of increase
in cohesion with depth.
18
= =
= 1.835
(29.1)
g
9.81
The unit of the mass density thus calculated should be kN/m3 /g.
FX+ are recorded in a data file as follows:
FootTotS.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"SoilM"
YOUNG
1.12800E+004
POISON 4.95000E-001
DENSIT 1.83549E+000
YIELD
MOHRCO
COHESI 9.06
393
Table 29.1: Undrained soil parameters and footing properties

Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Unit Weight,
Cohesion, c
Ref Pos (REFPOS)
Cohes Grad (COHGRD)
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy,
Stress ratio, K0
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3
kN/m3
kN/m2
Soil
11280
0.495
18
18
9.06
0.0 5.0 0.0
0.0 -2.66 0.0
0
0
0.812
Concrete
35 106
0.15
24
-
REFPOS 0. 5.00 0.
COHGRD 0. -2.66 0.
SINPHI 0
K0
8.12000E-001
2 NAME
"ConcMat"
YOUNG
3.50000E+007
POISON 1.50000E-001
DENSIT 2.44748E+000
29.2
Boundary Conditions
The two lateral boundaries on two vertical sides of the model have been restrained against
motions in horizontal direction whereas the lower boundary has been prevented against
any movements in both horizontal and vertical directions. The left vertical face of the
footing has also been assigned lateral fixities.
29.3
Loading
In addition to the selfweight of the model being considered, uniformly distributed vertically downward load in form of prescribed displacement of 0.10 m has been applied along
the top horizontal edge of the footing. The nodes at which prescribed displacements are
applied need to be restrained in the same direction.
29.4
Analysis
The analysis is performed in two phases. In the first phase, only the soil is activated along
with selfweight and ground supports. The analysis is performed under drained conditions
with stress initialization in the first phase.
FootTotS.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*PHASE
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Ground" /
REINFO
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
394

BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=2
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 2
END CALCUL
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
ITERAT CONVER DISPLA
BEGIN PHYSIC
DRAINE
LIQUEF OFF
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
END EXECUT
OUTPUT FXPLUS
OFF
In the second phase, both the footing and the soil are activated. The prescribed
displacement load also becomes active in this phase. The stresses obtained from the first
phase is transferred to this phase. Note that the displacements obtained in the previous
phase are suppressed and hence not considered in the second phase.
Thereafter, a nonlinear analysis is performed in the second phase to obtain Cauchy
stressses and plastic strains. The precribed displacement is applied gradually in 25 steps
to capture the failure as closely as possible. The force convergence norm is used in the
analysis.
FootEffS.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR 2
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 3
END LOAD
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN GLOBAL
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN GLOBAL
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY GLOBAL CENTER
END OUTPUT
*END
29.5
Results
The results from the nonlinear total stress undrained analysis are obtained in terms of
Cauchy stresses, strains, and plastic strains.
29.5 Results
29.5.1
395
Figure 29.3 shows the initial total vertical stress at different nodes in the soil mesh at the
end of the analysis in the first phase. The initial total stress, SYi Y may be calculated as:
SYi Y = hg = 5 1.835 9.81 = 90.00 kN/m2
(29.2)
This value of 90.00 kN/m2 can be seen in the figure corresponding to the initial total
vertical stress shown in Figure 29.3.
Figure 29.3: Initial total vertical stress (Phase 1)

Figure 29.4 shows the total vertical stress at centres of different elements in the soil
and footing at the end of the second phase.
Figure 29.4: Total vertical stress at the end of Phase 2

Figure 29.5 shows the elements beneath the footing quite closely. Figure 29.6 shows
the distribution of total vertical stresses at the centres of elements located at the footing
soil interface. This figure shows that the average vertical stress beneath the footing is
about 56.2 kPa.
396
Figure 29.5: Soil elements directly beneath the footing
Figure 29.6: Total vertical stress at the end of Phase 2 beneath footing
Figure 29.7 depicts the equivalent plastic strains at the nodes in the soil medium
at the end of the second phase. This figure clearly shows that the developed strain is
maximum beneath the right corner of the footing at the soil surface. The strains are
almost negligible in other areas.
29.5.2
Analytical Solution
The analytical solution for bearing capacity of an infinitely long (strip or continuous)
smooth rigid footing on a finite undrained soil with linearly varying (with depth) undrained
cohesion has been provided by Giroud [7].
The basic concept is briefly explained below in relevance to this example. Figure 29.8
and Figure 29.9 show respectively the model and the linear variation of cohesion over
depth. The cohesion underneath remains constant with depth.
The value of the undrained cohesion, C0 at the ground surface and the cohesion, C2
may be computed as follows.
0
C0 = c cos = 9.06 kPa

0
ini
ini
C2 = c cos + 0.5(hor
+ ver
)sin = 22.38 kPa
(29.3)
(29.4)
0
The calculation of the bearing capacity, Qf depends on a factor Ncz
which in turn depends
2
on C
(which
is
equal
to
2.5
in
this
case)
and
the
ratio
of
H
to
B
(i.e. H
C0
B ) which in this
29.5 Results
397
Figure 29.8: Model with varying cohesion

0
case is equal to 2.5 too. Thus, the parameter, Ncz
would have a value of 6.84. The
expression for the bearing capacity is as follows.
0
Qf = C0 Ncz
+ D
(29.5)
In our example, the embedment depth, D is zero and is the unit weight of the soil.
0
Using these values along with the values of C0 and Ncz
in (29.5), one may obtain the
value of the bearing capacity for the soil under consideration in the present example as
61.97 kPa.
29.5.3
Calculation of Undrained Soil Parameters
The value of the undrained elastic modulus, Eu and undrained stress ratio, K0 may be
calculated as follows.
0
Eu = 3Gu =
3E
3 1000
=
= 11280 kPa
0
2(1 + )
2(1 + 0.33)
(29.6)
398
Figure 29.9: Cohesion varying with depth below soil surface
K + w
(1 sin25) 8 + 10
K0 = 0
=
= 0.812
18
(29.7)
In (29.7), may be computed from the difference between the total (saturated) unit
weight of soil and the bulk unit weight of water as 18 - 10 = 8 kN/m3 . The undrained
Poissons ratio is assumed to have a value of 0.495.
The increment of cohesion, Cinc may be calculated from the assumption that it is
varying linearly with depth as folows.
Cinc =
C2 C0
(22.38 9.06)
=
= 2.66 kN/m2
H
5
(29.8)
Chapter 30
Analysis of Bridge Pier

Supported on Piled Footing
Name:
BridgePier
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/BridgePier
Keywords:

constr: suppor.
elemen: bar beam circle class2 interf l13be reinfo solid struct te12l te18if
tp18l tp21if tp24if.
materi: elasti harden isotro mohrco nonlin plasti soil strain.
option: bfgs contin direct groups newton nonsym regula secant units.
result: cauchy displa extern force green moment reacti strain stress total
tracti.
The objective of this example is to study the responses of a model consisting of a bridge
pier supported on piled raft foundation where the piles are embedded into underlying soil
layers. The deck loads are applied on the top of the pier. The soilpile and the pile
footing interactions are accounted for through the use of interface elements. Figure 30.1
Figure 30.1: Model - layers and loading

shows that the soil domain consists of 3 distinct layers demarcated as 1, 2 and 3. The
400
Analysis of Bridge Pier Supported on Piled Footing

raft footing is supported just on the surface of the top soil layer. The piles group of
12 piles each of 0.7 m in diamater is supporting the pierraft structure. The piles are
embedded fully in soil layer 1 and partially embedded into the footing and also in soil
layer 2.
30.1
Model
The concept of BarinSolid reinforcement type will be used to model the piles and the
interfaces with appropriate properties will be defined to account for pilefooting interaction and pilesoil interaction. Figure 30.2 shows a closer view of the pierfoundation and
the piles. The soil layers are meshed with six-node isoparametric solid wedge (TP18L)
Figure 30.2: Model - piles and bridge pier

elements. The bridge pier and the foundation are also meshed with with four-node solid
pyramid element (TE12L) elements. In this example, the piles are not modeled with solid
elements but meshed as bond-slip reinforcements with 2-node bar elements (barinsolid
reinforcement type). Thus, each pile is modeled as a single reinforcement but with two
parts one inside the footing and another one inside the soil. This also helps to account
for two distinct types of interaction between each pile with its surrounding medium - one
is soilpile interaction and the other is footingpile interaction. The mesh of the model is
shown in Figure 30.3. It should be mentioned here that the meshing of the piles (as bar
insolid type reinforcement elements) automatically takes care of the proper connectivity
with the surrounding soil or foundation elements.
30.1.1
Material Properties
The pile, pier and pier foundation are made up of concrete. The material properties of
the soil layers (following a Mohr-Coulomb model) and the concrete (linear elastic) are
provided in Table 30.1 below.
The diameter of each circular pile or reinforcement element is 0.7 m and the piles
are uniform in crosssection. The two sets of piles have two respective sets of interface
elements one set is between pile and foundation and another set is between pile and soil.
At the bottom end of the piles, tip interfaces are applied to account for the nonlinear tip
stiffness. These interfaces are meant to capture the interaction between the pile and the
surrounding medium. The properties of these interface elements are given in Table 30.2.
30.1 Model
401
Figure 30.3: Mesh

Table 30.1: Material properties of soil layers and concrete
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density
Cohesion
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy angle,
Stress ratio, K0
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
kN/m2
Top
8000
0.30
1.6825
30.00
20
0
1.0
Middle
40000
0.35
1.8355
30.00
30
0
1.0
Bottom
150000
0.35
2.0394
200.00
33
33
1.0
Concrete
2e+07
0.20
2.4473
Table 30.2: Properties of interface elements

Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density
Normal Modulus, Kn
Tangent Modulus, Kt
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
kN/m3
kN/m3
Foundation interface
2e+07
0.30
2.4473
1.00E+08
1.00E+07
Soil interface
2e+07
0.20
2.4473
1.00E+08
1.00E+06
Tip interface
1.00E+06
1.00E+06
The pile tip needs specific properties in Diana and these are provided in form of
material properties (which is essentially concrete in this case) and the tip geometry in form
of surface area, SURFAC (= r2 where r, the pile radius = 0.35 m). The interface elements
for the interaction between the pile and the soil are defined by nonlinear (multilinear)
shear stressrelative displacement (TAUDIS) curves. In the same way, the interaction
between the pile tip and the soil is defined by a predefined nonlinear (multilinear) normal
stress-relative displacement (SIGDIS) curve. Both these curves are defined as per the
values provided with in Table 30.3. A representative stress-relative displacement curve is
shown in Figure 30.4. Beneath the tables the readers would find two separate snapshots
from the .dat file. The first one shows the material properties as they appear in the .dat
file and the next one shows the geometric specifications of the part of the piles inside
the pier foundation (concrete) and inside the soil layers. It should be noted here that
402

the identity number 7 in table GEOMET denotes the specifications for the pile tip (viz.
SURFAC denotes the surface area for the pile tips). The parameters XAXIS and YAXIS
denote the orientation of the pile tip with respect to the global coordinate system).
Table 30.3: Values of stressdeformation curves for interface elements
Pile-soil interface
(shear stress) x (rel disp)
kN/m2
m
-1000
-1000000
-1000
-0.001
1000
0.001
1000
1000000
Pile-tip interface
x (rel disp)
kN/m2
m
-500
-1000000
-500
-0.0005
500
0.0005
500
1000000
Figure 30.4: Representative stress-deformation diagram for interface elements

BridgePier.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
K0
2 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
K0
3 NAME
LAYER1-TOPSOIL
8.00000E+003
3.00000E-001
1.68250E+000
MOHRCO
3.00000E+001 3.42020E-001
1.00000E+000
LAYER2-MIDSOIL
4.00000E+004
3.50000E-001
1.83550E+000
MOHRCO
3.00000E+001 5.00000E-001
1.00000E+000
LAYER3-BOTTOMSOIL
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
30.1 Model
403
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
K0
4 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
5 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
DSTIF
6 NAME
YOUNG
POISON
DENSIT
DSTIF
TAUDIS
1.50000E+005
3.50000E-001
2.03940E+000
MOHRCO
2.00000E+002 5.44639E-001 5.44639E-001
1.00000E+000
CONCRETE
2.00000E+007
2.00000E-001
2.44730E+000
PILE_IN_PIER_FOUNDATION
2.00000E+007
2.00000E-001
2.44730E+000
1.00000E+008 1.00000E+007
PILE_IN_SOIL_WITH TIP
2.00000E+007
2.00000E-001
2.44730E+000
1.00000E+008 1.00000E+006
-1.00000E+003 -1.00000E+006 -1.00000E+003 -1.00000E-003
1.00000E+003 1.00000E-003 1.00000E+003 1.00000E+006
TIPLOC END
DTIPST 1.00000E+006 1.00000E+006
FORDIS -5.00000E+002 -1.00000E+006 -5.00000E+002 -5.00000E-004
5.00000E+002 5.00000E-004 5.00000E+002 1.00000E+006
BridgePier.dat
GEOMET
1 NAME
2 NAME
3 NAME
4 NAME
5 NAME
CIRCLE
ZAXIS
PERIME
6 NAME
CIRCLE
PERIME
SURFAC
ZAXIS
DATA
1 NAME
2 NAME
3 NAME
4 NAME
7 NAME
INTERF
8 NAME
INTERF
SOIL-1
SOIL-2
SOIL-3
CONC
PILE-CONC
7.00000E-001
-1.00000E+000
2.20000E+000
PILE-SOIL
7.00000E-001
2.20000E+000
3.84845E-001
-1.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
SOIL-1
SOIL-2
SOIL-3
CONC
PILE-CONC
BEAM
PILE-SOIL
BEAM
The INTERF specifies that the beam type interface elements are considered for the part of
the pile inside the concrete (i.e. the pier foundation) and also for the part surrounded by
the soil. In addition to this, the position of the pile tip is defined by the TIPLOC and the
corresponding material and the geometry for the pile tip are referred to as TIPMAT and
TIPGEO followed by the relevant identity number (7 in this case).
The data that cannot be supplied via FX+ will be added in Mesh Editor [ 30.4
p. 405].
The reinforcements bars (i.e. the piles) are recorded in the DATA file under REINFORCEMENTS.
At first, the locations are mentioned. In this case, there are 12 bars in the soil and 12 bars
404

in the foundation - so a total of 24 bars exist and all are numbered consecutively starting
from 1. The list mentions the bars as lines (LINE) and also shows the nodes which they
have joined. At the end, MATERI specifies which bars are using which material types
through the material identity numbers, GEOMET denotes which bars use which geometric
specifications and DATA refers to the data identity numbers corresponding to the bar numbers. For example, bars 1 to 12 use material properties specified by material number 5
under MATERI, geometric specifications as per number 5 under GEOMET and the data is
according to the data number 7 under DATA.
BridgePier.dat
REINFORCEMENTS
LOCATI
1 BAR
LINE
6340
2 BAR
LINE
6342
3 BAR
LINE
6344
4 BAR
LINE
6346
5 BAR
LINE
6348
6 BAR
LINE
6350
7 BAR
LINE
6352
8 BAR
LINE
6354
9 BAR
LINE
6356
10 BAR
LINE
6358
11 BAR
LINE
6360
12 BAR
LINE
6362
13 BAR
LINE
6341
14 BAR
LINE
6355
15 BAR
LINE
6357
16 BAR
LINE
6349
17 BAR
LINE
6353
18 BAR
LINE
6359
19 BAR
LINE
6343
20 BAR
LINE
6363
21 BAR
LINE
6347
22 BAR
LINE
6345
23 BAR
LINE
6351
24 BAR
LINE
6361
MATERI
/ 1-12 / 5
6341
6343
6345
6347
6349
6351
6353
6355
6357
6359
6361
6363
6365
6367
6369
6371
6373
6375
6377
6379
6381
6383
6385
6387
405
/ 13-24 / 6
GEOMET
/ 1-12 / 5
/ 13-24 / 6
DATA
/ 1-12 / 7
/ 13-24 / 8
30.2
Boundary Conditions
The model has some fixities on its boundaries as follows: The nodes along the vertical
faces in XZ plane on the boundary of the model are restrained from motion along Y
direction. The nodes along the vertical faces in Y Z plane on the boundary are restrained
from movement along X direction. All the nodes at the base of the model are fixed in the
vertical direction. The rotation of the piles are checked assigning rotational restraints,
RZ to zero.
30.3
Loading
In addition to the self weight, the other loads specified in the model are as follows: The
deck loads are applied as pressure load on the bridge decks on two sides as shown in
Figure 30.5. The magnitude of the deck load on the left side is 700 kN/m2 and on the
right side is 500 kN/m2 in downward direction.
Figure 30.5: Front view of the deck loads on two sides of the bridge
30.4
Analysis
FX+
406
We will now specify the remaining material properties, geometrical properties, and element data.
Material properties
BridgePier.py
setMaterialParameter( "Layer1-TopSoil", "K0", [ "1.0" ] )

setMaterialParameter( "Layer2-MidSoil", "K0", [ "1.0" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Layer3-BottomSoil", "K0", [ "1.0" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pile_in_Pier_Foundation", "DSTIF", [ "1.00000E+008",
"1.00000E+007" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pile_in_Soil", "DSTIF", [ "1.00000E+008",
"1.00000E+006" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pile_in_Soil", "TAUDIS", [ "-1.00000E+003",
"-1.00000E+006", "-1.00000E+003", "-1.00000E-003", "1.00000E+003",
"1.00000E-003", "1.00000E+003", "1.00000E+006" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pile_tip", "DSTIF", [ "1.00000E+006", "1.00000E+006" ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Pile_tip", "SIGDIS", [ "-5.00000E+002", "-1.00000E+006",
"-5.00000E+002", "-5.00000E-004", "5.00000E+002", "5.00000E-004",
"5.00000E+002", "1.00000E+006" ] )
Geometrical properties
BridgePier.py
removeGeometryParameter( "Pile-Conc", "CROSSE" )

setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Conc", "CIRCLE", [ "7.00000E-001" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Conc", "ZAXIS", [ "-1", "0", "0" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Conc", "PERIME", [ "2.2" ] )
removeGeometryParameter( "Pile-Soil", "CROSSE" )
setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Soil", "CIRCLE", [ "7.00000E-001" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Soil", "ZAXIS", [ "-1", "0", "0" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "Pile-Soil", "PERIME", [ "2.2" ] )
addGeometry( "7" )
setGeometryParameter( "7", "SURFAC", [ "3.84845E-001" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "7", "XAXIS", [ "0", "0", "-1" ] )
setGeometryParameter( "7", "YAXIS", [ "0", "-1", "0" ] )
Element data
setElementDataParameter(
30.5
BridgePier.py
"Pile-Conc",
"Pile-Soil",
"Pile-Soil",
"Pile-Soil",
"Pile-Soil",
"INTERF",
"INTERF",
"TIPLOC",
"TIPMAT",
"TIPGEO",
[
[
[
[
[
"BEAM" ] )
"BEAM" ] )
"END" ] )
"7" ] )
"7" ] )
Analysis
The analysis is performed in two phases. In the first phase, only soil mesh sets are
activated and the stress initialisation is done with the self weight. The displacements
calculated in this phase are all suppressed. The stresses from this phase, however, are
carried forward to the next phase where all mesh sets are considered and the deck loads
are applied in 5 steps.
Phase 1
BridgePier.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*PHASE
30.5 Analysis
407
BEGIN ACTIVE
ELEMEN "Layer1" "Layer2" "Layer3" /
REINFO NONE
END ACTIVE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 1
END CALCUL
END STRESS
END INITIA
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
BEGIN PHYSIC
LIQUEF OFF
SUPPRE
END PHYSIC
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase1"
END OUTPUT
Phase 2
BridgePier.dcf
*PHASE
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR 1
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
BEGIN ITERAT
CONTIN
METHOD SECANT
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN LOAD
LOADNR 2
END LOAD
BEGIN ITERAT
CONVER SIMULT
METHOD SECANT
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT
FXPLUS
FILE "phase2"
END OUTPUT
*END
408
30.6
Results
The results from the analysis are obtained in form of deformations, stresses, strains in
the soil layeres, piles and the interface elements surrounding the reinforcing elements (i.e
the piles). A few selected results are shown and discussed in the subsections below.
30.6.1
Deformations
The deformation in the model is shown in Figure 30.6 in which both the isometric and the
top views are presented. The displacements in the soil medium at the end of Phase 2 are
negligible in the major area away from the location of the bridge pier. The deformations
are maximum at the top of the bridge pier, especially on the left arm of the deck as this
has sustained higher magnitude of load (viz. 700 kN/m2 ) compared to the right arm.
(a) Isometric view
(b) Top view
Figure 30.6: Different views of final total displacements of the model
30.6.2
Stresses
Figure 30.7 demonstrates the stresses generated in the model at the end of Phase 1 and
Phase 2. The stresses generated at the end of Phase 1 are only due to the self weight of
the soil whereas the stresses developed at the end of Phase 2 are due to the application
of the deck load in addition to the self weight which caused higher values of stresses.
(a) Phase 1
(b) Phase 2
Figure 30.7: Initial (left) and final (right) vertical stresses
30.6.3
Responses of the Piles
The responses of the piles are depicted in Figure 30.8 in form of axial forces and moments
developed in the pile. The axial force, Nx developed is maximum beneath the left wing of
the deck slab where the greater of the loads has been applied and has reached the value
of almost 1037 kN. The maximum axial forces are seen to be developed at the interface
between the top soil layer and the foundation of the bridge pier. The maximum moments
(My ) in the piles are generated at the interface between the pier foundation and the top
soil layer. It may also be noted here that at any height the moments developed in the
piles on the left side are opposite to those developed in the piles on the right side.
30.6 Results
409
(a) Axial force force, Nx
(b) Moment, My
Figure 30.8: Axial force and moment in piles at the end of Phase 2
Figure 30.9 shows the force STx at the pile tip. We clearly see in this figure that the
pile tip force reaches a maximum value of 500 kN in the piles on the left end (where the
deck slab is subjected to greater load) and this is the same value as defined in the table
Table 30.3 under piletip interface property indicating that the pile tip capacity is fully
mobilized.
Figure 30.9: Force (STx ) at pile tip

t the end of Phase 2
30.6.4
Responses of Interface Elements
The relative slip displacement and the shear force along the interface elements at the
end of Phase 2 are shown in Figure 30.10 for parts of pile inside the soil layers (top
and middle). The relative slip displacement is maximum (0.000584357 m) in the middle
soil layer because this layer has the minimum value of elastic modulus in comparison
to the elastic modulus value of the top soil layer. The absolute value of the minimum
relative slip displacement, occuring in the top layer, is 0.000109434 m. The corresponding
values of the shear forces developed along the interfaces can be immediately calculated
(by linear interpolation) from these values of relative displacements in combination with
the values provided with in Table 30.3 (stress deformation values for pile-soil interface) as
584.357 kN/m2 (= 0.0005843571000
) and 109.434 kN/m2 (= 0.0001094341000
) respectively
0.001
0.001
410

in the middle layer and the top layer of soil. These shear forces are seen in Figure 30.10.
The shear force is maximum at the junction of the foundation and the top soil layer and
also at the bottom. The relative slip displacements are observed to be maximum at the
bottom.
(a) Relative slip displacement, P Tx
(b) Shear force, STx
Figure 30.10: Relative displacement and shear force at the end of Phase 2
Chapter 31
Slope Stability Analysis by

Strength Reduction Method
Name:
SlopeStab
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/SlopeStab
Keywords:
analys: nonlin physic reduct.

constr: suppor.
elemen: cq16e ct12e pstrai.
load: weight.
materi: elasti harden isotro mohrco plasti strain.
option: bfgs direct filos groups nonsym save secant units.
result: cauchy displa extern force green reacti strain stress total.
31.1
Model
The main objective of this chapter is to introduce the readers to the capability of Diana
to perform slope stability analysis using strength reduction method. The conventional
limit equilibrium method investigates equilibrium of soil mass under the action of gravity.
In the strength reduction method, the strength characteristics of materials (viz. cohesion
and friction angle) are reduced by a factor in each iteration until the system fails or
loses stability. In Diana this method is implemented through a separate module named
reduct. At present, Diana can use MohrCoulomb and DruckerPrager materials for
this particular analysis type.
A set of two examples are cited in this chapter. The first one represents a two-dimensional plane strain model and the other one is an extension of this two-dimensional
model in the out of plane direction and thus becomes a three-dimensional model. The
first two-dimensional model with the mesh is shown in Figure 31.1. This model consists
of a soil domain with a base width of 80 m, height 20 m on one side and 30 m on the
other side. The soil surface has a gentle slope in the middle with 1(V):2(H) inclination.
The toe on the left side of the slope has a width of 20 m and the crest on the right side of
the slope has a width of 20 m. This model is meshed with quadratic quadrilateral plane
strain elements (CQ16E).
The second model is three-dimensional which is the extension of the previous two-dimensional model in the third direction by a distance of 50 m. This three-dimensional
model is meshed with quadratic 20-noded solid brick elements (CHX60). The three-dimensional model is shown in Figure 31.2. It may be mentioned here that these models
are chosen from the thesis submitted by Albataineh [1].
31.1.1
Material Properties
The material behavior for the soil of both models is the same and assumed to follow the
MohrCoulomb constitutive model. The values of the material parameters are given in
Table 31.1.
412
Slope Stability Analysis by Strength Reduction Method
Figure 31.1: Two-dimensional model
Figure 31.2: Three-dimensional model

Table 31.1: Material properties of the soil
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Unit weight,
Cohesion, C
Friction angle, phi
Dilatancy angle,
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3
kN/m2
Value
1e+06
0.30
17.0
15
20.0
0.0
A part of the data file showing the material properties is shown below. Note the use of
parameter STRRED which enables the analysis using strength reductions on the cohesion
and friction angle of the corresponding material. It must be noted that if the model uses
more than one material, this specific keyword has to be mentioned under those material
models for which the strength reduction method will be applied.
SlopeStab.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"soilprop"
YOUNG
1.00000E+006
POISON 3.00000E-001

DENSIT
YIELD
YLDVAL
STRRED
31.2
1.73300E+000
MOHRCO
1.50000E+001
COHPHI
413
3.42020E-001
0.000
Boundary Conditions
For the two-dimensional plane strain model, the nodes at the bottom are fixed in all
translational directions (i.e. X and Y directions) and the nodes on the vertical edges
on both sides are restrained against motion along X (horizontal) direction only. For
the three-dimensional model, the nodes at the bottom are fixed in all three orthogonal
directions and the nodes on the boundaries in XZ plane and Y Z plane are restrained
against any movement along Y and X directions (horizontal) respectively. Figure 31.1
and Figure 31.2 above show the boundary conditions for the two models.
31.3
Loading
The slope stability analysis is performed considering only the self weight of the soil. So,
there are no other active loads considered in the model.
31.4
Analysis
The slope stability analysis in Diana is based on strength reduction method as mentioned
earlier. First, the self weight and any other loads, if present, are applied using a nonlinear
static analysis and an equilibrium state is reached. Thereafter, the module reduct is
run through an iterative process to determine the factor of safety (FoS). It must be noted
here that at each iteration a nonlinear analysis is carried out. To obtain the appropriate
factor of safety, the first iteration starts with user specified or default value of the factor
of safety. The cohesion, C and the tangent of the friction angle, tan() are reduced by
dividing those values by the factor as shown below.
Cred =
C
F oS
(31.1)
tan
(31.2)
F oS
If the convergence is reached with these new values of strength parameters within a fixed
number of iterations, the factor of safety is increased and the process is repeated. In case
the equilibrium is not reachable (indicating divergence), the factor of safety is chosen as
the average of the last two factors of safety used and the process is repeated. Thus, the
iterative process goes on until the factor of safety value becomes smaller than the user
specified tolerance.
tanred =
SlopeStab.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
BEGIN INITIA
BEGIN STRESS
BEGIN CALCUL
LOAD 1
END CALCUL
414

END STRESS
END INITIA
END START
BEGIN ITERAT
BEGIN CONVER
DISPLA OFF
FORCE CONTIN
END CONVER
MAXITE 50
METHOD SECANT
END ITERAT
END EXECUT
OUTPUT FXPLUS
*REDUCT
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN FINDEQ
ITERAT MAXITE 200
STEPS EXPLIC
END FINDEQ
END EXECUT
OUTPUT FXPLUS
*END
31.5
Results
The factors of safety obtained at the end of the analyses for two-dimensional and three-dimensional models are shown in Table 31.2 along with the values obtained from the analyses
of these two models with the help of other widely used numerical analysis software as ready
references and for ease of comparison ([1]). The table clearly shows a close agreement
between the values of factor of safety obtained from Diana analyses with those obtained
from other numerical methods.
Table 31.2: Factor of safety from Diana and other numerical methods
Model
2D Model
3D Model
SAS-MCT 4.0
1.70
1.70
UTEXAS3
1.70
1.70
STABL5M
1.71
1.71
Plaxis2D/3D
1.70
1.80
DIANA
1.68
1.72
Figure 31.3 and Figure 31.4 capture the modes of failure of the two-dimensional model.
Figure 31.5 and Figure 31.6 demonstrate the failure planes of the three-dimensional
model.
31.5 Results
415
Figure 31.3: Total displacement contour for two-dimensional model
Figure 31.4: Maximum total shear strains for two-dimensional model
Figure 31.5: Total displacement contour for three-dimensional model
416
Figure 31.6: Maximum total shear strains for three-dimensional model
Chapter 32
Free Vibration Analysis of Soil

Deposit and Dam
Name:
FreeVib
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/FreeVib
Keywords:
analys: eigen.
constr: suppor.
elemen: pstrai solid t6eps tp18l.
load: weight.
result: displa eigen total values.
32.1
Model
The objective of this example is to perform free vibration analyses of a two-dimensional

soil deposit and a three-dimensional dam as two separate cases using Diana. The natural
frequencies of their vibrations are compared with the theory.
The models of the two-dimensional soil deposit and the dam (front view) are shown
in Figure 32.1 and Figure 32.2 respectively. The soil deposit is 20 m thick, 60 m wide and
consists of a single layer. The three-dimensional earth dam has a base of 162 m, height
of 46 m and the crest is 1 m wide. The dam has a slope of 1(V):2(H) on the left and an
inclination of 1(V):1.5(H) on the right.
Figure 32.1: Model - two-dimensional soil deposit

The two-dimensional soil domain is meshed with three-node isoparametric plane strain
triangular elements (T6EPS). The three-dimensional dam is meshed with six-node isoparametric solid wedge elements (TP18L). The meshes of the soil deposit and the dam are
shown in Figure 32.3 and Figure 32.4 respectively.
418
Free Vibration Analysis of Soil Deposit and Dam
Figure 32.2: Model of three-dimensional dam
Figure 32.3: The two-dimensional mesh of the soil deposit
32.1.1
Material Properties
The material properties of the soil deposit and the dam represent linear elastic behavior
and are given in Table 32.1.
Table 32.1: Material properties of soil deposit and dam
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density,
32.2
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
Soil Deposit
250000
0.36
1.836
Dam
949000
0.495
2.4473
Boundary Conditions
Both the models (soil deposit and dam) have been assigned boundary conditions so as to
fix the base against all translational motions and also fix the other nodes in the respective
meshes in a way to allow deformation only in horizontal (X) direction.
32.3 Analysis
419
Figure 32.4: The three-dimensional mesh of the earth dam
32.3
Analysis
The basic set-up corresponding to the free vibration analysis of a system is quite simple.
The command file must have the necessary instructions to carry out an eigenvalue analysis
with specific number of modes being mentioned. The command files corresponding to
the free vibration analysis of the soil deposit and the dam are given below. It may
be seen that the soil deposit is analysed for first 10 eigenmodes whereas the dam has
been analysed for 8 eigenmodes. The choice of the number of eigenmodes depend on
how much mass is participating in the vibration - normally a 90% mass participation
factor in a specific direction is assumed to be enough. The first few modes are usually
important as these dominate the responses and hence corresponding eigenfrequencies
become influential. However, final decision may be arrived at only after having a closer
look into mode shapes, mass participations and modal frequencies.
soilvib2d.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*EIGEN
EXECUT NMODES 20
OUTPUT FXPLUS
*END
damvib3d.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*EIGEN
EXECUT NMODES 8
OUTPUT FXPLUS
*END
32.4
Results
The results from the eigenvalue analyses show the deformed shapes for various modes
(normalised mode shapes). The .out file contains the modal mass participation factors
420

and the respective frequencies in a tabulated format. The relevant part of the .out file
for the soil deposit is shown below.
soilvib2d.out
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FREQUENCY
0.27989E+01
0.48792E+01
0.84620E+01
0.84765E+01
0.93912E+01
0.11751E+02
0.12343E+02
0.14323E+02
0.14888E+02
0.14934E+02
0.16307E+02
0.16637E+02
0.18427E+02
0.19151E+02
0.20335E+02
0.20521E+02
0.21001E+02
0.22196E+02
0.22217E+02
0.22382E+02
EFF.MASS TX
0.17865E+07
0.00000E+00
0.19842E+06
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.71202E+05
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.35915E+05
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
PERCENTAGE
0.81057E+02
0.00000E+00
0.90023E+01
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.32304E+01
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.16295E+01
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
CUM.PERCENT.
0.81057E+02
0.81057E+02
0.90059E+02
0.90059E+02
0.90059E+02
0.90059E+02
0.90059E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.93289E+02
0.94919E+02
0.94919E+02
0.94919E+02
0.94919E+02
0.94919E+02
The .out file for the soil deposit clearly shows that the major mass participation is
taking place in the first mode (81% mass participation) and the third mode (additional 9%
mass participation). The corresponding frequencies are 2.80 Hz (first mode) and 8.46 Hz
(third mode). The corresponding mode shapes are shown in Figure 32.5.
(b) third mode shape, 8.46 Hz
(a) first mode shape, 2.80 Hz
Figure 32.5: Two major mode shapes for free vibration of soil deposit
The relevant part of the .out file for the dam is shown below. The .out file for the
dam demonstrates that the major mass participation is occuring in modes 1, 2 and 4
with mass participations of around 69%, 83% and 88% respectively. The corresponding
frequencies are 2.97 Hz, 6.92 Hz and 11.21 Hz.
damvib3d.out
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FREQUENCY
0.29674E+01
0.69164E+01
0.95122E+01
0.11210E+02
0.11373E+02
0.14383E+02
0.15887E+02
0.16776E+02
EFF.MASS TX
0.12688E+06
0.24802E+05
0.00000E+00
0.10181E+05
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.55462E+04
0.16079E+01
PERCENTAGE
0.69144E+02
0.13516E+02
0.00000E+00
0.55482E+01
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00
0.30225E+01
0.87622E-03
CUM.PERCENT.
0.69144E+02
0.82660E+02
0.82660E+02
0.88208E+02
0.88208E+02
0.88208E+02
0.91231E+02
0.91231E+02
The relevant mode shapes are shown in Figure 32.6.
32.5
Verification of Results - Soil Deposit
The theoretical calculation of the natural frequencies (fn ) of free vibration of the soil
deposit considered in the example above may be performed using the following formula
32.6 Verification of Results - Dam
(a) first mode shape, 2.97 Hz
421
(b) second mode shape, 6.92 Hz
(c) fourth mode shape, 11.21 Hz
Figure 32.6: First three major mode shapes for free vibration of dam
by Kramer [11].
Vs
(0.5 + n)
(32.1)
2H
In (32.1), Vs denotes the shear wave velocity in the soil and H refers to the thickness of
the soil deposit. The term, n may vary from 0 to + (n = 0 for first mode, n = 1 for
second mode and likewise). The shear wave velocity has been obtained using the elastic
modulus, E, the mass density, and Poissons ratio, of the soil from the equation given
below.
s
E
(32.2)
Vs =
2(1 + )
fn =
Thus, using above two equations and the material properties of the soil deposit as defined
in Table 32.1, the shear wave velocity and thereafter the first two natural frequencies of
vibration of soil deposit (using n = 0 and 1) may be easily calculated as 223.75 m/s,
2.79 Hz and 8.39 Hz respectively. The numerially obtained (from Diana) first two free
vibration frequencies of the dam are 2.80 Hz and 8.46 Hz which seem to be in close
agreement with theoretical values.
32.6
Verification of Results - Dam
Using the values of the material parameters for the dam as given in Table 32.1 and
(32.2), one obtains the shear wave velocity, Vs to be 364 m/s in this case. The natural
frequencies of vibration of a two-dimensional dam is calculated analytically using the
following formula as stated by Kramer [11].
fn =
1 Vs n
(4 + m)(2 m)
2 H 8
(32.3)
In the above equation, H should be equal to the height of the dam (as the crest is too
narrow) which is approximately 46 m. As the shear modulus of the dam material is
assumed to be constant over the height, the value of the stiffness parameter, m used in
(32.3) is considered to be zero. The term, n is the nth root of a period relation and
for the first three modes the values of n are 2.404, 5.520 and 8.654 Hz. So, the first
422

three natural frequencies of vibration may be calculated for the two-dimensional dam
and compared with the values obtained from the corresponding finite element analysis
of the same three-dimensional dam in Diana. The comparison is shown in Table 32.2
below which depicts a reasonable matching between Diana results and the theoretical
predictions.
Table 32.2: Comparison of natural frequencies of dam
Mode Shape Number
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Frequency (Hz) - Theory

3.10
7.00
11.00
Frequency (Hz) - DIANA

2.97
6.92
11.21
Chapter 33
Compression Wave
Propagation and Viscous
Damping
Name:
ViscDamp
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/ViscDamp
Keywords:
analys: dynami nonlin physic transi.

constr: suppor.
elemen: interf mass solid struct t18if t9tm te12l.
load: force node time.
materi: dampin elasti isotro struct.
option: direct groups newmar newton regula units.
result: accele displa total veloci.
33.1
Model
The objective of this example is to develop a model of a base supported vertical soil column
and simulate compression wave propagation inside the column. In addition to this, we
show the effects of viscous dampers on wave propagation. As the model is analysed in
time domain against the input of an impact load, this example also enables we get an
idea about using Diana to simulate the time history loading and carrying out dynamic
analysis in time domain.
The model is a simplistic one and consists of a slender column of single layered soil
with linear elastic material properties. The height of the column is 50 m and a crosssection of 10 m 10 m. This three-dimensional column has been meshed with four-noded
isoparametric solid tetrahedral elements (TE12L). An impact load is applied at the top
[Fig. 33.1].
(a) Soil column
(b) Mesh
Figure 33.1: Soil column model and the corresponding mesh

The length of the soil column is restricted to 50 m for the numerical model though it
should represent the medium with an infinite extension. Hence, the condition of infinite
424
Compression Wave Propagation and Viscous Damping

medium has to be simulated so that the dynamic wave propagating through the medium
should not reflect back once it reaches the bottom of the model. In order to simulate this,
an appropriate combination of springs and dashpots is necessary at the bottom surface
simultaneously with a body of heavy mass and high rigidity. This is done numerically by
creating a bounding surface at a certain distance, e.g. 2 m, beneath the bottom surface
of the model and filling in the gap between the bounding surface and bottom surface by
interface elements. This bounding surface actually represents the infinite medium or the
free field which is simulated by a heavy mass and highly rigid body (i.e. high mass density
and a high value of elastic modulus). The interface elements represent the springs and
the spring stiffnesses are provided as material properties. The lateral extent of the free
field is specified which should be kept on a higher side to simulate the infinite medium.
The viscous damping mechanism is illustrated in Figure 33.2.
Figure 33.2: Viscous damping mechanism
33.1.1
Material Properties
The soil material is assumed to be linear elastic and shown in the Table 33.1 below. The
properties of the springdashpot system (serving as viscous dampers) and the free field
are also shown in the same table. An explanation about the calculation of the values of
viscous damper coefficient, Cp is given in the annexure at the end of this chapter [ 33.4
p. 429].
Table 33.1 shows high values of elastic modulus, dry density, and free field distance
of bounding surface so that it may represent the infinite soil extent. The values of the
normal and shear stiffnesses are kept quite low at only 0.001 kN/m2 /g for both. The
main reason for these low values is to ensure capturing wave rebounding after the waves
reach the bottom of the soil column model. The material properties, as they appear in
the corresponding .dat file, are shown below. It shows that term FFDIST denotes the
free field distance (as mentioned in Table 33.1). The DSTIF denotes the normal and shear
stiffnesses of the springs used in viscous damping. Additionally, it must be mentioned
that the spring stiffness values are willingly chosen to be very low as seen in the Table
33.1 to minimise the chance of rebounding of the waves. The properties that cannot be
supplied via FX+ will be added in Mesh Editor [ 33.1.4 p. 426].
33.1 Model
425
Table 33.1: Material properties of soil, free field and viscous dampers
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density
Normal stiffness, Kn
Shear stiffness, Kt
Compression coeff., Cp
Free field distance
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
kN/m2 /g
kN/m2 /g
kN s/m3
m
Soil column
80000
0.35
2.03874
Free field
1e+13
0.10
1e+10
1e+03
Springs
0.001
0.001
Dashpots
511.628415
ViscDamp.dat
MATERI
1 NAME
"soil3d"
YOUNG
8.00000E+007
POISON 3.50000E-001
DENSIT 2.03874E+003
2 NAME
"AbsorberMat"
YOUNG
1.00000E+013
POISON 1.00000E-001
DENSIT 1.00000E+013
3 NAME
"InterfMat"
DENSIT 0.00000E+00
DSTIF
1.00000E+000
DAMP
511628.412
1.00000E+000
ViscDamp.dat
GEOMET
1 NAME
"InterfProp"
XAXIS
1.00000E+000
2 NAME
"Absorber"
FFDIST 1000.00
3 NAME
"soil"
33.1.2
0.00000E+000
0.00000E+000
Boundary Conditions
All the nodes in the mesh of the soil column have been restrained against any motions
in horizontal plane. They are allowed to move only vertically, thus ensuring that only
compression wave travels through the column in vertical direction.
33.1.3
Loading
We apply an impact load at the centre of the top surface of the soil column (at the central
node). The amplitude of the force is 10 kN and the direction is vertically downward. The
time history of the impact load is shown in Figure 33.3. The selfweight is ignored in this
model as it is not relevant for the current study. The relevant part of the data file where
the loading information is stored is also shown below.
ViscDamp.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
NODAL
74
FORCE
GROUPS
-1.00000E+004
426
Figure 33.3: Time history of the applied impact load

ELEMEN
2 "Soil3D" / 1-184 /
3 "Extract-Mesh" / 185-192 /
4 "Extrude Mesh" / 193-200 /
SUPPOR
NAME SET_1
/ 1 19 20 36-38 55-73(9) 2-18 21-35 39-54 56-63 65-72 74-80 / TR 1
/ 1 19 20 36-38 55-73(9) 2-18 21-35 39-54 56-63 65-72 74-80 / TR 2
TIMELO
LOAD 1
TIMES 0.00000E+000 5.00000E-001 1.00000E+000 1.50000E+000 5.00000E+000 /
FACTOR 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 1.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 0.00000E+000 /
33.1.4
Finishing the Model with Mesh Editor
FX+
Analysis
We will now specify the remaining material properties of the interface elements or the
springs.
Material properties
ViscDamp.py
setMaterialParameter( "InterfMat", "DENSIT", [ 0.0 ] )

setMaterialParameter( "InterfMat", "DAMP", [ 511628.412 ] )
We will also specify the free field distance of the free field.
Geometrical property
ViscDamp.py
setGeometryParameter( "Absorber", "FFDIST", [ 1000 ] )
33.2 Analysis
33.2
427
Analysis
Figure 33.4 shows the mesh of the soil column with elements which are almost uniform in
size. The average element length in vertical direction is 6.25 m. From the given material
properties in Table 33.1 the compressional wave velocity, Vp may be calculated (using the
formula shown in the Annexure at the end) to be 250.95 m/s. With this value, we find
out that the time required by the compression wave to cross one element length is 0.025
s. The time step to be used for time history integration is assumed to be equal to 20% of
0.025 s = 0.005 s.
We perform a time history analysis for the duration of the input (i.e. 5 seconds) in
1000 steps with 0.005 s increment at each step. The corresponding command file is shown
below.
ViscDamp.dcf
*FILOS
INITIA
*INPUT
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
BEGIN TRANSI
METHOD NEWMAR
END TRANSI
END TYPE
BEGIN EXECUT
TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.5 0.005(900)
ITERAT CONVER SIMULT
END EXECUT
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS
DISPLA
VELOCI
ACCELE
ELMFOR DAMPIN
ELMFOR INERTI
END OUTPUT
*END
33.3
Results
The displacement time histories are plotted for four distinct nodes located at four different
positions along the height of the soil column so as to clearly demonstrate the propagation
of the compression wave and the working mechanism of the viscous dampers placed at
the bottom of the soil column. The nodes are 74 (at the top), 75 (in the middle), 80 (near
the bottom), and 73 (at the bottom). The location of the nodes are shown in Figure
33.4. The coordinates (in m) of these nodes are: (5,5,50) (node 74), (5,5,28.094) (node
75), (5,5,8.959) (node 80), and (5,5,0) (node 73).
33.3.1
Displacement Time History With Viscous Damping
The temporal variation of displacements of the preselected four nodes in the soil column
with viscous dampers at the bottom are shown in Figure 33.5.
Figure 33.5 shows that the vibration starts at the top node which is directly the point
of application of the load. The next node which starts vibrating is node 75 and it waits
until the wave reaches the point. Thereafter, nodes 80 and 73 start moving one after
the other. The time lapse between the onset of vibrations of these two nodes is very
close to the time that the compression wave should theoretically take to travel down from
node 74 to node 75. We also see from the graph that once the wave reaches the bottom,
that the wave does not get reflected and comes up the column - rather it gets absorbed
428
Figure 33.4: Location of the four nodes along the height of the soil column
Figure 33.5: Time history of displacements with viscous damping

by the viscous dampers. The absorption of the waves (hence the loss in kinetic energy)
becomes possible in this model at the expense of permanent displacement (equivalent gain
in strain/potential energy) of the damper nodes.
33.3.2
Displacement Time History Without Visccous Damping
Now, let us have a look into the results of displacement time history of the same nodes
had there been no viscous dampers active in the system. In that case, the bottom nodes of
the model need to be fixed in vertical direction besides the fixities in horizontal directions.
All the other nodes in the model are restrained only in horizontal planes as usual. Figure
33.6 shows the temporal variation of displacements at the same four nodes like in Figure
33.5. We now see that the nodes keep on vibrating unabated in time and as the model
itself has no material damping, the reason of this continuous undamped vibration for an
infinite time may be attributed to the absence of viscous dampers. Moreover, we also
note here that the bottom node 73 is not vibrating at all because this node is supported
and hence now restrained against vibration in vertical direction.
33.4 Annexure
429
Figure 33.6: Time history of displacements without viscous damping
33.4
Annexure
The basic equations used in the background of calculations of certain parameters in this
example are given below.
The shear modulus, Gs and the shear and compression wave velocities (Vs and Vp ,
respectively) may be expressed as:
E
2(1 + )
Gs =
(33.1)
s
Gs
(33.2)
Gs (2 2)
(1 2)
(33.3)
Vs =
s
Vp =
The viscous damper coefficients in shear and compression (i.e. Cs and Cp , respectively)
are expressed as:
Cs =
Gs
(33.4)
( + 2Gs )
(33.5)
E
(1 + )(2 )
(33.6)
Cp =
Where
=
430
Chapter 34
Seismic Analysis of a Nonlinear

Tunnel-Soil Model
Name:
TunDyn
Path:
/Examples/Fxplus/TunDyn
Keywords:
analys: dynami eigen nonlin physic respon spectr transi.

class: large.
constr: suppor.
elemen: bar curved reinfo shell solid t15sh te12l.
load: base freque time weight.
materi: dampin elasti harden isotro mohrco plasti strain viscou.
option: direct groups newmar newton nonsym regula units.
result: cauchy displa eigen green plasti princi strain stress total values
vonmis.
34.1
Model
The objective of this example is to study dynamic responses of a tunnel embedded in

a soil medium when the tunnelsoil system is subjected to a seismic ground motion.
Three different types of analysis are carried out. The first one is the eigenvalue analysis
to obtain dominant mode shapes and free vibration frequencies. The second one is the
response spectrum analysis. Subsequently, a full time history analysis of the model is also
performed. The tunnelsoil model and the mesh with boundary conditions are shown in
Figure 34.1 and Figure 34.2 respectively. The tunnel consists of 2 parts, the main tunnel
spanning along Y direction (horizontal) and the tunnel gallery which is a short span along
X direction and joins the main tunnel. Both the main tunnel and the galary have circular
concrete lining and are stabilised with a number of steel rockbolts (reinforcements)
around the periphery of the tunnel.
The soil part is meshed with 4-noded isoparametric solid (TE12L) elements. The
tunnel lining is meshed with three-noded isoparametric curved shell elements (T15SH).
The rock-bolts are meshed with one-dimensional reinforcement bar elements.
34.1.1
Material Properties
The material properties of the hard soil layer (following the MohrCoulomb constitutive
model), the concrete tunnel lining (linear elastic material) and the steel rockbolts (linear
elastic material) are given in Table 34.1 below.
34.2
Boundary Conditions
The model is assigned some supports on its boundaries as follows. The nodes along the
two vertical faces on XZ plane on the boundary of the model are restrained from motion
along Y direction. The nodes along the two vertical faces in Y Z plane on the boundary
432
Seismic Analysis of a Nonlinear Tunnel-Soil Model
Figure 34.1: Three-dimensional tunnel-soil model
Figure 34.2: Mesh with boundary conditions

Table 34.1: Properties of soil layer, tunnel lining and rock-bolts
Model parameters
Elastic Modulus, E
Poissons ratio,
Dry Density
Cohesion
Angle of Friction,
Dilatancy angle,
Unit
kN/m2
kN/m3 /g
kN/m2
Soil
5883990
0.20
2.59876
2941.995
40
0
Tunnel Lining
14710000
0.20
2.40263
Rock-bolts
196133000
0.30
7.84532
are restrained from moving along X direction. All the nodes at the base of the model
are fixed in the vertical direction. These supports are shown in Figure 34.2. The nodes
situated at the open ends of the main tunnel (which is parallel to Y axis) are fixed against
rotations around X and Z axes. The nodes at the open end of the gallery (short tunnel
parallel to X axis) are also restrained against rotations around Y and Z axes. These
34.3 Loading
433
restraints are shown in Figure 34.3.
Figure 34.3: Mesh with boundary conditions on main and short tunnels
34.3
Loading
For the eigenvalue analysis no separate loads are considered. However, in addition to the
self weight, for the response spectrum analysis a design response spectrum load is adopted
as shown in Figure 34.4 and for the time history analysis a seismic ground motion record as
shown in Figure 34.5 is used. Both are applied in horizontal X direction. The acceleration
time history is applied as base excitation, hence it becomes active at all nodes in the model
which are supported in X direction.
The loading entered through FX+ would be recorded in the .dat file as follows:
TunDyn.dat
LOADS
CASE 1
WEIGHT
CASE 2
BASE
1 1.00000E+000
CASE 3
BASE
1 1.00000E+000
The acceleration time history entered through FX+ for load case 2 is written in table
TIMELO:
TunDyn.dat
TIMELO
LOAD 2
TIMES 0.00000E+000
2.00000E-002
4.00000E-002
6.00000E-002
8.00000E-002
...
FACTOR
6.86420E-003 -9.80600E-004 -7.84480E-003
1.96120E-003
2.94180E-003
434
Figure 34.4: Design response spectrum

...
The frequency-acceleration spectrum entered through FX+ for load case 3 is written
in table FREQLO:
TunDyn.dat
FREQLO
LOAD 3
FREQUE 0.00000E+000
1.00000E-001
2.00000E-001
3.00000E-001
4.00000E-001
7.25000E-001
9.50000E-001
1.17500E+000
1.40000E+000
...
FACTOR
5.00000E-001
...
34.4
Analysis
The dynamic analysis of the tunnel-soil model is done in three distinct steps. In the
first step, the free vibration eigenvalue analysis of the model is performed to obtain the
predominant mode shapes and eigenfrequencies. No loads, except for the self weight, are
considered. Also, the model is assumed to have no damping. The free vibration eigenvalue
analysis is carried out to find the first 20 modes. The command file for the eigenvalue
analysis is shown below.
eigen.dcf
*EIGEN
TYPE FREEVI STRESS CALCUL
EXECUT NMODES 20
OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE "tunEA"
LOAD 1
The above commands are loaded and run with the following Python commands:
34.4 Analysis
435
Figure 34.5: Time history of acceleration - input base excitation

Load and run commands for eigenvalue analysis
TunDyn.py
newAnalysis( "Eigen" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Eigen", "eigen.dcf" )
runSolver( "Eigen" )
Once the mode shapes and natural frequencies are determined from the eigenvalue analysis, a response spectrum analysis is carried out where the responses of the model are
obtained due to a design response spectrum input load applied horizontally in X direction.
The response spectrum curve as shown in Figure 34.4 depicts that the spectrum is available until 25 Hz. This curve is plotted at every 0.1 Hz starting from 0 Hz. The response
spectrum analysis combines the results of dominant modes through SRSS (Square-Rootof-Sum-of-Squares) method. The reason for the choice of this method of modal combination rule is explained in the next section. The command file for the response spectrum
analysis is shown below.
spectr.dcf
*SPECTR
MODEL OFF
EIGEN OFF
BEGIN RESPON
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="tunRS"
SELECT MODES 1-15 SRSS
STRAIN TOTAL GREEN
GLOBAL
END OUTPUT
END RESPON
Load and run commands for spectral analysis
TunDyn.py
newAnalysis( "Spectr" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Spectr", "spectr.dcf" )
runSolver( "Spectr" )
436
Subsequently, a full time history analysis of the whole model is carried out to see the
temporal variation of responses in different parts of the model. This analysis introduces
Rayleigh damping; the values of the damping parameters and are determined from the
dominant frequency range of vibration, which was calculated by the eigenvalue analysis,
and the assumed damping ratio of the model for the dominant modes. The relevant
simultaneous equations to be solved to compute Rayleigh damping parameters are given
as
2
2m m = + m
(34.1)
2n n = + n2
(34.2)
The terms m and n denote the eigenfrequencies (unit is in rad/s) of free vibration as
obtained from the eigenvalue analysis corresponding to the first mode and the last mode
from the dominant range of vibration modes. The terms m and n represent the damping
ratios corresponding to the first dominant mode and the last dominant mode considered.
The value of the damping ratio is assumed to be constant at 5% for all modes in the
model. Thus, with the values of m and n being known and with known damping ratio
(i.e. m = n = 0.05), one may use above equations to solve for the Rayleigh damping
parameters, resulting in = 1.98496 and = 0.00083732. These parameters are added
to the model with the following Python commands:
Add Rayleigh damping parameters
TunDyn.py
setMaterialParameter( "Hard_Rock", "RAYLEI", [ 1.98496, 8.37320E-4 ] )

setMaterialParameter( "Shotcrete", "RAYLEI", [ 1.98496, 8.37320E-4 ] )
setMaterialParameter( "Rock_Bolts", "RAYLEI", [ 1.98496, 8.37320E-4 ] )
For the time history analysis, the tunnelsoil model is assumed to be subjected to a
seismic ground motion. The input base excitation is defined as a discrete time history of
horizontal accelerations (in X direction). Since we will use the time history load only, we
need to remove the load case associated with the FREQLO table, to avoid conflicts when
the time history analysis is run.
Remove redundant load case
TunDyn.py
removeLoadCase( "Load case 3" )
The time history load as shown in Figure 34.5 consists of 2000 discrete time points starting
from 0 s at every 0.02 s interval until 39.98 s, with a specific acceleration at each time
point. The time step for the time history integration may be calculated as per the
guidelines provided with the example in Chapter 33 on page 423. However, this increases
the computation time quite considerably. As the purpose of this tutorial is to show how
to set up the time history analysis in Diana, we may decrease the computation time by
restricting the duration of each time step to 0.02 s which is the same as the sampling
time of the accelerogram. Thus the total number of time steps from 0 s through 39.98 s
at every 0.02 s interval (i.e. 0 to 1999) becomes 2000 and the response is also generated
at every 0.02 s. The command file for the time history analysis is shown below.
nonlin.dcf
*NONLIN
BEGIN TYPE
BEGIN TRANSI
METHOD NEWMAR
DYNAMI DAMPIN CONSIS RAYLEI
END TRANSI
END TYPE
BEGIN EXECUT
BEGIN START
LOAD LOADNR=1
INITIA STRESS CALCUL LOAD=1
34.5 Results
437
STEPS EXPLIC
END START
PHYSIC SUPPRE
END EXECUT
EXECUT TIME STEPS EXPLIC SIZES 0.02(1999)
BEGIN OUTPUT FXPLUS FILE="tunTH"
STRESS TOTAL CAUCHY
STRAIN PLASTI GREEN
END OUTPUT
*END
Load and run commands for time history analysis
TunDyn.py
newAnalysis( "Nonlin" )
loadAnalysisCommands( "Nonlin", "nonlin.dcf" )
runSolver( "Nonlin" )
34.5
Results
The results from the dynamic analysis are presented below in three diferrent sections
belonging to the eigenvalue analysis, the response spectrum analysis and the time history
analysis, respectively.
34.5.1
Results of the Eigenvalue Analysis
It has been observed that modes 1, 6 and 7 are dominant in Z (vertical), X (horizontal)
and Y (horizontal) directions respectively with frequencies 4.85 Hz, 11.70 Hz and 12.30 Hz.
The corresponding figures are shown below.
Figure 34.6: Mode 1 - frequency 4.85 Hz
34.5.2
Results of the Response Spectrum Analysis
A table of the mass participation factors as obtained from the eigenvalue analysis is
shown below which presents the percentage of mass participation in each direction as well
as the cumulative mass participation in all directions. The response spectrum analysis
438

combines the results using the SRSS method because the eigenmodes are observed to be
well separated (see the table with mass participation factors in different directions). The
first 15 modes are considered for this combination because the cumulative percentage of
mass participation is seen to reach the maximum value at the 15th mode in vertical (Z)
direction.
tundyn.out
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FREQUENCY
0.48532E+01
0.72002E+01
0.76487E+01
0.10387E+02
0.11223E+02
0.11696E+02
0.12297E+02
0.12527E+02
0.12794E+02
0.13346E+02
0.14221E+02
0.14614E+02
0.14752E+02
0.15168E+02
0.15514E+02
0.15784E+02
EFF.MASS TX
0.27458E+01
0.10289E+05
0.16982E-02
0.57906E-01
0.58748E+00
0.18843E+06
0.97606E-01
0.42647E+06
0.52362E+00
0.64979E-01
0.38276E+03
0.51452E+00
0.26917E+04
0.87253E+02
0.24685E+00
0.30839E-03
PERCENTAGE
0.34947E-03
0.13096E+01
0.21614E-06
0.73699E-05
0.74771E-04
0.23983E+02
0.12423E-04
0.54278E+02
0.66643E-04
0.82701E-05
0.48715E-01
0.65485E-04
0.34258E+00
0.11105E-01
0.31417E-04
0.39250E-07
CUM.PERCENT.
0.34947E-03
0.13099E+01
0.13099E+01
0.13099E+01
0.13100E+01
0.25293E+02
0.25293E+02
0.79571E+02
0.79571E+02
0.79571E+02
0.79620E+02
0.79620E+02
0.79963E+02
0.79974E+02
0.79974E+02
0.79974E+02
34.5 Results
439
17
18
19
20
0.16549E+02
0.17096E+02
0.17474E+02
0.17751E+02
0.10832E-01
0.94997E-01
0.72944E-01
0.32858E-02
0.13786E-05
0.12091E-04
0.92840E-05
0.41820E-06
0.79974E+02
0.79974E+02
0.79974E+02
0.79974E+02
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FREQUENCY
0.48532E+01
0.72002E+01
0.76487E+01
0.10387E+02
0.11223E+02
0.11696E+02
0.12297E+02
0.12527E+02
0.12794E+02
0.13346E+02
0.14221E+02
0.14614E+02
0.14752E+02
0.15168E+02
0.15514E+02
0.15784E+02
0.16549E+02
0.17096E+02
0.17474E+02
0.17751E+02
EFF.MASS TY
0.47388E-06
0.28981E-05
0.80107E+04
0.53921E+02
0.28953E+03
0.64630E-01
0.76510E+05
0.38054E+00
0.27847E+04
0.53705E+06
0.31789E+00
0.33820E+04
0.21953E-01
0.22649E-01
0.33725E+01
0.42125E+04
0.37444E+01
0.17499E+03
0.15680E-01
0.23675E+01
PERCENTAGE
0.00000E+00
0.36886E-09
0.10196E+01
0.68628E-02
0.36850E-01
0.82258E-05
0.97378E+01
0.48433E-04
0.35442E+00
0.68352E+02
0.40459E-04
0.43044E+00
0.27941E-05
0.28826E-05
0.42923E-03
0.53614E+00
0.47657E-03
0.22271E-01
0.19956E-05
0.30132E-03
CUM.PERCENT.
0.00000E+00
0.42917E-09
0.10196E+01
0.10264E+01
0.10633E+01
0.10633E+01
0.10801E+02
0.10801E+02
0.11156E+02
0.79508E+02
0.79508E+02
0.79938E+02
0.79938E+02
0.79938E+02
0.79939E+02
0.80475E+02
0.80475E+02
0.80498E+02
0.80498E+02
0.80498E+02
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
FREQUENCY
0.48532E+01
0.72002E+01
0.76487E+01
0.10387E+02
0.11223E+02
0.11696E+02
0.12297E+02
0.12527E+02
0.12794E+02
0.13346E+02
0.14221E+02
0.14614E+02
0.14752E+02
0.15168E+02
0.15514E+02
0.15784E+02
0.16549E+02
0.17096E+02
0.17474E+02
0.17751E+02
EFF.MASS TZ
0.62284E+06
0.13952E+04
0.13554E-03
0.27129E-05
0.15302E-02
0.28609E+03
0.46407E-02
0.16587E+04
0.17618E-01
0.19724E-02
0.15227E+01
0.27736E+01
0.76870E+05
0.51835E+04
0.14024E+02
0.75857E-01
0.85445E-01
0.67917E-02
0.69930E+01
0.16485E-03
PERCENTAGE
0.79272E+02
0.17757E+00
0.17250E-07
0.34528E-09
0.19476E-06
0.36412E-01
0.59064E-06
0.21111E+00
0.22423E-05
0.25104E-06
0.19380E-03
0.35301E-03
0.97836E+01
0.65973E+00
0.17849E-02
0.96547E-05
0.10875E-04
0.86441E-06
0.89003E-03
0.20981E-07
CUM.PERCENT.
0.79272E+02
0.79450E+02
0.79450E+02
0.79450E+02
0.79450E+02
0.79486E+02
0.79486E+02
0.79697E+02
0.79697E+02
0.79697E+02
0.79697E+02
0.79698E+02
0.89481E+02
0.90141E+02
0.90143E+02
0.90143E+02
0.90143E+02
0.90143E+02
0.90144E+02
0.90144E+02
The total deformation of the whole model is shown in Figure 34.9. The stresses in the
tunnel lining and the soil domain are shown in Figure 34.10 and Figure 34.11 respectively.
Figure 34.9: Total deformation for whole model

440
Figure 34.10: Stress, Sxx in tunnel lining
Figure 34.11: Stress, Sxx in three-dimensional soil elements

The strains in the rocks bolts, lining and soil are depicted in Figure 34.12, Figure 34.13
and Figure 34.14 respectively. In this context it may be mentioned here that the response
spectrum analysis always provides the peak value of absolute responses and hence these
do not indicate the phase of the motion. It is quite likely that the maximum responses
at different parts of the model will never occur at the same time and hence the response
spectrum analysis results are representative for the worst case scenario.
34.5.3
Results of the Time History Analysis
The time history analysis generates the response of the model at all time points for
the specified duration. The deformation of the three-dimensional soil mesh is shown in
Figure 34.15 and Figure 34.16 respectively at time points 13.36 s and 39.98 s. The input
excitation is seen to be the maximum at t = 13.36 s in Figure 34.5 and the base excitation
stops at t = 39.98 s which is also the end time of the analysis. The deformation of tunnel
lining at the same points are presented in Figure 34.17 and Figure 34.18.
The deformation at t = 13.36 s is larger compared to the deformation at t = 39.98 s.
The stresses generated in the soil domain at t = 13.36 s and 39.98 s are shown in Figure
34.19 and Figure 34.20 respectively. For stresses also the observation remains the same.
34.5 Results
441
Figure 34.12: Strain, Exx in one-dimensional rock bolts
Figure 34.13: Strain, Exx in two-dimensional shell elements in tunnel lining
Figure 34.14: Strain, Exx in three-dimensional soil elements

442
Figure 34.15: Deformation, DX of soil domain at t = 13.36 s
Figure 34.16: Deformation, DX of soil domain at t = 39.98 s
34.5 Results
443
Figure 34.17: Deformation, DX of tunnel lining at t = 13.36 s
Figure 34.18: Deformation, DX of tunnel lining at t = 39.98 s
444
Figure 34.19: Stresses, Sxx in soil domain at t = 13.36 s
Figure 34.20: Stresses, Sxx in soil domain at t = 39.98 s
34.5 Results
445
Figure 34.21 shows the position of 5 nodes in the tunnel-soil model. The nodes are
chosen at the base of the model (node 1683), just beneath the tunnel (node 3213), at
the tunnel bottom (node 717), at the tunnel apex (node 745) and at the surface of the
soil (node 1744). The displacements at these 5 nodes are obtained from the time history
analysis. The temporal variation of relative displacements of nodes 3213, 717, 745 and
1744 with respect to node 1683 are calculated and shown in Figure 34.22 - Figure 34.25.
Figure 34.21: Position of specific nodes in the model
446
Figure 34.22: Relative horizontal displacement of node 3213 w.r.t. node 1683 in time
domain
domain
34.5 Results
447
domain
domain
448
Part IV
Appendix
Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA (IV)
Appendix A
Available Element Types

This appendix is an alphabetically ordered list of all elements available in Diana. See
Volume Element Library for a comprehensive description of these elements, including
input data and background theory.
B2AGW Axisymmetric groundwater flow,
boundary line, 2 nodes, linear.
B2AHT Axisymmetric potential flow, boundary
line, 2 nodes, linear.
B2GW
Groundwater flow, boundary line, 2

nodes, linear.
B2HT
Potential flow, boundary line, 2 nodes,

linear.
BC3AG Axisymmetric groundwater flow,

boundary line, 3 nodes, quadratic.
BC3AHT Axisymmetric potential flow, boundary
line, 3 nodes, quadratic.
nodes, quadratic.
BT3GW Groundwater flow, boundary triangle, 3
nodes, linear.
BT3HT Potential flow, boundary triangle, 3
nodes, linear.
BT9S3
Fluidstructure triangular interface, 6

nodes, linear.
CHX20G Groundwater flow, 3-D, brick, 20 nodes,

quadratic.
CHX20H Potential flow, 3-D, brick, 20 nodes,
quadratic.
CHX60
Solid brick, 20 nodes, quadratic.
BC3GW Groundwater flow, boundary line, 3

nodes, quadratic.
CHX64
Solid brick, 20 nodes, quadratic,

hyperelastic.
BC3HT Potential flow, boundary line, 3 nodes,

quadratic.
CHX96
Solid brick, 32 nodes, cubic.
BCL6S2 Fluidstructure line interface, 5 nodes,

quadratic-linear.
CL10T
Curved truss bar, 2-D, 5 nodes, quartic.
CL12B
BCL6S3 Fluidstructure line interface, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
Curved beam, 2-D, 4 nodes, degenerated

cubic.
CL12I
Line interface, 2-D, 6 nodes, quadratic.
BCQ8GW Groundwater flow, boundary

quadrilateral, 8 nodes, quadratic.
CL12T
Curved truss bar, 3-D, 4 nodes, cubic.
CL15B
Curved beam, 2-D, 5 nodes, degenerated

quartic.
CL15T
Curved truss bar, 3-D, 5 nodes, quartic.
CL18B
Curved beam, 3 nodes, 3-D, quadratic.
CL18I
BCT6HT Potential flow, boundary triangle, 6

nodes, quadratic.
Curved line interface, 6 nodes, quadratic,

linesolid connection.
CL20I
Curved line interface, 10 nodes, quartic.
BL4S2
CL24B
Curved beam, 4 nodes, 3-D, cubic.
CL24I
Line interface, to shell, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
CL30B
Curved beam, 5 nodes, 3-D, quartic.
CL32I
Line interface, to shell, 8 nodes, cubic.
BCQ8HT Potential flow, boundary quadrilateral,

8 nodes, quadratic.
BCT6GW Groundwater flow, boundary triangle,
6 nodes, quadratic.
Fluidstructure line interface, 4 nodes,

linear.
BQ12S4 Fluidstructure quadrilateral interface, 8

nodes, linear.
BQ24S4 Fluidstructure quadrilateral interface,
12 nodes, quadratic-linear.
BQ24S8 Fluidstructure quadrilateral interface,
16 nodes, quadratic.
CL3CM Curved composed line, 3 nodes.

CL3CR Crack tip, 3-D, 3 nodes.
BQ4GW Groundwater flow, boundary

quadrilateral, 4 nodes, linear.
CL6CT
Line contact interface, 2-D, 3 nodes.
CL6TB
Line bounding, 3 nodes, quadratic, 2-D.
BQ4HT Potential flow, boundary quadrilateral, 4

nodes, linear.
CL6TM Curved line mass, 2-D, 3 nodes,

quadratic.
BT18S3 Fluidstructure triangular interface, 9

nodes, quadratic-linear.
CL6TR Curved truss bar, 2-D, 3 nodes,

quadratic.
BT18S6 Fluidstructure triangular interface, 12
CL8TR Curved truss bar, 2-D, 4 nodes, cubic.
452

CL9AX Axisymmetric shell, 3 nodes, quadratic.
CL9BE
Curved beam, 3 nodes, 2-D, quadratic.
CQ8GW Groundwater flow, quadrilateral, 8

nodes, quadratic.
CL9PE
Infinite plane strain shell, 3 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ8HT Potential flow, quadrilateral, 8 nodes,

quadratic.
CL9TR Curved truss bar, 3-D, 3 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ8KD Layered groundwater flow, quadrilateral,

8 nodes, quadratic.
CQ12C
Quadrilateral base for composed solid, 12

nodes.
CQ8RE Reynolds flow, quadrilateral, 8 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ16A
Quadrilateral axisymmetric, 8 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ8TO Cross-section torsion, quadrilateral, 8

nodes, quadratic.
CQ16E
Quadrilateral plane strain, 8 nodes,

quadratic.
CT12A
Triangular axisymmetric, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ16M Quadrilateral plane stress, 8 nodes,

quadratic.
CT12E
Triangular plane strain, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ16O
CT12M Triangular plane stress, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
Quadrilateral plane stress, 8 nodes,

quadratic, orthotropic.
CQ18M Quadrilateral plane stress, 9 nodes,

quadratic, Lagrange.
CT12O
Triangular plane stress, 6 nodes,

quadratic, orthotropic.
CQ20A

quadratic, hyperelastic.
CT18C
Triangular contact interface, 3-D, 6

nodes.
CQ20E

CT18GE Triangular complete plane strain, 6

nodes, quadratic.
CQ22A

CT18GM Triangular plane stress, 3-D, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ22E

CT18P
Triangular plate bending, 6 nodes,

quadratic, Mindlin.
CQ24C
Quadrilateral contact interface, 3-D, 8

nodes.
CT18T
Triangular bounding, 6 nodes, quadratic,

3-D.
CQ24GE Quadrilateral complete plane strain, 8

nodes, quadratic.
CT18TM Triangular curved plane mass, 3-D, 6

nodes, quadratic.
CQ24GM Quadrilateral plane stress, 3-D, 8

nodes, quadratic.
CT27GE Triangular complete plane strain, 9

nodes, cubic.
CQ24P
Quadrilateral plate bending, 8 nodes,

quadratic, Mindlin.
CT27T
Triangular bounding, 9 nodes, cubic,

3-D.
CQ24T
Quadrilateral bounding, 8 nodes,

quadratic, 3-D.
CT30A
Triangular axisymmetric, 15 nodes,

quartic, Lagrange.
CQ24TM Quadrilateral curved plane mass, 3-D, 8

nodes, quadratic.
CT30E
Triangular plane strain, 15 nodes,

quartic, Lagrange, hyperelastic.
CQ36GE Quadrilateral complete plane strain, 12

nodes, cubic.
CT30F
Triangular flat shell, 6 nodes, quadratic,

Mindlin.
CQ36T
Quadrilateral bounding, 12 nodes, cubic,

3-D.
CT30L
Triangular curved shell, 6 nodes,

quadratic, layered.
CQ40F
Quadrilateral flat shell, 8 nodes,

quadratic, Mindlin.
CT30S

quadratic.
CQ40L
Quadrilateral curved shell, 8 nodes,

quadratic, layered.
CT36F
Triangular flat shell, 6 nodes, quadratic,

Mindlin + z d.o.f.
CQ40S

quadratic.
CT36I
Triangular interface, 3-D, 12 nodes,

quadratic.
CQ48F
Quadrilateral flat shell, 8 nodes,

quadratic, Mindlin + z d.o.f.
CT36L

quadratic, layered, Mindlin + z d.o.f.
CQ48I
Quadrilateral interface, 3-D, 16 nodes,

quadratic.
CT36S

CQ48L

quadratic, layered, Mindlin + z d.o.f.
CT45S
Triangular curved shell, 9 nodes, cubic.
CQ48S

CQ60S

cubic.
CQ8AG Axisymmetric groundwater flow,

CQ8AHT Axisymmetric potential flow,
CQ8CM Quadrilateral base for composed solid, 8
nodes.
CT6AG Axisymmetric groundwater flow,

triangle, 6 nodes, quadratic.
CT6AHT Axisymmetric potential flow, triangle, 6
nodes, quadratic.
CT6CM Triangular base for composed solid, 6
nodes.
CT6GW Groundwater flow, triangle, 6 nodes,
quadratic.
CT6HT Potential flow, triangle, 6 nodes,
quadratic.
CT6KD Layered groundwater flow, triangle, 6
453
nodes, quadratic.
nonlinear.
CT6RE Reynolds flow, triangle, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
L7BEN
Bending beam, 2 nodes, 2-D,

isoparametric.
CT6TO Cross-section torsion, triangle, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
L8IF
Line interface, 2-D, 4 nodes, linear.
N4IF
Node interface, 2-D, 2 nodes, linear.
CT9CM Triangular base for composed solid, 9

nodes.
N6IF
Node interface, 3-D, 2 nodes, linear.
CTE10G Groundwater flow, 3-D, pyramid, 10

nodes, quadratic.
N6SPR
Matrix spring, 3-D, 1 node.
PT1CR Crack tip, 2-D, 1 node.
CTE10H Potential flow, 3-D, pyramid, 10 nodes,

quadratic.
PT3RO Point mass, rotation, 1 node.

PT3T
Point mass, translation, 1 node.
CTE30
Solid pyramid, 10 nodes, quadratic.
Q12CT
CTE48
Solid pyramid, 16 nodes, cubic.
Quadrilateral contact interface, 3-D, 4

nodes.
CTP15G Groundwater flow, 3-D, wedge, 15

nodes, quadratic.
CTP15H Potential flow, 3-D, triangular prism
(wedge), 15 nodes, quadratic.
CTP45
Solid wedge, 15 nodes, quadratic.
CTP72
Solid wedge, 24 nodes, cubic.
HX24L
Solid brick, 8 nodes, linear.
HX25L
Solid brick, 8 nodes, linear, hyperelastic.
HX8GW Groundwater flow, 3-D, brick, 8 nodes,

linear.
HX8HT Potential flow, 3-D, brick, 8 nodes,
linear.
ICL6H
Potential flow, line interface, 6 nodes,

quadratic.
Q12GME Quadrilateral plane stress, 3-D, 4

nodes, linear.
Q12ME Quadrilateral plane stress, 4 nodes,
linear, drilling d.o.f.
Q12PL
Quadrilateral plate bending, 4 nodes,

linear, Mindlin.
Q12TB
Quadrilateral bounding, 4 nodes, linear,

3-D.
Q12TM Quadrilateral plane mass, 3-D, 4 nodes,

linear.
Q20SF
Quadrilateral flat shell, 4 nodes, linear,

Mindlin.
Q20SH

linear.
Q24IF
ICQ16H Potential flow, quadrilateral interface, 16

nodes, quadratic.
Quadrilateral interface, 3-D, 8 nodes,

linear.
Q24SF
ICT12H Potential flow, triangular interface, 12

nodes, quadratic.
Quadrilateral flat shell, 4 nodes, linear,

Mindlin + z d.o.f.
Q24SH

linear, Mindlin + z d.o.f.
IL4HT
Potential flow, line interface, 4 nodes,

linear.
IPT2H
Potential flow, point interface, 2 nodes.
Q48SPL Rectangular spline (strip), 8 nodes, 3

sections.
IQ8HT
Potential flow, quadrilateral interface, 8

nodes, linear.
Q4AGW Axisymmetric groundwater flow,

IT6HT
Potential flow, triangular interface, 6

nodes, malinear.
Q4AHT Axisymmetric potential flow,

L12BE

Timoshenko or Bernoulli.
Q4CMP Quadrilateral base for composed solid, 4

nodes.
L12IF
Line interface, 4 nodes, linear, linesolid

connection.
Q4GW
Groundwater flow, quadrilateral, 4

nodes, linear.
L13BE

isoparametric.
Q4HT
Potential flow, quadrilateral, 4 nodes,

linear.
L16IF
Line interface, to shell, 4 nodes, linear.
Q4KD
L20IF
Line interface, to shell, 3+2 nodes,

quadratic/linear.
Layered groundwater flow, quadrilateral,

4 nodes, linear.
Q4RE
Reynolds flow, quadrilateral, 4 nodes,

linear.
Q4TO
Cross-section torsion, quadrilateral, 4

nodes, linear.
L2CMP Straight composed line, 2 nodes.

L2HT
Cooling pipe, 2 nodes, linear.
L2TRU Truss bar, 1-D, 2 nodes.

L4CT
Line contact interface, 2-D, 2 nodes.
L4HT
Cooling pipe, 4 nodes, linear,

nonsymmetric.
L4TB
Line bounding, 2 nodes, linear, 2-D.
L4TM
Line mass, 2-D, 2 nodes, linear.
Q56SPL Rectangular spline (strip), 10 nodes, 4

sections.
Q8AXI

linear.
Q8EPS

linear.
L4TRU Truss bar, 2 nodes, 2-D geometrically

nonlinear.
Q8MEM Quadrilateral plane stress, 4 nodes,

linear.
L6AXI
Axisymmetric shell, 2 nodes, linear.
L6BEN

Timoshenko or Bernoulli.
Q8OME Quadrilateral plane stress, 4 nodes,

linear, orthotropic geometry.
L6PE
Infinite plane strain shell, 2 nodes, linear.
SP12BA Base spring, 2 nodes, 3-D.

SP1RO
Rotation spring/dashpot, 1 node.
L6TRU Truss bar, 2 nodes, 3-D geometrically

454

SP1TR
Translation spring/dashpot, 1 node.
SP2RO
Rotation spring/dashpot, 2 nodes.
T6AXI
Triangular axisymmetric, 3 nodes, linear.
SP2TR
Translation spring/dashpot, 2 nodes.
T6EPS
Triangular plane strain, 3 nodes, linear.
SP6BA
Base spring, 2 nodes, 2-D.
T6MEM Triangular plane stress, 3 nodes, linear.
T15SF
Triangular flat shell, 3 nodes, linear,

Mindlin.
T6OME Triangular plane stress, 3 nodes, linear,

orthotropic geometry.
T15SH
Triangular curved shell, 3 nodes, linear.
T9CT
T18FSH Triangular flat shell, 3 nodes, Kirchhoff,

analytically integrated.
linear.
Triangular contact interface, 3-D, 3

nodes.
T18IF
Triangular interface, 3-D, 6 nodes, linear.
T9GME Triangular plane stress, 3-D, 3 nodes,

linear.
T18SF
Triangular flat shell, 3 nodes, linear,

Mindlin + z d.o.f.
T9MEM Triangular plane stress, 3 nodes, linear,

drilling d.o.f.
T18SH
Triangular curved shell, 3 nodes, linear,

Mindlin + z d.o.f.
T9PLA
Triangular plate bending, 3 nodes, linear,

Kirchhoff.
T3AGW Axisymmetric groundwater flow,

triangle, 3 nodes, linear.
T9TB
Triangular bounding, 3 nodes, linear,

3-D.
T3AHT Axisymmetric potential flow, triangle, 3

nodes, linear.
T9TM
Triangular plane mass, 3-D, 3 nodes,

linear.
T3CMP Triangular base for composed solid, 3

nodes.
TE12L
Solid pyramid, 4 nodes, linear.
T3GW
Groundwater flow, triangle, 3 nodes,

linear.
T3HT
Potential flow, triangle, 3 nodes, linear.
T3KD
Layered groundwater flow, triangle, 3

nodes, linear.
T3RE
Reynolds flow, triangle, 3 nodes, linear.
T3TO
Cross-section torsion, triangle, 3 nodes,
TE4GW Groundwater flow, 3-D, pyramid, 4

nodes, linear.
TE4HT Potential flow, 3-D, pyramid, 4 nodes,
linear.
TP18L
Solid wedge, 6 nodes, linear.
TP6GW Groundwater flow, 3-D, wedge, 6 nodes,

linear.
TP6HT Potential flow, 3-D, wedge, 6 nodes,
linear.
Bibliography
[1] Albataineh, N. Slope Stability Analysis Using 2D and 3D Methods. Masters
thesis, University of Akron, 2006.
[2] Argyris, J., Haase, M., Mlejnek, H.-P., and Schmolz, P. K. TRUNC for
Shells - An Element Possibly to the Taste of Bruce Irons. Int. J. Num. Meth. Eng.
22 (1986), 93115.
[3] Carranza-Torres, J., and Labuz, J. Class notes on Underground Excavations
in Rock. Tech. rep., University of Minnesota, 2006.
[4] CEB-FIP. CEB-FIP Model Code 1990. Comite Euro-International du Beton, 1993.
[5] Chang, K., and Lee, G. Constitutive relations of structural steel under nonproportional loading. J. Eng. Mech. 112, 8 (1986), 806820.
[6] Collins, M. P., and Kuchma, D. A. How Safe Are Our Large, Lightly Reinforced
Concrete Beams, Slabs and Footings? ACI Structural Journal, 96-S54 (1999), 473
481.
[7] Giroud, J. P. Tables pour le calcul des fondations - Vol.2: Tassement. Dunod,
Paris, 1973.
[8] Hartley, M. J., Pavic, A., and Waldron, P. Investigation of pedestrian walking
loads on a cable stayed footbridge using modal testing and FE model updating. In
IMAC-XVII Proceedings (Bethel, 1999), pp. 10761082.
[9] Hordijk, D. A. Local Approach to Fatigue of Concrete. PhD thesis, Delft University
of Technology, 1991.
[10] JSCE. Japan Concrete Specification. Tech. rep., Japan Society of Civil Engineers,
1999. in Japanese.
[11] Kramer, S. L. Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering. Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
1996.
gh, P., Simionopoulos, K., Stanik, B., and Collins,
[12] Kuchma, D. A., Ve
M. P. The Influence of Concrete Strength, Distribution of Longitudinal Reinforcement, and Member Size, on the Shear Strength of Reinforced Concrete Beams. CEB
Bulletin dInformation, 237 (1997), 209229.
[13] NEN. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures Part 1-1: General rules and rules
for buildings. Tech. Rep. NEN-EN 1992-1-1, Nederlands Normalisatie-instituut, 2007.
[14] Shen, C., Mizuno, E., and Usami, T. A generalized two-surface model for structural steels under cyclic loading. Structural Engineering/Earthquake Engineering,
JSCE 10, 2 (1993), 5969.
[15] Thorenfeldt, E., Tomaszewicz, A., and Jensen, J. J. Mechanical properties
of high-strength concrete and applications in design. In Proc. Symp. Utilization of
High-Strength Concrete (Stavanger, Norway) (Trondheim, 1987), Tapir.
456
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Index
Page numbers. Bold face numbers indicate Concrete, 223
pages with formal information about the entry,
e.g., a syntax description (36). Italic numbers
point to an instructive example of how the concept in question might be used (132 ). Underlined numbers refer to theoretical backgrounds
on the subject (95).
Keywords. Sans serif type style refers to

the interactive interface (EYE). Typewriter style
refers to the batch interface (YOUNG).
A
ADIAB input, 139
Adiabatic hydration, 139
Aging, 48
Anticlastic bending, 209
Arc-length control, 66
Automatic load increments, 66
Automatic meshing, 15, 135
Automatic meshing, planar area, 13
B
B-spline, tendon, 51
Bar reinforcement, 51, 225
Beam elements, display style, 49, 151, 203, 214
Beam8 example, 179
Bedding, 108
Bending moments, curved shell elements, 120
Bending moments, diagram, 44
Bending moments, plate bending elements, 43
Bond-slip reinforcements, 311, 400
Bondslip example, 311
Boundary constraints, 24, 38
Boundary constraints, display, 25
BridgePier example, 399
Concrete, post-tensioned, 47
Concrete, slowly hardening, 131
Concrete, young hardening, 139
Contour plots, bending moments, 43, 120
Contour plots, displacement, 42, 120
Contour plots, stress, 121
Convection, boundary elements, 133
Convergence criteria, 66
CQ24P element, 33
Crack index, tensile strength input, 139
Cracking, 56
Cross-section, beam elements, 49
Cross-section, display, 107
Cross-section, truss elements, 164
Cyclic loading, 211
D
Deformed mesh, 29
Delaunay meshing, 135
DerResBea example, 149
Design checking, 237
Diagram, bending moment, 44
Displacement load, 25
Displacement, linear static analysis, 29
Divisions for meshing, 19
Dynamic relaxation, 71
DynRel example, 71
E
Eccent example, 223
Element directions, 14
Element types, 451
Energy norm, 66
ExcaSand example, 353
Extrusion, 108
F
C
Cable example, 163
Cable-stayed bridge, 163
CEMTYP input, young hardening concrete, 139
CfloorFX example, 33
Class-II beams, 49
CompLine example, 261
Composed line elements, 261
Composed surface elements, 287
Compression wave propagation, 423
CompSurf example, 287
CONCRE input, JSCE model code, 139
FCK91 input, 139

Floor, 33
Flowstress analysis, 129
FootDrain example, 367
FootEffS example, 383
Footing, 353, 367, 375, 383, 391, 399, 411, 417,
431
FootTotS example, 391
FootUndr example, 375
Free field, 423
FreeVib example, 417
458
INDEX
FX+, 7
Multidirectional fixed crack model, 56

G
Geometric nonlinearity, beam elements, 201

Geometric nonlinearity, curved shell elements,
193
Geometry, 10
GeoNLBeam example, 201
GeoNLPlate example, 193
Graph plotting, bending moment, 59
Graph plotting, stress, 58
Gravity acceleration, 40, 54, 112
Gravity acceleration, staggered analysis, 137
Grid snap, 8
GTB-table, 237
GtbPlate example, 237
H
HBTunnel example, 343
Help menu, FX+, 5
Help option, 5
Hoek-Brown rock plasticity, tunnel, 343
Hydration, staggered analysis, 139
I
Integration schemes, beam elements, 61
Integration schemes, nonlinear analysis, 61
Interface elements, elasticity, 99
Interface elements, modeling, 109
Isometric view, loading, 40
Isometric view, supports, 39
N
NINTEG input, beam elements, 61
Non-proportional loading, 211
Nonlinear analysis, Ultimate Limit State, 64
Nonlinear elasticity, interface elements, 99
NUMINT input, interface elements, 117
O
On-line help, 5
P
pedbrid example, 85
Phased analysis, 129
Phased analysis, nonlinear, 118
Phased analysis, tunnel section, 99
Plate bending elements, 33
PlateDesign example, 297
Post-tensioning, 47
Postprocessing, 29
PostTeFX example, 47
Power Law, viscoelasticity, 139
Pressure load, 40
Purification wall, 129
PurWalFX example, 129
Q
Quadratic elements, generation, 38
R
J
JSCE model code, young hardening concrete,
139
L
Lclip example, 7
Line Search, 66
Load combinations, 117
Loading, 25
LUMPED input, interface elements, 117
M
Mapped meshing, 18, 20, 21, 135
Material properties, specification, 35
Merge, nodes, 107
Meshing, 12
Meshing, automatic, 12, 37
Meshing, grid, 37
Meshing, loop, 37, 106
Meshing, mapped, 18, 20, 36
Meshing, planar, 12, 13
Meshing, reinforcement, 52, 185, 228
Modified two-surface model, 211
RCBeam2 example, 329

Reinforcement grid design checking, 237, 297
Reinforcement, display, 53
Reinforcement, modeling, 50
Reinforcement, plasticity, 66
Reinforcement, post-tensioned, 47
Reinforcement, stress in bar, 67
Relaxation, prestress, 62
S
Saving a model, 12
Seeding, 12, 20
Serviceability Limit State, 60, 155, 160
Shrunken elements view, 38
SlopeStab example, 411
SLS, see Serviceability Limit State
Soil column, viscous damping, 423
Soil column, wave propagation, 423
Spreadsheet output, 44
Staggered analysis, 129
Steel, 22, 164, 211
Stiffness adaptation analysis, 230, 254, 278, 294,
308
Stress, linear static analysis, 30
Supports, 25, 39
INDEX
459
Supports, graphic display, 25

Symmetry, 101, 110
T
Tabular output, 44
Tensile strength, concrete, 139
Thickness, curved shell elements, 194
Thickness, plane stress elements, 24, 225
Thickness, plate bending elements, 36
TIMFT input, 139
Transparency, 104
TunDyn example, 431
Tunnel, Hoek-Brown rock plasticity, 343
Tunnel, phased analysis, 99
TunnelPh example, 99
Twisting angle, 215
TwoSurface example, 211
U
ULS, see Ultimate Limit State
Ultimate Limit State, 64, 153, 160
Units, 8
User-defined derived results, 149
USRMAT user-supplied subroutine, 155
V
ViscDamp example, 423
Viscoelasticity, concrete creep, 139
Viscous damping, 423
Von Mises strain, effective, 215
W
Wave propagation, 423
Weight load, 40, 54
Y
YOUHAN input, JSCE model code, 139
YOUN91 input, 139
Z
Zooming, 24
460
INDEX

FXpDia (Modify)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FXpDia (Modify)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIANA

Finite Element Analysis

FX+ for DIANA

First edition, June 18, 2014.

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

3 Analysis with Diana

5 Analysis of a Concrete Floor

6 Post-tensioned Concrete Beam

8 Pedestrian Excitation on a Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge

9 Construction of a Tunnel Section

10 Early Age Behavior of a Purification Wall

11 Derived Results for Beams

12 Cablestayed Bridge Installation

13 Shear-force Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam

14 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Plate

15 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever Beam

16 Response of Steel Using Two-Surface Material Model

17 Eccentrically Loaded Reinforced Concrete Beam

18 Design Example GTB-table

19 Composed Line Elements

20 Composed Surface Elements

21 3D Reinforced Concrete Slab with Design Checks and Material Failure297

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

June 18, 2014 First ed.

23 Shear Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam Subjected to Prescribed

June 18, 2014 First ed.

24 Tunnel in a Hoek-Brown Rock Medium

25 Pit Excavation in 3D Layered Soil

26 Settlement of a Strip Footing - Nonlinear Drained Analysis

27 Nonlinear Undrained Drained Settlement Analysis

28 Nonlinear Effective Stress Undrained Analysis

29 Nonlinear Total Stress Undrained Analysis

30 Analysis of Bridge Pier Supported on Piled Footing

31 Slope Stability Analysis by Strength Reduction Method

32 Free Vibration Analysis of Soil Deposit and Dam

33 Compression Wave Propagation and Viscous Damping

34 Seismic Analysis of a Nonlinear Tunnel-Soil Model

A Available Element Types

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

3 Analysis with Diana

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

June 18, 2014 First ed.

5 Analysis of a Concrete Floor

June 18, 2014 First ed.

6 Post-tensioned Concrete Beam

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

8 Pedestrian Excitation on a Steel Cable Stayed Footbridge

9 Construction of a Tunnel Section

10 Early Age Behavior of a Purification Wall

11 Derived Results for Beams

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

June 18, 2014 First ed.

13 Shear-force Failure of Reinforced Concrete Beam

14 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of a Cantilever

15 Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis

12 Cablestayed Bridge Installation

June 18, 2014 First ed.

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

16 Response of Steel Using Two-Surface Material Model

17 Eccentrically Loaded Reinforced Concrete Beam

18 Design Example GTB-table

Diana-9.5 Users Manual FX+ for DIANA

June 18, 2014 First ed.